Lucent Technologies PSAX 2-Port E3 ATM Module ATM Module, PSAX 20, PSAX AC 60 Multiservice Media Gateway, PSAX 1000, 1250, 2300, 4500 PSAX Chassis User guide
PDF
Документ
Реклама
Реклама
PacketStar® PSAX 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide for the PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway Issue 1, August 2001 System Software Release 7.0 AQueView® EMS Software Release 5.0 Doc. No.: 255-700-171 Copyright © 2001 by Lucent Technologies. All rights reserved. For trademark, regulatory compliance, and related legal information, see the "Copyright and Legal Notices" section. Copyright and Legal Notices Copyright Copyright © 2001 by Lucent Technologies. All rights reserved. This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the express written consent of the originating organization and the business management owner of the material. This document was prepared by the Information Design and Development Team of Lucent Technologies, PacketStar® PSAX Products. Offices are located in Landover, Maryland, USA. Trademarks 7R/E, APX-8000, CellPipe, ConnectReach, ConnectStar, and STINGER are trademarks; and PacketStar, AQueView, Lucent Technologies, and the Lucent Technologies logo are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the USA. Other product and brand names mentioned in this guide are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Warranty Information Lucent Technologies provides a 90-day limited software warranty, and a oneyear limited hardware warranty on this product. Refer to the Software License and Limited Warranty Agreement and the Lucent Technologies InterNetworking Systems Global Warranty that accompanied your package for more information. Every effort has been made to ensure that this document is complete and accurate at the time of release, but information is subject to change. Lucent Technologies assumes no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this guide. ! CAUTION: Modifying or tampering with PSAX chassis components may void your warranty. Any modification to this equipment not expressly authorized PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 iii Copyright and Legal Notices Regulatory Standards Compliance by Lucent Technologies may void your granted authority to operate such equipment. ! CAUTION: When inserting modules into the chassis, slide them gently, not forcefully. Excessive force may cause the modules to be seated improperly in the chassis, and result in possible damage to the module or the chassis. Install or remove modules one at a time. Doing this aids in preventing the PSAX system from indicating any erroneous failure messages, and allows the PSAX system to reinitialize and display the accurate configuration of the module that is inserted. ! CAUTION: Shipping the chassis with removable modules installed may cause damage to the chassis and the modules. Damage to any of the components in the system resulting from shipping the chassis with removable modules installed could void your warranty. Only Lucentauthorized personnel should ship the PSAX chassis with a module installed. Regulatory Standards Compliance Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility The 2-Port E3 ATM module (model 20N22) is compliant with applicable safety and EMC standards when configured with the following PacketStar® PSAX systems: • PSAX 20 base system, 110 V ac (models 02S00 and 02S01) • PSAX AC 60 base systems: ~ PSAX AC 60 system, 110 V ac (models 50S01 and 51S01) ~ PSAX AC 60 system, 220 V ac (models 50S02 and 51S02) ~ PSAX AC 60 system, -48 V dc (models 50S48 and 51S48) • PSAX 1000 chassis (model 10S00) • PSAX 1250 chassis (models 20S00 and 20S10) • PSAX 2300 chassis (model 23S00) • PSAX 4500 chassis (model 45S00) Please refer to the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide or installation guide for additional information. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 iv Release 7.0 255-700-171 Copyright and Legal Notices Regulatory Statements Telecommunications The 2-Port E3 ATM module (model 20N22) is compliant with the following applicable telecommunications standards: • ETSI TBR 24:1997 (Europe) Regulatory Statements European Union Regulatory Statement CE Marking Hereby, Lucent Technologies declares that the PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V dc), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500, and PSAX AC 60 (-48 V dc) Multiservice Media Gateways, including the equipment documented in this publication, are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the following Council Directives: • Low Voltage 72/23/EEC • Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 89/336/EEC • Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment 1999/5/EC The Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways deployed in the European Economic Area (EEA) are intended for connection to E1, E3, STM-1, and STM-4c networks. The EC Declarations of Conformity may be viewed or printed at the following public-access Internet site: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary EU-regulativer CE-mærkning Lucent Technologies erklærer hermed at PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V dc), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500, and PSAX AC 60 (-48 V dc) Multiservice Media Gateways, inkl. det udstyr der findes behandlet i denne dokumentation, er i overensstemmelse med følgende EU-direktiver: • Lavspændingsdirektivet 72/23/EEC • EMC-direktivet 89/336/EEC • Direktivet om radio og teleterminaludstyr 1999/5/EC Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways, anvendt i EØS (Europæiske Økonomiske Samarbejde) skal forbindes med E1, E3, STM-1 og STM-4c netværk. EU-overensstemmelseserklæringen er at finde på følgende internetside hvorfra den også kan udskrives: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 v Copyright and Legal Notices Regulatory Statements Behördliche Standard-CE-Kennzeichnung für die Europäische Gemeinschaft CE-Markierung Hiermit erklärt Lucent Technologies, dass die PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V DC), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 und PSAX AC 60 (-48 V DC) Multiservice Media Gateways, einschließlich den in dieser Publikation dokumentierten Anlagen, die notwendigen Anforderungen und anderen relevanten Vorschriften der folgenden Council-Direktiven einhalten: • Niederspannungsdirektive 72/23/EEC • Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit (EMC) 89/336/EEC • Funkgeräte und Funkverkehr-Endeinrichtungen 1999/5/EC Die Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways, die in der Europäischen Gemeinschaft im Einsatz stehen, dienen zum Anschluss an folgende Netztypen: E1, E3, STM-1 und STM-4c. Die Konformitätserklärung für die Europäische Gemeinschaft kann auf folgendem, öffentlich zugänglichem Internet-Site eingesehen oder ausgedruckt werden: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary ¥²³²­·¸­¯¢ q¶¢¸½´³ ¸¬» }½¶º´¥¿¯ » ²º·¬» t µ¥²·¬ CE © ¸³ ´¥¶¢², ¬ Lucent Technologies, ¨¬°µ²©­ ¢¸­ ¸¥ PacketStar® PSAX1250 (-48Vdc), PSAX2300, PSAX4500, ¯¥­ PSAXAC60 (-48Vdc) Multiservice Media Gateways, ¯¥¹µ» ¯¥­ ³ ©®³´°­·±¢» ±© ¸¥ ²¸½´¥ ¸¬» ´¥¶³¤·¥» ¯¨³·¬», ©²¥¶±³²¡¾³²¸¥­ ±© ¸­» ¦¥·­¯» ¥´¥­¸ ·©­» ¯¥­ °³­´» ·¼©¸­¯» ¨­¥¸®©­» ¸º² ¨¬«­µ² ¸³½ t½±¦³½°¡³½: • ¥±¬° ¸·¬ 72/23/EOK • H°©¯¸¶³±¥«²¬¸­¯ ·½±¦¥¸¢¸¬¸¥ (EMC) 89/336/EOK • ¥¨­³ªº²­¯¢» ©®³´°­·±¢» ¯¥­ }®³´°­·±¢» ¸©¶±¥¸­¯³¤ ¸¬°©´­¯³­²º²­µ² 999/5/EK ¥ Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways, ´³½ ¼³½² ¸³´³¹©¸¬¹©¡ ·¸³² }½¶º´¥¿¯¢ ­¯³²³±­¯¢ µ¶³ (}}y) ´¶³³¶¡¾³²¸¥­ «­¥ ·¤²¨©·¬ ±© ¸¥ ¨¡¯¸½¥ E, E3, STM, ¯¥­ STM-4c. T­ m¬°µ·©­» }²¥¶±¢²­·¬» ¸¬» } ±´³¶³¤² ²¥ ´¶³¦°¬¹³¤² ²¥ ¸½´º¹³¤² ¥´¢ ¸¬² ´¥¶¥¯¸º ´¶³·­¸ ·¸³ ¯³­²¢ ¸³´³¹©·¡¥ ¸³½ ²¸©¶²©¸: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary Euroopan unionin sääntelystandardi CE-merkintä Lucent Technologies vakuuttaa täten, että PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V dc), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 ja PSAX AC 60 (-48 V dc) Multiservice Media Gatewayt ja tässä julkaisussa dokumentoidut laitteet, täyttävät seuraavien neuvoston direktiivien keskeiset vaatimukset ja asiaankuuluvat määräykset: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 vi Release 7.0 255-700-171 Copyright and Legal Notices Regulatory Statements • Pienjännite 72/23/EY • Sähkömagneettinen yhteensopivuus (EMC) 89/336/EY • Radiolaitteet ja telepäätelaitteet 1999/5/EY Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gatewayt, joita käytetään Euroopan talousalueella, on tarkoitettu liitettäväksi E1-, E3-, STM-1- ja STM-4c-verkkoihin. EU:n vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus voidaan nähdä tai tulostaa seuraavalta julkiselta Internet-sivulta: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary Norme réglementaire de l’Union européenne Label CE Lucent Technologies déclare en ceci que les passerelles de média multiservice PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V c.c.), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 et PSAX AC 60 (-48 V c.c.) sont conformes aux exigences essentielles et autres dispositions pertinentes des directives suivantes du Conseil : • Basse tension 72/23/CEE • Compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) 89/336/CEE • Matériel radio et terminaux de télécommunications 1999/5/CE Les passerelles de média multiservices PacketStar® PSAX de Lucent, commercialisées dans l’Espace économique européen sont destinées aux connexions à des réseaux E1, E3, STM-1 et STM-4c. Les déclarations de conformité CE peuvent être consultées ou imprimées à partir du site Internet d’accès public : http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary Normativa dell’Unione Europea Apposizione del marchio CE La Lucent Technologies dichiara che i gateway multiservizio PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V dc), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 e PSAX AC 60 (-48 V dc), inclusi quelli documentati in seguito, rispondono ai requisiti essenziali ed ad altre norme rilevanti delle seguenti direttive del Consiglio: • Direttiva 72/23/CEE “Basse tensioni” • Direttiva 89/336/CEE sulla compatibilità elettromagnetica • Direttiva 1999/5/CE riguardante le apparecchiature radio e le apparecchiature terminali di telecomunicazione I gateway multiservizio PacketStar® PSAX della lucent, impiegati nell’area economica europea (EEA), sono concepiti per il collegamento con reti E1, E3, STM-1 e STM-4c. Le dichiarazioni di conformità CE possono essere visionati o stampati presso il seguente sito Internet di pubblico accesso: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 vii Copyright and Legal Notices Regulatory Statements http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary Norm van de Europese Unie CE-markering Lucent Technologies verklaart hierbij dat de PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (48 V dc), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500, en PSAX AC 60 (-48 V dc) Multi Service Media Gateways voldoen aan de essentiële vereisten en andere relevante bepalingen van de volgende Richtlijnen van de Raad: • Laagspanning 72/23/EEG • Elektromagnetische compatibiliteit (EMC) 89/336/EEG • Radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindapparatuur 1999/5/EG De Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multi Service Media Gateways die in de Europese Economische Ruimte (EER) zijn ingezet, zijn bestemd voor aansluiting op E1, E3, STM-1 en STM-4c netwerken. DE EU-verklaringen van overeenstemming kunnen worden bekeken of afgedrukt op de volgende Internet-site met openbare toegang: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary Padrão Regulador da União Europeia Marca CE A Lucent Technologies vem por este meio declarar que os Concentradores de Acesso PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V dc), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 e PSAX AC 60 (-48 V dc), obedecem aos requisitos essenciais e a outras disposições relevantes das seguintes Directivas do Conselho: • Baixa Voltagem 72/23/EEC • Compatibilidade Electromagnética (EMC) 89/336/EEC • Equipamento de Rádio e Equipamento Terminal de Telecomunicações 1999/5/EC Os Concentradores de Acesso PacketStar® PSAX da Lucent instalados na Área Económica Europeia (EEA) foram concebidos para serem ligados a redes do tipo E1, E3, STM-1 e STM-4c. As Declarações de Conformidade CE podem ser vistas ou impressas no seguinte sítio de acesso público da Internet: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary Norma reguladora de la Unión Europea Marcas de la CE Por el presente, Lucent Technologies declara que las pasarelas de medios multiservicio PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V cc), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 y PSAX AC 60 (-48 V cc) Multiservice Media Gateways, inclusive el equipo PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 viii Release 7.0 255-700-171 Copyright and Legal Notices Regulatory Statements documentado en esta publicación, están en conformidad con los requisitos esenciales y otras disposiciones pertinentes de las siguientes directrices del consejo: • Bajo voltaje 72/23/EEC • Compatibilidad electromagnética (EMC) 89/336/EEC • Equipo de radio y equipo de terminales de telecomunicaciones 1999/5/EC Las pasarelas de medios multiservicio Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways desplegadas en el área económica europea (European Economic Area, EEA) están destinadas a conectarse en redes E1, E3, STM-1 y STM-4c. Las declaraciones de conformidad de la CE pueden verse o imprimirse en el siguiente sitio Internet de acceso público: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary Europeiska unionens standardförordning CE-märkning Lucent Technologies deklarerar härmed att PacketStar® PSAX 1250 (-48 V likström), PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500, och PSAX AC 60 (-48 V likström) Multiservice Media Gateways, inklusive den i denna publikation dokumenterade utrustning, uppfyller de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser som gäller enligt följande Europarådsdirektiv: • Lågspänning 72/23/EEC • Elektromagnetisk kompatibilitet (EMC) 89/336/EEC • Radioutrustning och telekommunikationskopplingsutrustning 1999/5/EC Lucent PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways, som är placerad i EEA (European Economic Area), är avsedd för att anslutas till E1, E3, STM-1 och STM-4c nätverk. Europarådets Konformitetsdeklarationer kan ses på bildskärm eller skrivas ut på följande, för allmänheten tillgängliga Internetställe: http://www.lucent.com/ins/doclibrary PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 ix Copyright and Legal Notices Regulatory Statements PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 x Release 7.0 255-700-171 Safety Warnings and Information When installing and operating the PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway, follow the safety guidelines provided below to help prevent serious personal injury and damage to the PSAX equipment. Please read all warnings and instructions supplied before beginning installation or configuration of the PSAX equipment. In addition to the general safety information provided below, you should also refer to the text in the user and installation guides for other important safety information and procedures. ! DANGER: Read all installation instructions before connecting the system to a power source. ! WARNING: Be sure to use the ejector handles during installation and removal of I/O and server modules. ! WARNING: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage module and chassis components. All personnel should be grounded and follow proper ESD procedures before installing, removing, or handling hardware components. ! CAUTION: Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all laws and regulations in your specific geographic region. ! CAUTION: Do not make electrical or mechanical modifications to any of the components in the PSAX system. Lucent Technologies is not responsible for the safety or the performance of a modified Lucent product. Do not attempt to repair any failed Power Supply module, Stratum 3–4 module, CPU module, I/O, or server module. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 xi Safety Warnings and Information PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 xii Release 7.0 255-700-171 Contents Copyright and Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Regulatory Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Telecommunications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Regulatory Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v European Union Regulatory Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v CE Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Safety Warnings and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-1 Purpose of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 Audience for This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 What You Should Know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1 Related Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Lucent Technologies Information Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Product Information Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Printed Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Other Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 About Lucent Technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 For More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 About the PacketStar® PSAX Product Family. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Text Types Used in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Icons and Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Electrostatic Discharge Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Grounding Wrist Straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Floor Covering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Handling PSAX System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Comments on This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 xiii Contents 2 Module Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-1 Overview of the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Speed, Power Consumption, and Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-3 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3-1 Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3-1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3-1 Loopback Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3-1 Configuring the Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3-3 Viewing Port Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 4-1 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 Loopback Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 Using the Right-Click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-2 Configuring Ports and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-2 Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-3 Configuring the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4-4 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4-5 Copying a Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 4-9 Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Viewing Port Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 5-1 Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5-1 Configuring the ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5-1 Optimizing SVC Call Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5-1 Configuring the ATM IISP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5-2 Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5-7 Configuring the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5-7 Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Configuring ATM UNI ILMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Displaying Registered Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Viewing ILMI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Optimizing SVC Call Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Configuring PNNI ILMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 xiv Release 7.0 255-700-171 Contents Viewing PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Viewing PNNI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Changing PNNI Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Changing the Non-administrative Weight Values for the ATM PNNI Interface. . . . . . .5-34 Taking the Interface Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Deleting the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-1 Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 Setting Up the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1 Adding NSAP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6 Copying an Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8 Viewing Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9 Interface Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Setting Up the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Adding NSAP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21 Copying an Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23 Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24 Interface Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26 Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29 Setting Up the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29 Viewing Registered Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32 Viewing ILMI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33 Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34 Setting Up the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34 Adding NSAP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40 Copying an Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42 Viewing Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43 Interface Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45 Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48 Setting Up the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48 Viewing Registered Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52 Viewing ILMI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52 Changing PNNI Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53 Changing the Non-administrative Weight Values for the ATM PNNI Interface . . . .6-53 Taking the Interface Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53 Deleting the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-1 Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 Provisioning PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Viewing ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 xv Contents Adding/Viewing a Backup PVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Adding ATM-to-ATM VPC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Creating a ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Viewing ATM-to-ATM VPC Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Adding/Viewing a Backup ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM PVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Backup Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Adding Frame Relay-to-ATM PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39 Configuring Traffic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Viewing the Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46 Adding an In-Band Management ATM PVC Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 Creating an In-Band-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 Setting PVC Connections for Direct In-band Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54 Adding Bridge-to-ATM PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 Creating a Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 Viewing Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62 Creating Backup PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 Adding VBR-to-ATM PVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67 Creating a VBR-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67 Viewing the VBR-to-ATM Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73 Adding/Viewing a Backup PVC Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75 Adding VBR-to-VBR PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76 Provisioning SVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83 Viewing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83 Enabling SVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84 Setting Up a PNNI Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84 Setting Up an IISP Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85 Editing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connection Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85 Viewing or Editing an ATM-to-ATM SVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85 Viewing Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91 Adding Entries to the ATM IISP CBR Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93 Creating IISP VBR Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93 Adding Entries to the ATM IISP VBR Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95 Creating IISP VBR Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95 Provisioning SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96 Adding ATM-to-ATM SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96 Creating an ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96 Viewing Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103 Adding NSAP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105 Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-106 Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-106 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 xvi Release 7.0 255-700-171 Contents Viewing Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-112 Adding Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-114 Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-114 Configuring Traffic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-120 Viewing Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-123 Adding VBR-to-ATM SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-124 Creating a VBR-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-124 Viewing Connection Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-129 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8-1 Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 PVC Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 Managing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Searching for Specific Connection Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Viewing Connection Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Displaying and Updating Connection Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Display Connection Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Copying a Connection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Filtering Connections in the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Filtering the Listing Page by Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Filtering the Listing Page by PSAX Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 SPVC NSAP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 AAL2 Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Configuring AAL2 Trunking with DSP Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Adding an AAL2 Trunk Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Deleting an AAL2 Trunk Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Creating Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Using the Right-Click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Connection Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Provisioning PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Adding ATM-to-ATM PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Creating an ATM-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Primary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Polling Statistics Using the Odometer Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Backup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37 Adding ATM-to-ATM VPC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39 Creating an ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39 Primary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45 Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46 Polling Statistics Using the Odometer Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-49 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 xvii Contents Backup Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50 Utilization Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53 Adding a Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Creating a Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Primary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60 Statistics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61 Backup Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 Utilization Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67 Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 Primary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75 Statistics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76 Backup Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78 Utilization Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80 Adding a Frame Relay-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83 Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83 Primary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89 Statistics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90 Backup Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93 Utilization Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96 Adding an In-Band Management ATM PVC Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Disabling an SVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Creating an In-Band-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101 Primary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105 Backup Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106 Adding a VBR-to-ATM VCC Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109 Creating a VBR-to-ATM VCC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109 Primary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115 Statistics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-116 Backup Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119 Utilization Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122 Adding a VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124 Creating a VBR-to-VBR VCC Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124 Primary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129 Statistics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130 Utilization Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131 Provisioning SVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-134 Viewing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-134 Enabling SVC Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-135 Setting Up a PNNI Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-135 Setting Up an IISP Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-135 Editing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connection Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-136 Viewing or Editing an ATM-to-ATM SVC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-136 Primary Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-137 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 xviii Release 7.0 255-700-171 Contents Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-141 Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-143 Configuring IISP Routing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-146 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-147 Creating a VBR or CBR Routing Table Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-148 Deleting a Routing Table Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-152 Provisioning SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-154 Adding ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-154 Creating an ATM-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-154 Primary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-159 Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-161 Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-163 Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-165 Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-165 Primary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-171 Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-173 Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-175 Adding Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-178 Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-178 Primary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-184 Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-186 Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-188 Adding VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-191 Creating a VBR-to-ATM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-191 Primary Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-197 Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-198 Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-201 Deleting Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-204 Appendix A: Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Overview of This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A-1 ATM Traffic Descriptors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A-1 Purpose of Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A-1 Connections Supporting Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A-1 ATM UNI Specification Cause Codes Table for Connection Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 A-3 Connection Retry Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 A-3 DSP Tone Detection Modes Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 A-5 DSP2C Module Channel Reduction When Using Fax Relay Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 A-5 Industry Compliance Specifications Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 A-6 Interface Type by Connection Type Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27 A-27 Interface Type by I/O Module Type Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 A-28 Minimum AAL2 Trunk Size Requirements Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32 A-32 Example Using Table A-7 Data for 32 Kbps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33 A-33 Fax Relay Using AAL2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34 A-34 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 xix Contents Module Alarm Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34 Quality of Service (QoS) Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36 Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 xx Release 7.0 255-700-171 1 Getting Started Purpose of This Guide The PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide provides information about the following: • Configuring the ports, channels, and interfaces for the 2-Port E3 ATM module • Provisioning connections for permanent virtual circuits (PVCs), switched virtual circuits (SVCs), and soft permanent virtual circuits (SPVCs) Note: If you are using this module to provision connections for the first time, you should read through this guide before beginning the provisioning process. Audience for This Guide The information in this guide is intended for users who will configure ports and channels for the 2-Port E3 ATM module, configure the interface types, and provision connections for the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway system, whether using the console or the AQueView® element management software system. What You Should Know Before you use this document or operate a PacketStar® PSAX device, you should already understand and have experience with the following: • ATM Forum and Frame Relay Forum specifications • Ethernet network capabilities • Internet Protocol capabilities • Data network design • Telephony network design PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 1-1 Chapter 1 Getting Started Related Reading Related Reading Lucent Technologies Information Products Product Information Library To install and configure your PSAX system and I/O or server modules, read the PSAX publications provided on your Lucent Technologies PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways Central Office (CO) Products, Product Information Library CD-ROM. Printed Documents For your convenience, many of the documents included on the PacketStar Multiservice Media Gateway Central Office (CO) Products Product Information Library CD-ROM are also available in printed form. You can order these documents through the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center Web site at: www.lucentdocs.com. Other Publications Numerous books are currently available on the subject of basic telecommunications technology and specific protocols. In addition to such general reading, you should also be familiar with the specifications identified in the appendix entitled Reference Tables at the back of the guide. About Lucent Technologies History Lucent Technologies is the communications systems and technology company formed through the restructuring of AT&T. We bring with us a tradition of more than 125 years of experience and a dedication to superior customer service. Lucent Technologies manufactures, sells, and services a complete line of customer premises communications units, and commercial and multimedia communications and messaging systems designed and supported by our research and development unit, Bell Laboratories. Our legacy and our spirit of innovation allow Lucent to provide our customers with the tools needed to communicate effectively, any time and anywhere, and to integrate the latest technologies into real-life solutions that help make business work. For More Information To learn more about the PacketStar® PSAX family of ATM Multiservice Media Gateways and the complete line of Lucent Technologies products, visit our Web site at www.lucent.com. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 1-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 1 Getting Started About the PacketStar® PSAX Product Family About the PacketStar® PSAX Product Family Lucent Technologies provides a complete range of PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways in the PacketStar® PSAX family, as described in Table 1-1. Table 1-1. PacketStar® PSAX Product Family Target Market Small Customer Premises Device Name PSAX 20 Application/Description The PacketStar® PSAX 20 Multiservice Media Gateway is the most scalable and flexible multiservice access product in its class. This scalability enables service providers to meet the demands of a growing enterprise customer with a single-edge solution. The PSAX 20 system is nonredundant. Supporting two slots for I/O and server modules and two factoryinstalled components (Enhanced DS1 and DSP2C Voice Server) and a 600 Mbps ATM cell bus architecture, this system optimizes wide area network (WAN) bandwidth with toll-quality voice compression, traffic optimization, and port scalability from T1/E1 to OC-3c/STM-1c connections. It also supports a full range of interfaces such as DS1, DS3, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and serial. Small Customer Premises PSAX AC 60 The PacketStar® PSAX AC 60 Multiservice Media Gateway is ideal for enterprise networks seeking to consolidate branch office voice, video, and data traffic onto a single ATM network. The PSAX AC 60 system is nonredundant. Supporting four slots for I/O and server modules, this system offers high port-density in a small footprint for mid- to large-sized customer premises applications. The PSAX AC 60 chassis has a 650 Mbps backplane and supports a full range of interfaces such as DS1/E1, DS3/E3, OC-12c/STM-4c, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and serial. Carrier-Class Office PSAX 1250 The PacketStar® PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway is designed to provide a full range of central office-based multiservice ATM access functions. Ideal for the central office or a large enterprise’s multiservice media gateway, the PacketStar® PSAX 1250 system provides highly reliable network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, and ATM data applications. Supporting ten slots (19-inch chassis) or 14 slots (23-inch chassis) for I/O and server modules, a 1.2 Gbps ATM cell bus architecture, carrierclass reliability, full redundancy, and a full range of interfaces such as DS1/E1, DS3/E3, OC-12c/STM-4c, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and serial, the PSAX 1250 system is a cost-effective access switch solution for bridging to legacy equipment. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 1-3 Chapter 1 Getting Started Text Conventions Table 1-1. PacketStar® PSAX Product Family Target Market Carrier-Class Office Device Name PSAX 2300 Application/Description ® The PacketStar PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway offers carrier-grade, high-density multiservice ATM access functions. Designed as the multiservice media gateway for the central office or for a large enterprise customer, the PacketStar® PSAX 2300 system provides network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, and ATM data applications. Supporting 15 slots for I/O and server modules, a 3.9 Gbps ATM cell bus architecture, carrier-class reliability, full redundancy, provisions for OC-12c/STM-4c interfaces, N x T1/E1 module protection switching, and a full range of interfaces such as DS1/E1, DS3/E3, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and serial the PSAX 2300 system solves many demanding and diverse network design challenges with ease. Carrier-Class Office PSAX 4500 The PacketStar® PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway offers up to 10 Gbps of switching capacity, the highest in the PacketStar® family, and carrier-class reliability. The PSAX 4500 system offers an unmatched range of service capabilities, end-to-end traffic prioritization, “any-service, any-channel” flexibility, and breakthrough voice technology. The new high-performance backplane design supports 15 interface slots. In four segments, the unique PSAX 4500 backplane allows each segment to be scaled independently to provide nonblocking, redundant chassis bandwidths beyond 10 Gbps. Protection for two groups of four multiport DS3, STS-1e, and E3 modules is provided via an N:1 protection scheme using rear access line interface modules. The protection module can fill in so that on the failure of any one of the four modules, traffic is maintained. Using the latest voice-compression technology, the DSP2x Voice Server modules deliver service providers eight times the capacity of traditional time division multiplex circuits while maintaining toll quality and reducing costs by nearly 30 percent per channel. A single PSAX 4500 system at the edge of the carrier network can transition traffic from a large number of network customers over high-speed OC-12c/STM-4c trunks into the ATM core, managing the whole quickly and efficiently, down to the individual permanent virtual circuit. Text Conventions Text Types Used in This Document This book uses a different kind of type for each kind of text you will see on screens and equipment. In general, text you see in the book will closely PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 1-4 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 1 Getting Started Text Conventions resemble what you see on the screens and equipment. The following table shows how each typographical convention is used. Appearance How it is used SANS SERIF BOLD, ALL CAPS Labels on module panels, chassis faceplates, or other hardware Fixed-width normal Message text displayed on the user interface window Serif bold • Button name (GUI interface) or command name (console interface) on the user interface window • Literal text for values that the user types in fields or selects from predefined sets of values for fields • Command keywords or literal argument values Fixed-width bold System prompt displayed on the user interface window Serif italics • A variable name or string for which you will substitute your own information • An argument or parameter on a command line for which you will substitute your own information Icons and Symbols Standard icons and symbols to alert you to dangers and cautions are listed below. ! DANGER: Warnings for a personal injury hazard are identified by this format. ! WARNING: Warnings relating to risk of equipment damage or failure are identified by this format. ! CAUTION: Warnings relating to risk of data loss or other general precautionary notes are identified by this format. Note: Identifies additional information pertinent to the text preceding this note. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 1-5 Chapter 1 Getting Started Electrostatic Discharge Precautions Electrostatic Discharge Precautions The room where the PSAX system is located must have built-in precautions to provide protection from electrostatic discharge damage to electronic components. The following sections provide details on these necessary precautions. Grounding Wrist Straps Attach at least one grounding wrist strap to a common ground for each chassis/electronic rack to be handled. Follow these guidelines for wrist straps: • Make sure the wrist straps or wrist strap cords have built-in 1-megaohm (minimum) resistance. • Make sure the wrist straps and wrist strap cords are UL listed. • Ensure the wrist strap cord is long enough so it can be worn while working either at the front or the back of the rack. • Always discharge any static charge by touching your wrist strap before you touch the PSAX chassis. Floor Covering Be sure the room has an antistatic floor covering (conductive mat, tiles, or carpeting) to minimize static charge buildup as you walk across the room. Follow these guidelines for installing and maintaining proper floor coverings: • Using foot grounding straps (attached to the heels of your shoes) is recommended, even if you are walking in rooms with antistatic floor covering. These straps provide additional protection against electrostatic discharge. The straps should have built-in 1-megaohm (minimum) resistance. • Wool carpet is not an acceptable floor covering. • Other types of carpet must be sprayed daily with a topical antistatic chemical before you perform any work in the room. Paying constant attention to carpet maintenance is time-consuming but required, if used. Temperature and Humidity Establishing the proper temperature and humidity in the room where the PSAX system is located helps control many static discharge problems. Maintaining proper room climate is especially important when heat is turned on during the cold weather. To avoid damage to the PSAX system, do not allow the humidity to increase to the level where water droplets appear on surfaces. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 1-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 1 Getting Started Technical Support Clothing When working with the PSAX system, avoid wearing clothing made from wool or synthetic materials. Try to minimize contact between clothing and electronic components. Handling PSAX System Components Follow these guidelines for proper handling of the PSAX hardware to minimize electrostatic discharge damage: • Do not remove the chassis, modules, and other items from their protective packaging until you are ready to install them. • When installing modules and components, use a grounding wrist strap connected to a common electrical ground to prevent electrostatic discharge damage. (A common electrical ground is a complete circuit between a person or an electrical/electronic device and the earth.) • Store components in electrostatic-discharge-protective bags when they are not in use. Technical Support If you experience a problem with your PSAX system, refer to the Lucent Technologies InterNetworking Systems Global Warranty, which accompanied your shipment, for instructions on obtaining support in your area. Comments on This Guide To comment on the PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, please complete the comment card that accompanied your shipment and mail it to the following address: Manager, Information Design and Development Team Lucent Technologies PacketStar PSAX Products 8301 Professional Place Landover, MD 20785 USA You can also fax the comment card to us at: 301-809-4540. Before You Begin Before you start setting up, configuring, and using your new PSAX system, be sure you complete the following: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 1-7 Chapter 1 Getting Started Before You Begin • Carefully read the safety cautions listed in the section, “Safety Information,” at the beginning of this guide. • Record your site-specific specifications such as the IP addresses you will use, and the connections and interfaces you will need. Decide which user names and passwords you will assign. • Make sure you have IP connectivity to all PSAX devices to be managed. • Determine the numbering scheme for the in-band connections you will be using. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 1-8 Release 7.0 255-700-171 2 Module Description Overview of the Module The 2-Port E3 ATM module provides a network interface with a line rate of 34.368 Mbps. Typically, this module is used to connect the PSAX system to an ATM edge switch. Each port can be configured for ATM service, including ATM UNI 3.0, 3.1, and 4.0; IISP user and network; and ATM PNNI 1.0 interfaces. This module has three light-emitting diode (LED) indicators. FAIL ACTIVE E3 ATM L0S TX RX L0S TX RX Figure 2-1. 2-Port E3 ATM Module Software Features The 2-Port E3 ATM module uses ATM Forum specifications UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1, which allow either E3 port to act as a user network interface (UNI), an interim inter-switch protocol (IISP) user or network interface, or as a PNNI network interface to an ATM network. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 2-1 Chapter 2 Module Description Hardware Features Hardware Features The 2-Port E3 ATM module has the following features: • Number of ports: two • Connector type: four BNC connectors for the two ports (each port has one receive connector and one transmit connector) • Line rate: 34.368 Mbps (typical) • Line encoding mode: HDB3 • Line type: G832 • Loopback capabilities: local loop, line loop, payload loop • Cell mapping: direct mapping Hardware Specifications Table 2-1 shows the general physical and environmental hardware specifications for the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway I/O and server modules. Table 2-1. Physical Hardware Specifications for the I/O and the Server Modules Specification Description Dimensions: • Height: 15.74 cm (6.2 in.) • Width: 2.41 cm (0.95 in.) • Depth: 24.13 cm (9.5 in.) Weight: 0.45 kg (1.0 lb.) Operating temperature: 0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F) Operating relative humidity: 40 to 60%, optimum; up to 95%, noncondensing Storage temperature: -20° to 70° C (-4° to 158° F) Chassis Speed, Power Consumption, and Memory Allocation Chassis speed, power consumption, and memory allocation specifications for the 2-Port E3 ATM module are described in Table 2-2. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 2-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 2 Module Description LED Status Indicators Table 2-2. Chassis Speed, Power Consumption, and Memory Allocation Specifications Module 2-Port E3 ATM (E3 ATM) Total Amount of SDRAM 8–64 MB Maximum Module Input Program and Buffer * Data Space 3 MB 1 MB Output Buffer Total minus 4 MB Chassis Speed † Low Speed Power Consumption 15 W * The I/O buffers carry 16,384 cells per megabyte. † This column relates only to the performance of the module in the PSAX 4500 chassis. All modules operate in a lowspeed mode in all other PSAX chassis. The speed relates to the performance of the data being passed through the midplane of the chassis. LED Status Indicators Table 2-3 describes how the light-emitting diode (LED) indicators on the 2Port E3 ATM module faceplates respond to different module conditions. These LEDs indicate if the module has been installed properly. Table 2-3. LED Indicators for the 2-Port E3 ATM Module Module Status LED Initial Power-On Cable on Port FAIL (red) Lights briefly1 Not lit Lights only Not when the Applicable module is not functioning Not Applicable ACTIVE (green) Lights briefly1 Not lit Lights only Not when the Applicable module is functioning properly Not Applicable PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 No One or More Configured Configured No Cable on Ports Ports Port Release 7.0 2-3 Chapter 2 Module Description LED Status Indicators Table 2-3. LED Indicators for the 2-Port E3 ATM Module Module Status LED LOS2 (Loss of Signal) (yellow) Initial Power-On Lights briefly3 No One or More Configured Configured No Cable on Ports Ports Port Not Applicable Not Applicable Lights Cable on Port • Does not light if signal is being received • Lights if signal is missing 1 Note: After power is initially applied to the system and the system boot is complete, the FAIL and ACTIVE LEDs indicate whether the module has no configured ports (red), or one or more configured ports (green). 2 Note: This module does not have this label next to the LED indicator on the faceplate. 3 Note: After power is initially applied to the system and the system boot is complete, the LOS LED indicates whether the port has a cable connected to it. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 2-4 Release 7.0 255-700-171 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Overview of This Chapter This chapter describes how to: • Set the values for the port configuration for the 2-Port E3 ATM module • Set the values for the interface type configuration for the 2-Port E3 ATM module Before You Begin Be sure you have done the following first before beginning configuration of the 2-Port E3 ATM module: • Set the values to configure your basic system (see "Configuring the System for Your Site" in the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide) • Set the values to configure the Stratum 3–4 module (see "Configuring the Stratum 3–4 Module" in the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide) To configure the 2-Port E3 ATM module, you must configure the interface for one or both ports. ! CAUTION: When using a DSP2A, DSP2B, DSP2C, or DSP2D Voice Server module and an Enhanced DS1 or E1 module with a PBX and/or key telephone system, the PSAX system and your equipment should use a common chassis ground connection to avoid ground current loops, which could affect voice quality. Loopback Configuration Options To aid network troubleshooting and testing, loopback capability is provided for the 2-Port E3 ATM module. The loopback option on the module’s port and channel configuration window for the module enables you to verify the integrity of a port by transmitting a received signal back to the source. Selecting a loopback option is described in the module configuration procedure provided in this chapter. If configuring a pair of 2-Port E3 ATM module in the primary and standby setup, the desired loopback option must be configured by the user on both the primary and standby modules prior to bringing the pair into service. This PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 3-1 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Loopback Configuration Options parameter is applied on a port-by-port basis on both the primary and standby modules. If the line loop or local loop configuration is transferred from port A on the primary module to port B on the standby module, the port parameter does not transfer; it must be pre-configured on the standby by the user. Figure 3-1 illustrates the line loop, payload loop, and local loop options. Figure 3-1. Loopback Configuration Options on Certain I/O Modules The following I/O modules have loopback capability: • 6-Port Enhanced DS1/T1 Multiservice module • 6-Port DS1 IMA module • 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module • 6-Port Enhanced E1 Multiservice module • 6-Port E1 IMA module • 21-Port High-Density E1 Multiservice module • 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice and CES modules • 1-Port Channelized Channelized STS-1e, T1 Format module • 2-Port DS3 ATM module • 1-Port Unchannelized DS3 Frame Relay module • 1-Port DS3 IMA module PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 3-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Configuring the Ports • 3-Port Channelized DS3/STS-1e CES module • 3-Port Unstructured DS3/E3 CES module (payload loop not supported) • 2-Port E3 ATM module • 1-Port OC-3c Multimode and Single-Mode (Traffic Shaping and AQueMan) modules • 1-Port STM-1 Multimode and Single-Mode (Traffic Shaping and AQueMan) modules The following modules support line loop or local loop only if the standby is preconfigured on a port-by-port basis: • 1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS Multimode and Single-Mode modules • 1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP Multimode and Single-Mode modules • 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP Multimode and Single-Mode modules Configuring the Ports You must first configure the ports and channels of the 2-Port E3 ATM module before you can set up connection provisioning. To configure the 2-Port E3 ATM module, perform the steps in the following procedure. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 3-3 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Configuring the Ports Configuring the Ports Begin 1 On the Console Interface Main Menu window (see Figure 3-2), select the Equipment Configuration option and press Enter. Figure 3-2. Console Interface Main Menu (Equipment Configuration Selected) The Equipment Configuration window (see Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4) is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 3-4 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Configuring the Ports Figure 3-3. Equipment Configuration Window (As Displayed on the PSAX 20 and AC 60 Console) Figure 3-4. Equipment Configuration Window (As Displayed on the PSAX 1250 and PSAX 2300 Console) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 3-5 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Configuring the Ports 2 On the Equipment Configuration window, select an E3 ATM module in the list and press Enter. The E3 Configuration window (see Figure 3-5) is displayed. Figure 3-5. Commands E3 Configuration Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command • Update Display Function Updates the values in the fields to show the most current configuration Use this command mostly to display the most current information in the Line Status field. • Delete All Interfaces Deletes the configured interfaces for the two ports. The value Unconfigured is displayed in the Interface Type and the Oper Status fields. You must take all interfaces out of service (using the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command) before you can use this command to delete all the configured interfaces. • Bring All Interfaces Into Service PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 3-6 Brings the out-of-service configured interfaces for the two ports to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the Oper Status field. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Configuring the Ports Command • Take All Interfaces Out of Service Function Takes the in-service configured interfaces for the two ports to out-of-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the Oper Status field. You must use this command first before using the Delete All Interfaces command. • Go Back to Equipment Configuration Redisplays the Equipment Configuration window (see Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4). 3 Select one of the lines with the port you want to configure and press Enter. The E3 Port and Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-6) is displayed. Figure 3-6. Commands E3 Port and Channel Configuration Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command • Apply Port and Channel Configuration Function For a specified port number value, applies the configuration field values you set. • Reset Port and Channel Resets the fields to the last set of saved Display values. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 3-7 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Configuring the Ports Command Field Descriptions Function • Bring Interface Into Service (displayed when the [Oper Status] field is OutOfService) Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Oper Status] field. • Take Interface Out of Service (displayed when the [Oper Status] field is InService) Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Oper Status] field. • Configure Interface Displays the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window. • View Port Statistics Displays the E3 Port Statistics window (see Figure 3-7). • Go Back to Card Configuration Redisplays the E3 Configuration window (see Figure 3-5). 4 Select the values for the fields on these windows from the values given in Table 3-1. Table 3-1. Field Values for the E3 Port and Channel Configuration Window Field Name Loopback Config Transmit Clock Values Default: NoLoop The port is not in the loopback state. LocalLoop The signal is received from another module in the chassis, sent through the module circuitry, including the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) function, and the chassis backplane to the originating module. PayloadLoop The received signal is sent through the framing chip on the module, but not the SAR circuitry, and then back out to the originating point. The data link is regenerated. LineLoop The received signal is sent through the receiver and the line driver, and then back out to the originating point. Default: Indicates that a local clock source is used as the transmit clock. LocalTiming LoopTiming Indicates that the recovered receive clock is used as the transmit clock. Adaptive Timing Monitors the port buffers to increase or decrease the transmission rate. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 3-8 Description Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Configuring the Ports Table 3-1. Field Values for the E3 Port and Channel Configuration Window Field Name Line Scramble Values Enabled Enables ATM cell payload scrambling (optimized cell synchronization). Disabled Disables ATM cell payload scrambling. G832 Line type supported as differentiated from type G.751. Hdb3 High-density bipolar 3 (HDB3). A bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3 consecutive zeros. DirectMapping This interface uses cell mapping in accordance with G.804, Sec. 6.1, as differentiated from PLCP cell mapping. (display only) NoAlarm, or one of several alarms See the bit map tables for the E3 module under the MIB object lineStatus in Appendix A, "SNMP Trap Messages"in any PacketStar User Guide, Release 6.0.0 or higher. Interface Type Unconfigured The interface for this channel is not configured. AtmUni3-0 Indicates that the channel is configured for the ATM UNI 3.0 interface. AtmUni3-1 Indicates that the channel is configured for the ATM UNI 3.1 interface. AtmUni4-0 Indicates that the channel is configured for the ATM UNI 4.0 interface. IispUser This interface is configured for ATM IISP user. IispNetwork This interface is configured for ATM IISP network. AtmPnni1-0 This interface is configured for ATM PNNI Network. Unconfigured The interface for the port is not configured. OutOfService The interface has not yet been brought into service, or in-service interface has been set to out of service with the Take Interface Out of Service command. InService The interface has been brought into service with the Bring Interface Into Service command. [Line Type] Default: (display only) [Line Coding] (display only) [Cell Mapping] (display only) [Line Status] [Admin Status] (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Description Release 7.0 3-9 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Viewing Port Statistics Table 3-1. Field Values for the E3 Port and Channel Configuration Window Field Name [Oper Status] (display only) Values Description Unconfigured This channel is not operational because the interface is not configured. InService This channel is capable of receiving and sending signals. OutOfService This channel is not capable of receiving and sending signals. 5 To apply the values for the fields, select the Apply Port and Channel Configuration command and press Enter. 6 Select the Configure Interface command and press Enter. The ATM UNI Interface Configuration window is displayed. 7 Repeat steps 3–6 for the second port as needed. Note: Whenever needed, use the commands on the E3 Configuration window (see Figure 3-5), and the E3 Port and Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-6) to manage the interfaces. End Viewing Port Statistics To view statistics for this port, perform the steps in the following procedure. On the E3 Port and Configuration window (see Figure 3-5), select the View Port Statistics command and press Enter. The E3 Port Statistics window (see Figure 3-7) is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 3-10 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Viewing Port Statistics Figure 3-7. Commands E3 Port Statistics Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Field Descriptions Function • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Reset Statistics Sets all field values to zero. • Go Back to DS3 or E3 Port Configuration Redisplays the E3 Port and Channel Configuration window. Descriptions of the data fields for the E3 Port Statistics window are given in Table 3-2. Table 3-2. Field Descriptions for the E3 Port Statistics Window Field Names Description Severely Errored An errored second that occurs when a receiver impropFraming Seconds erly interprets the set of bits within a frame, with at least one of the following: Out of Frame defects A detected incoming AIS Line Coding Vio- A Bipolar Violation or Excessive Zeroes Error Event has lations occurred. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 3-11 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off Table 3-2. Field Descriptions for the E3 Port Statistics Window Field Names Description Line Errored Sec- An errored second with some type of protocol code vioonds lation, or at least one of the following: CVs occurred LOS defects Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset. Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off After configuring the module ports and channels, the interface types for each port and channel, and the connections, you must save the configuration permanently, before you exit the current session for the PSAX system console interface. It is recommended that you save your configuration frequently, after you configure each module, and then again after configuring the connections of each type you will have in your system. Finally, before you exit your current session, be sure you save your configuration for the last time by performing the steps in the following procedure. ! CAUTION: If your system or location loses power or your current session ends abnormally while you are in the process of configuring the system, and you have not yet saved the values permanently, you will lose all unsaved values you have applied on the various windows. Saving the PSAX System Values Begin 1 Press Ctrl+G while on any window to display the Console Interface Main Menu window. 2 Select the Save Configuration command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+A). Wait a few seconds while the system writes the values permanently to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. The system displays the following message while it is executing this command: Saving the equipment and connection information When the command is completed, the system displays the following message: T-SaveConfiguration: saveConfigurationReasonCode=AllOK You can now safely exit the current session. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 3-12 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off Note: In PSAX systems with redundant CPU2 modules, the backup CPU2 module reboots every time you save the configuration on the primary CPU2 module. This event is a function of the SVC retention feature and the result of saving the configuration changes you have made. 3 Select the Leave Console Interface command and press Enter. You are now logged off the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway system console interface. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 3-13 Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 3-14 Release 7.0 255-700-171 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Overview of This Chapter This chapter describes how to set the values for the port and channel configuration for the 2-Port E3 ATM module using the AQueView® Element Management System (EMS). Before You Begin Be sure to complete the following actions first before configuring the 2-Port E3 ATM module: • Set the values to configure your basic system (see the appropriate AQueView® Element Management System User Guide) • Set the values to configure the Stratum 3–4 module (see the appropriate AQueView® Element Management System User Guide) When configuring the 2-Port E3 ATM module using the AQueView® EMS, display-only fields are gray. ! CAUTION: When using a DSP2A, DSP2B, DSP2C, or DSP2D Voice Server module and an Enhanced DS1 or E1 module with a PBX and/or key telephone system, the PSAX system and your equipment should use a common chassis ground connection to avoid ground current loops, which could affect voice quality. ! CAUTION: Loopback Configuration Options To aid network troubleshooting and testing, loopback capability is provided for the 2-Port E3 ATM module. The loopback option on the module port and channel configuration window for the module enables you to verify the integrity of a port by transmitting a received signal back to the source. Selecting a loopback option is described in Chapter 3. If configuring a pair of 2-Port E3 ATM module in the primary and standby setup, the desired loopback option must be configured by the user on both the primary and standby modules prior to bringing the pair into service. This parameter is applied on a port-by-port basis on both the primary and standby modules. If the line loop or local loop configuration is transferred from port A on the primary module to port B on the standby module, the port parameter does not transfer; it must be pre-configured on the standby by the user. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 4-1 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu The following modules support line loop or local loop only if the standby is preconfigured on a port-by-port basis: • 1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS Multimode and Single-Mode modules • 1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP Multimode and Single-Mode modules • 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP Multimode and Single-Mode modules Using the Right-Click Menu You can perform various functions in the AQueView system by clicking the right mouse button. This section describes the right-click menu options you can use in the various windows in the AQueView system when configuring ports and channels. Configuring Ports and Channels Figure 4-1. Sample Port Configuration (Displaying Right-Click Menu) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 4-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Figure 4-2. Sample Channel Configuration (Displaying Right-Click Menu) Table 4-1. Descriptions of the Port and Channel Configuration Right-Click Menu Options Option Configure Function Opens the port and channel configuration window of a module. Bring All InterSets all interfaces on a port administratively into service. faces Into Service Context-Sensitive Help Take All Interfaces Out of Service Takes all interfaces on a port administratively out of service. Delete All Interfaces Deletes all interfaces. All interfaces to be deleted must be administratively out of service first. Channel Selection Opens the appropriate channel configuration window for the selected channel. If you right-click on a field in a port and channel configuration window, a description of that field appears (see Figure 4-3): PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 4-3 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Figure 4-3. Configuring the Module Sample of Context-Sensitive Help (Displayed on a Port and Channel Configuration Window) You must first configure the 2-Port E3 ATM module before you can set up connection provisioning. To access the port and channel configuration functions in the AQueView system, do the following: 1. Log in to the AQueView system as a user with Administrator or Configurator access privileges. 2. From the Device List or the Open Device window (press Ctrl+D or Ctrl+O), open the PSAX device that contains the module on which you want to configure a port or channel. The Front Panel view and Device Tree for that PSAX device will appear (see Figure 4-4). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 4-4 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Figure 4-4. Port Configuration Provisioning Window (Displaying a Typical Setup) Perform the steps in the following procedure to configure ports on the 2-Port E3 ATM module. Configuring the Ports Begin 1 Do one of the following to open the Port Configuration window: ~ In the Front Panel, click the left button twice on the port to be configured or displayed (see Figure 4-5). ~ In the Front Panel, double-click the right button on the port and a menu appears. Click Configure in the menu that appears. ~ In the Device Tree, double-click the desired port symbol or identifier with the left mouse button. ~ In the Device Tree, select a port then click the right mouse button on the Device Tree and a menu appears. Click Configure. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 4-5 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Figure 4-5. Front Panel View of the E3 ATM Module The E3 Port Configuration window appears (see Figure 4-6). Figure 4-6. E3 ATM Port and Channel Configuration Window The window contains: ~ The Port Configuration page allows you to do the following: • Select and apply port settings PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 4-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu • View port statistics, which display line errors and coding violations • View line status ~ The Channel Configuration page allows you to do the following: Note: Buttons • Select and apply an interface • Open the Interface Configuration window to configure the interface All interfaces must be out of service before changes can be made to the port settings; otherwise, the Apply button will appear to be ghosted. The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions • Close Closes this window. • Apply Applies the configuration field value you set. • Reset Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. • Update Updates the information in the fields. • Clear Removes the values in the Port Statistics panel and resets them to 0. • Poll- or Poll+ Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics. Poll- suspends polling. 2 Select the values for the fields on these windows from the values given in Table 4-2. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 4-7 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Table 4-2. Field Values for the E3 Port and Channel Configuration Window Field Name Loopback Config Transmit Clock Values Default: NoLoop The port is not in the loopback state. LocalLoop The signal is received from another module in the chassis, sent through the module circuitry, including the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) function, and the chassis backplane to the originating module. PayloadLoop The received signal is sent through the framing chip on the module, but not the SAR circuitry, and then back out to the originating point. The data link is regenerated. LineLoop The received signal is sent through the receiver and the line driver, and then back out to the originating point. Default: Indicates that a local clock source is used as the transmit clock. LocalTiming Line Scramble Line Type LoopTiming Indicates that the recovered receive clock is used as the transmit clock. Adaptive Timing Monitors the port buffers to increase or decrease the transmission rate. Default: Enabled Enables ATM cell payload scrambling (optimized cell synchronization). Disabled Disables ATM cell payload scrambling. G832 Line type supported as differentiated from type G.751. Hdb3 High-density bipolar 3 (HDB3). A bipolar coding method that does not allow more than 3 consecutive zeros. DirectMapping This interface uses cell mapping in accordance with G.804, Sec. 6.1, as differentiated from PLCP cell mapping. NoAlarm, or one of several alarms See the bit map tables for the E3 module under the MIB object lineStatus in Appendix A, "SNMP Trap Messages"in any PacketStar User Guide, Release 6.0.0 or higher. (display only) Line Coding (display only) Cell Mapping (display only) Line Status (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 4-8 Description Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Table 4-2. Field Values for the E3 Port and Channel Configuration Window Field Name Interface Type [Admin Status] (display only) [Oper Status] (display only) Values Description Unconfigured The interface for this channel is not configured. AtmUni3_0 Indicates that the channel is configured for the ATM UNI 3.0 interface. AtmUni3_1 Indicates that the channel is configured for the ATM UNI 3.1 interface. AtmUni4_0 Indicates that the channel is configured for the ATM UNI 4.0 interface. IispUser This interface is configured for ATM IISP user. IispNetwork This interface is configured for ATM IISP network. AtmPnni1_0 This interface is configured for ATM PNNI Network. Unconfigured The interface for the port is not configured. OutOfService The interface has not yet been brought into service, or in-service interface has been set to out of service with the Take Out of Service button. InService The interface has been brought into service with the Bring Into Service button. Unconfigured This channel is not operational because the interface is not configured. InService This channel is capable of receiving and sending signals. OutOfService This channel is not capable of receiving and sending signals. 3 Click Apply. End Copying a Port Configuration The Copy button on the Port and Channel Configuration window of each I/O module enables you to copy a port configuration to a range of ports. To copy a port configuration to a range of ports, perform the steps in the following procedure from the appropriate Port and Channel Configuration window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 4-9 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Copying a Port Configuration to Multiple Ports Begin 1 On the Port Configuration page, click Copy. The Copy Port Configuration window appears with the slot and port of the module you selected in the Start At: and Stop At: panels (see Figure 4-7). Figure 4-7. Buttons Sample Copy Port Configuration Window The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Copy Copies this interface to a range of channels. 2 Select the range of slots and ports to which you wish the port configuration to be copied. 3 To copy the interface configuration of this module, click the box beside Copy interface configuration. 4 To overwrite the existing interface configuration of the destination ports, click the box beside Overwrite configured interfaces (this option is only available if Copy interface configuration is selected). Note: The Overwrite configured interfaces option is ghosted until you click the box beside Copy interface configuration. 5 Click Copy. The port configuration is copied to the range of ports you selected. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 4-10 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Channel Configuration Perform the steps in the following procedure to configure channels on the 2Port E3 ATM module. Configuring the Channels Begin 1 Click the Channel Configuration tab. The Channel Configuration window appears (see Figure 4-8). Figure 4-8. Buttons Channel Configuration Page The buttons in this window have the following functions: Command Note: • Apply to Selected Applies the configuration field value you set. • Close Closes this window. You can double-click in the channel in the Interface Type field to select a new interface only when an interface is not currently selected for that channel. If an interface is applied for a channel and you double-click on it in the Interface Type field, the Interface Configuration window appears. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 4-11 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu 2 In the Channel Configuration page, either click the arrow in the Interface Type field (in the middle of the window), or double-click the channel in the Interface Type field, and select an interface from the list. Click Apply to Selected. 3 Click the right mouse button in the list in the Channel Configuration window. A menu appears. 4 Click Bring Into Service. 5 If you want to configure the interface, do one of the following: ~ Double-click the left mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface. ~ Click the right mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface and a menu appears. Select Configure in the menu. The corresponding interface configuration window appears. For information on configuring the interfaces, see Chapter 6. 6 Repeat this procedure to configure more channels. 7 In the Channel Configuration window, click Close. End Viewing Port Statistics You can view statistics for this port from the Port Statistics Panel on the E3 Port Configuration window (see Figure 4-6). Field Descriptions Descriptions of the data fields for the E3 Port Statistics panel are given in Table 4-3. Table 4-3. Field Values for the E3 Port Statistics Panel Field Names Description Severely An errored second that occurs when Errored Fram- a receiver improperly interprets the ing Seconds set of bits within a frame, with at least one of the following: ~ Out of Frame defects ~ A detected incoming AIS Line Coding Violations PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 4-12 A Bipolar Violation or Excessive Zeroes Error Event has occurred. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu Table 4-3. Field Values for the E3 Port Statistics Panel Field Names Line Errored Seconds Description An errored second with some type of protocol code violation, or at least one of the following: ~ CVs occurred ~ LOS defects Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset. ! CAUTION: If your system or location loses power or your current session ends abnormally while you are in the process of configuring the system, and you have not yet saved the values permanently, you will lose all unsaved values you have applied on the various windows. Saving the PSAX System Values Begin 1 Press Ctrl+G while on any window to display the Console Interface Main Menu window. 2 Select the Save Configuration command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+A). Wait a few seconds while the system writes the values permanently to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. The system displays the following message while it is executing this command: Saving the equipment and connection information When the command is completed, the system displays the following message: T-SaveConfiguration: saveConfigurationReasonCode=AllOK You can now safely exit the current session. 3 Select the Leave Console Interface command and press Enter. You are now logged off the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway system console interface. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 4-13 Chapter 4 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 4-14 Release 7.0 255-700-171 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Overview of This Chapter This chapter provides instructions for configuring the following interface types for the 2-Port E3 ATM module: • ATM inter-switch signaling protocol (IISP) user • ATM inter-switch signaling protocol (IISP) network • ATM private network-network interface (PNNI) 1.0 • ATM user-network interface (UNI) 3.0 and 3.1 Before you can set interface configuration values, you must select an interface type value other than Unconfigured in the Interface Type field on the E3 ATM Port and Channel Configuration window. Interface Types by Module Type For a matrix of interface types by PSAX I/O module types, see the “Interface Types by I/O Module Types Table” in the Reference Table appendix of this user guide. Configuring the ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces Interim Interswitch Signaling Protocol (IISP), formerly known as PNNI Phase 0, was introduced as an interim standard, pending completion of the PNNI Phase 1. Building on ATM UNI 3.0 and ATM UNI 3.1, it uses static routing tables established by the network administrator to route connections around link failures. The IISP interface requires the default range of values 0–255 for the virtual path identifier (VPI) and 32–255 for the virtual channel identifier (VCI) to accept and establish calls. This value is set on the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window. Each connection using the IISP interface is configurable as either the user side or the network side. Optimizing SVC Call Performance The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) field is set on these interface configuration windows: ATM IISP network or IISP user, ATM UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1, or ATM PNNI 1.0. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-1 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces Note: These settings are suggested for connecting to a Multiservice Media Gateway from a remote site only. The Multiservice Media Gateway configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch. When there are unacknowledged protocol data units (PDUs), the MaxPD field on the remote end peer (such as the NavisCore™ CBX 500™) shows the maximum number of SSCOP transmitted since the last PSAX polling of the peer. To optimize call performance, the SSCOP Rx Window Size field of the local ATM interface should be less than the maximum value displayed in the MaxPD credit window at the remote end of the ATM interface. Otherwise, the rate at which switched calls can be set and released may be degraded. On the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window, the maximum credit window (the SSCOP Rx Window Size field) is configurable for a value up to 32 for all ATM interfaces on the Multiservice Media Gateway. The interfaces of the ATM switches that are connected to an Multiservice Media Gateway should be configured to the same values. This results in 100% call completion at a call setup rate of 60 calls per second using even distribution. If these values are not configured in this way, calls will be set up at a rate of less than 60 calls per second. Note: Various SSCOP parameter settings determine the maximum credit window. As a result, you may not be able to directly use these settings. Configuring the ATM IISP Interface When you select the value IispUser or IispNetwork as the interface type on a module port and channel configuration window associated with one of the modules listed at the beginning of this chapter, the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window (see Figure 5-1) appears. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces Figure 5-1. Commands ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Function • Apply Interface Config- Applies the configuration field value you set. uration • Reset Interface Display Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. • • Bring Interface Into Service (displays when the [Admin Status] field is OutOfService) • Take Interface Out of Service (displays when the [Admin Status] field is InService) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Admin Status]field. You must first configure the interface before you can use this command. Takes an in-service configured interface to out-ofservice status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field. Note: You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command. Release 7.0 5-3 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces Command Function • Delete Interface and Return→ Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring. Note: You must first take interface out of service (using the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command. • Continuous Update Continuously updates the information in the Interface Statistics fields every second. Select this command and press Enter to turn the continuous updating on and off as needed. • Reset Statistics Removes the values in the Interface Statistics fields and resets them to 0. • Go Back to Port Config- Redisplays the port and channel configuration window of the module you are configuring. uration→ To set values for the ATM IISP interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ATM IISP Interface Begin 1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 5-1. Field Descriptions Table 5-1 lists the field values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window. Table 5-1. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values [Oper Status] (display only) InService The interface is operational. OutOfService The interface is not operational because some condition is preventing the port from being fully operational, such as a loss of signal to the port. Indicates the Administrative Status of the interfaces; or what the interface(s) are configured as. [Admin Status] (display only) InService The interface is in service. OutOfService The interface is not in service. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-4 Description Indicates whether the interface is operational according to the Administrative Status below. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces Table 5-1. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window Field Name Over Subscription Note: Values Default: 10 Range: 1–100 Description The risk factor for this function. This factor indicates the factor of oversubscription allowed for this interface. For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value. Min SVC VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The minimum VPI value in which signaling can occur. Note: Disable ATM signaling field if you want to use VPI 0. Max SVC VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The maximum VPI in which signaling can occur. Note: Disable ATM signaling field if you want to use VPI 0. Min SVC VCI Default: 32 The minimum VCI in which signaling Range: 0–65535 can occur. Max SVC VCI Default: 255 The maximum VCI in which signaling Range: 0–65535 can occur. ATM Signaling Default: SVCs cannot be created on this interface. Disabled Note: Enabled SVCs can be created on this interface. Note: UPC Support VPI 0 is not available for use. VPI 0 is available for use. Usage parameter control (policing) determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated PCR, SCR, or MBS. This feature is supported on these modules: • OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP • OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM • STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM • Channelized DS3-to-DS0 • High Density E1 • Medium Density DS1 Default: UPC Support is disabled. Disabled Note: If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC. Enabled UPC Support is enabled, providing traffic policing support for all VCs. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-5 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces Table 5-1. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window Field Name UBR Load Balancing Values Default: Disabled Description Balance UBR traffic load among parallel links. UBR Load Balancing is disabled. Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR Load Balancing. Enabled UBR Load Balancing is enabled. The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side. SSCOP Rx Wnd Size Default: 32 Range: 8–256 On the receiving side, values must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmit side for fastest transmission rates. An input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. Available on these modules only: STM-1 Multi-Mode and Single-Mode, OC-3c Multi-Mode and Single-Mode Traffic Shaping Default: Disabled Enabled Disables the feature. Note: Enables the feature. This feature must be enabled if using rate shaping prior to egress from an ATM trunk port on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules Interface Statistics Panel (display only) [Valid Cells Rcvd] Number of valid cells received since the statistics were last reset. [Errored Cells Rcvd] Number of errored cells received since the statistics were last reset. [Mismatched Cells Rcvd] Number of mismatched cells received since the statistics were last reset. [Valid Cells Sent] Number of valid cells sent since the statistics were last reset. [Null Cells Sent] Number of null cells sent since the statistics were last reset. [Time Elapsed] Time elasped since counter began running since the statistics were last reset. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-1. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window Field Name [Ingress Avail BW] (cps) Values Default: 0 This represents the total ingress and egress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. 0 will change to 353207 after Apply has been selected. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field will decrease. The value of this field ranges from 0–353207 after being brought in service. Default: 0 This represents the total ingress and egress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. 0 will change to 353207 after Apply has been selected. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field will decrease. The value of this field ranges from 0–353207 after being brought in service. (display only) [Egress Avail BW] (cps) Description (display only) 2 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply Interface Configuration command and press Enter. 3 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, select the Bring Interface Into Service command and press Enter. Note: The interface must have in-service status so that the PVCs and SVCs you will set up to use this interface will work. End Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Configuring the Interface When you select the value AtmUni3-0, AtmUni3-1, or AtmUni4-0 as the interface type on a module port and channel configuration window associated with one of the modules listed on the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 5-2). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-7 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Figure 5-2. Commands ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Function • Apply Interface Config- Applies the configuration field value you set. uration • Reset Interface Display Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. • Bring Interface Into Service (displays when the [Admin Status] field is OutOfService) Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field. • Take Interface Out of Service (displays when the [Admin Status] field is InService) Takes an in-service configured interface to outof-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-8 Note: Note: You must first configure the interface before you can use this command. You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Command • Delete Interface and Return Function Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring. Note: You must first take the interface out of service (by selecting the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command. • ATM UNI Interface Statistics Displays the ATM UNI Interface Statistics window. • ILMI Configuration Displays the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration window. • ILMI Registered User Address Displays the ILMI Registered User Address Table. • ILMI Statistics Displays the ILMI Statistics window • Go Back to Port Config- Redisplays the port and channel configuration uration window of the module you are configuring. Field Descriptions To set values for the ATM UNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ATM UNI Interface Begin 1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 5-2. Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Over Subscription Values Default: 10 Range: 1–100 Description The risk factor for this function. This factor indicates the level of oversubscription allowed by the system. Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI and VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value. The minimum and maximum VPI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface. Min/Max SVC VPI Note: Disable the ATM signaling field if you want to use VPI 0. Default: 0 Range: 0–255 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Enter the maximum value after the slash and then enter the minimum value before the slash. Release 7.0 5-9 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Min/Max SVC VCI Values Min: 32 (default) Max: 255 (default) Range: 0–65535 ATM Signaling Default: Disabled Description The minimum and maximum VCI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface. Enter the maximum value after the slash and then enter the minimum value before the slash. SVCs cannot be created on this interface. Note: Enabled SVCs can be created on this interface. Note: Interface Type Default: Network VPI 0 is not available for use. VPI 0 is available for use. Indicates that the NNI format for the cell headers will be used. Note: When you select this value, the Prefix field is displayed below the Interface Name field. User Indicates that the UNI format for the cell headers will be used. Note: When you select this value, the User Add field is displayed below the Interface Name field. Interface Name (Maximum string of 20 characters) Prefix Default: Network prefix address displays when 2020202020202 the value Network is selected in the 0202020202020 Interface Type field. This address is Range: 13-byte used only for address registration procedure of ILMI. This field represents (18-hexadecimal digit begin- the first 13 bytes of the 20-byte NSAP ning with 39, 45 address. The last 7 bytes are the user part of this address (User Add field). or 47) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-10 A textual name of this interface. This interface must be uniquely named on this system to distinguish parallel links with a neighboring system. If this interface does not have a textual name, the value of this object is a zero-length string. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name User Add Values Description Default: User address displays when the value 2020202020202 User is selected in the Interface Type 0202020202020 field. Range: 13-byte (18-hexadecimal digit beginning with 39, 45 or 47) Neighbor System IP Default: This field is used for auto-discovery 000.000.000.00 protocol. Displays the IP address of the 0 (IP address) attached device for an ILMI-enabled interface, or the user-configured IP address for an ILMI-disabled interface. For an ILMI-enabled interface, any user-configured value overrides ILMI discovered values. Enter the IP address of the PSAX chassis (or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface. Neighbor Name Format: 20 alphanumeric characters PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 This field is used for identifying network topology. Enter a descriptive name up to 20 characters in length for the PSAX chassis (or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface. Release 7.0 5-11 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values UPC Support Description Usage parameter control (policing) determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated PCR, SCR, or MBS. This feature is supported on these modules: • OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP • OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM • STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM • Channelized DS3-to-DS0 • High Density E1 • Medium Density DS1 UBR Load ing Balanc- Default: UPC support is disabled. Disabled Note: If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC. Enabled UPC support is enabled, providing traffic policing support for all VCs. Default: Unspecified bit rate (UBR) load balancing is disabled. Disabled Note: The virtual interface does not support UBR load balancing. Enabled The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side. SSCOP Rx Wnd Size Default: 32 Range: 8–256 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-12 UBR load balancing is enabled. On the receiving side, the window size for this value must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmitting side for fastest transmission rates. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values VI Support Description Virtual interfaces connect to a module’s physical ports and allow virtual channels (VCs) to be assigned to virtual trunks, each with its own priority queue. This option is available only for these modules: OC3-c APS, STM-1 MSP. Enabled Feature is enabled, providing bandwidth allocation restrictions. Note: In order to configure a virtual interface, you must select Enabled. Disabled VI support is disabled. InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. Unconfigured Indicates that this interface has not been configured. InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. [Ingress Avail BW] (cps) (display only) Default: 0 This represents the total ingress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. The value 0 changes to 353207 after you select the Apply command. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field decreases. [Egress Avail BW] (cps) (display only) Default: 0 This represents the total egress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. The value 0 changes to 353207 after you select the Apply command. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field decreases. [Admin Status] (display only) [Oper Status] (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-13 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Description An input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. Available on these modules: STM-1 Multi-Mode and SingleMode, OC-3c Multi-Mode and SingleMode. Traffic Shaping Default: Disabled Disables the feature. Enabled Enables the feature. Note: Field must be set to enabled if using rate shaping on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules prior to egress from an ATM trunk port. 2 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply Interface Configuration command and press Enter. End Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics On the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (see Figure 5-2), select the ATM UNI Interface Statistics command and press Enter. The ATM UNI Interface Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 5-3). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-14 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Figure 5-3. Commands ATM UNI Interface Statistics Window The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Field Descriptions Function • Continuous Update Continuously updates all fields once every second. • Reset Statistics Resets statistics counters for this interface. • Go Back to previous screen –> Returns to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window. The fields on this window are described in Table 5-3. Table 5-3. Field Values for the ATM UNI Interface StatisticsWindow Field Name Description [Valid Cells Rcvd] Number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Errored Cells Rcvd] Number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-15 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-3. Field Values for the ATM UNI Interface StatisticsWindow Field Name [Mismatched Cells Rcvd] Description Number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Valid Cells Sent] Number of valid cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Null Cells Sent] Number of null cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown inTime Elapsed field. NOTE: This parameter is not supported in the OC-12c/STM-4c SM/MM 1+1 APS/MSP modules. [Time Elapsed] Time elapsed since the last reset in h:mm:ss (hour: minute:seconds) format. Configuring ATM UNI ILMI For more information on ILMI, see Chapter 3 “System Features,” of the appropriate PacketStar® Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide. When you select the ILMI Configuration command on the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (see Figure 5-2 on page 5-8), the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 5-4). Figure 5-4. Commands ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window The commands in this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-16 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Command Function • Apply ILMI Configura- Applies the configuration field values you tion set. • Go Back to Interface Screen Redisplays the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window. To set values for ILMI configuration, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window Begin Field Descriptions 1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 5-4. Table 5-4. Field Values for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Values [ILMI Oper Sta- InService tus] Indicates that ILMI connectivity is operational. (display only) OutOfService Indicates that ILMI connectivity is not operational. ILMI Protocol Default: Disabled If you select Disabled, the other fields in this window will not take effect. Enabled Enables ILMI. Default: Disabled Address registration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. Enabled Enables address registration. Default: Disabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is disabled. You must select Enabled if you want to also enable the Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link fields. Enabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is enabled. Default: Disabled Enabled Attachment Point Change Detection can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and ILMI Protocol fields are enabled. Enabled A query will be sent every 5 seconds to detect a change in the address. A response indicates that the user id and address information are the same. However, if there is a change in the address, all calls will be cleared. Address Registration Connectivity Procedure Attachment Point Detection PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Description Release 7.0 5-17 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Table 5-4. Field Values for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Secure Link Values Description Default: Disabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is disabled. It can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and Attachment Point Detection fields are enabled. Enabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is enabled. If you do not receive a response, all calls are cleared, and you will be disconnected. [Auto Configuration] Default: Disabled The ability to automatically configure VPI and VCI is disabled. (display only) Enabled Automatically configures the VPI and VCI. Auto configuration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. [TimerT] (display only) Default: 5 Range: Varies Timer T in seconds. Used to poll when link is operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear. [TimerS] (display only) Default: 1 Range: Varies Timer S in seconds. Used to poll when link is not operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear. [RetryK] (display only) Default: 4 Range: Varies Retry K in seconds. Indicates the number of timeouts before the link becomes non-operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear. [ILMI VPI] (display only) Default: 0 [ILMI VCI] (display only) Default: 16 This value does not change. This value does not change. VPI for the ILMI protocol channel in which VPI will run. VCI for the ILMI protocol channel in which VCI will run. 2 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply ILMI Configuration command and press Enter. 3 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, select the Go Back to Interface Screen command and press Enter. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-18 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface 4 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, select the Bring Interface Into Service command and press Enter. Displaying Registered Addresses 5 Select the ILMI Registered User Address Table command and press Enter. The ILMI Registered User Address Table window is displayed (see Figure 5-5). Figure 5-5. Commands ILMI Registered User Address Table Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find.. Atm Addr: . . • Finds the user’s ATM address. • Go Back to Interface Screen→ • Redisplays the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window. The NSAP Address (Hex) column displays the user’s registered addresses. The Org Scope column displays the scope of the registered addresses. If the scope is not set by the user, it will default to global (a value of 15). 6 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, select the Go Back to Interface Screen command and press Enter. Viewing ILMI Statistics To view ILMI configuration statistics, do the following: 7 Select the ILMI Statistics command and press Enter. The ILMI Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 5-6). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-19 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM UNI 3.1/3.1 Interface Figure 5-6. Commands ILMI Statistics Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Function • Continuous Update Continuously updates the information in the fields every second. Select this command and press Enter to turn the continuous updating on and off as needed. • Reset Statistics Resets the statistics counters for the ILMI Statistics window. • Go Back to Interface Screen→ Redisplays the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window. Field Descriptions The fields in this window are described in Table 5-5. Table 5-5. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Window Field Name [Link Resets] Description Number of times connectivity went down and then up again. (display only) [AttachPt Changed] Number of times attachment point change was detected. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-20 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Table 5-5. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Window Field Name Description [AttachPt Verified] Number of times attachment point was verified successfully. (display only) [Secure Link Proc Initiated] Number of times the secure link procedure was initiated. (display only) [ILMI Timeouts] Number of times the Get Request of any type was timed out. (display only) [Packet Discarded] (display only) Number of times a packet (pdu) was discarded due to format error. [Coldstart Tx] Number of times a Cold Start trap message was transmitted. (display only) [Coldstart Rx] Number of times a Cold Start trap message was received. (display only) [Pdu Rcvd] Total number of packets received. (display only) [Pdu Txed] Total number of packets transmitted. (display only) [Time Elapsed] Time, in seconds, since last reset. (display only) End Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Optimizing SVC Call Performance The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) field is set on these interface configuration windows: ATM IISP network or IISP user, ATM UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1, or ATM PNNI 1.0. Note: These settings are suggested for connecting to a Multiservice Media Gateway from a remote site only. The Multiservice Media Gateway configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch. When there are unacknowledged protocol data units (PDUs), the MaxPD field on the remote end peer (such as the NavisCore™ CBX 500™) shows the maximum number of SSCOP transmitted since the last PSAX polling of the peer. To optimize call performance, the SSCOP Rx Window Size field of the local ATM interface should be less than the maximum value displayed in the PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-21 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface MaxPD credit window at the remote end of the ATM interface. Otherwise, the rate at which switched calls can be set and released may be degraded. On the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window, the maximum credit window (the SSCOP Rx Window Size field) is configurable for a value up to 32 for all ATM interfaces on the Multiservice Media Gateway. The interfaces of the ATM switches that are connected to an Multiservice Media Gateway should be configured to the same values. This results in 100% call completion at a call setup rate of 60 calls per second using even distribution. If these values are not configured in this way, calls will be set up at a rate of less than 60 calls per second. Note: Various SSCOP parameter settings determine the maximum credit window. As a result, you may not be able to directly use these settings. Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface To set the values for the ATM PNNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Begin 1 On the Port and Channel Configuration window of any module supporting the ATM PNNI interface, select AtmPnni1-0 as the interface type. 2 Select the Apply the Port and Channel Configuration command and press Enter. 3 Select Configure Interface and press Enter. The ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 5-7). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-22 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Figure 5-7. Commands ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Function • Apply Interface Configuration Applies the configuration field value you set. • Bring Interface Into Service (displays when the [Admin Status] field is OutOfService) Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field. You must first configure the interface before you can use this command. • Take Interface Out of Ser- Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service (displays when the vice status. The value OutOfService is displayed in [Admin Status] field is the [Admin Status] field. InService) Note: You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command. • Update Interface Display PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Refreshes the values on this window. Release 7.0 5-23 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Command • Delete Interface and Return Function Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring. Note: You must first take interface out of service (using the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command. • View Interface Statistics Displays the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics window. • ILMI Configuration Displays the PNNI ILMI Configuration window. • ILMI Statistics Displays the PNNI ILMI Statistics window. • Go Back to Previous Screen Redisplays the configuration window for the module you are configuring. Field Descriptions 4 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 5-6. Table 5-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Node Index Values Range: 0–65535 Description An index that identifies a logical PNNI entity within the managed system. The value zero indicates a logical entity within the switching system that manages routes only over non-PNNI interfaces. By default, only the node identified by the node index is created, and all PNNI interfaces are associated with that node; only one PNNI node can be provisioned per switch. Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value. Min/Max VPI Min/Max VCI Default: 0/0 Max Limit: 255 (for low-speed modules); 4095 (for high-speed modules) Range: As noted above. VPI 0 is not available. See Note at right. The lower/upper boundary of the VPI for SVC connections. Default: 32/65535 The lower/upper boundary of the VCI for SVC connections. Min Value: 32 Max Value: 65535 Over Subscription Default: 10 Range: 1–100 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-24 Note: As the PNNI signaling field is enabled by default on this interface, VPI 0 is not available. The risk factor for this function. This factor indicates the factor of oversubscription allowed for this interface. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Table 5-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values UPC Support Description Usage parameter control (policing) determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated PCR, SCR, or MBS. This feature is supported on these modules: • OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP • OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM • STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM • Channelized DS3-to-DS0 • High Density E1 • Medium Density DS1 Default: Disables UPC support. Disabled Note: If UPC support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC. Enabled Enables UPC support, providing traffic policing support for all VCs. An input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. Available only on these modules:OC-3c Multimode and Single-Mode,STM-1 Multimode and Single-Mode Traffic Shaping Default: Disabled Feature disabled. Enabled Feature enabled. Note: Setting must be enabled if using rate shaping on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules prior to egress from an ATM trunk port. UBR Load ing Unspecified bit rate. This value balances UBR traffic load among parallel links. Balanc- Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR load balancing. Default: UBR load balancing is disabled. Disabled Enabled PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 UBR load balancing is enabled. Release 7.0 5-25 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Table 5-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values SSCOP Rx Wnd Size The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side. Default: 32 [PNNI Signaling] Description Range: 8–256 On the receiving side, the window size for this value must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmitting side for fastest transmission rates. Default: Enabled Enables ATM signaling over a PNNI link. Disabled Disables ATM signaling over a PNNI link. Default: 0/5 Virtual path/Virtual channel identifier for SVC signaling. Default: 0/0 The lower/upper boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side. Default: 32/65535 The lower/upper boundary of the VCI for SVC connections for the remote side. Default: 201001 The interface port identifier identifies a point of attachment of a logical link to a given logical node. This is automatically generated based on the location (slot, port, channel) of the interface. A value of 0 indicates that no port has been specified. (display only) [VPI/VCI Signaling Channel] (display only) [Remote Min/Max SVC VPI] (display only) [Remote Min/Max SVC VCI] (display only) [Port Id] (display only) [Aggregate Token] Default: 0 Note: This field is not currently supported. The interface aggregate token determines which links to a given neighbor node are to be aggregated and advertised as a single node link. (display only) Note: [Traffic Descriptor] (display only) Default: 0 VP Capability Default: True The interface is capable of having VPCs established within it. False The interface cannot have VPCs established within it. The traffic descriptor index refers to the entry in the atmTrafficDescrParamTable defined in RFC 1695 that specifies the traffic allocation for the PNNI routing control channel (VCI=18) on this interface. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-26 This field is not currently supported. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Table 5-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Description [Service Category] NrtVbr (default) Quality of service class type is non-realtime variable bit rate service. (display only) Cbr Quality of service class type is constant bit rate service. RtVbr Quality of service class type is real-time variable bit rate service. Abr Quality of service class type is available bit rate service. Ubr Quality of service class type is unspecified bit rate service. [Admin Status] (dis- InService play only) Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. Default: 0 Available bandwidth for the incoming direction. Default: 0 Available bandwidth for the outgoing direction. Default: 5040 Range: 504–16777215 The administrative weight for the constant bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. AdminWeight-rtVbr Default: 5040 Range: 504–16777215 The administrative weight for the real time-variable bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. AdminWeightnrtVbr Default: 5040 Range: 504–16777215 The administrative weight for the non-real timevariable bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. AdminWeight-ubr Default: 5040 Range: 504–16777215 The administrative weight for the unspecified bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. [Oper Status] (display only) [Ingress Avail BW] (display only) [Egress Avail BW] (display only) AdminWeight-cbr Note: When configuring the Admin Weight fields, you can choose a value based on the range listed in Table 5-6. However, it is recommended that if you want to use a value greater than 5040 (the default value), you should PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-27 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface choose a number divisible by 5040, such as 10080, 15120, and so on. If you want to use a value smaller than 5040, choose a multiple of 5040, such as 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and so on, or their multiples. 5 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply Interface Configuration command and press Enter. 6 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, select the Bring Interface Into Service command and press Enter. End Configuring PNNI ILMI Perform these steps to configure your connection for PNNI integrated link management interface (ILMI): Steps to Configure the PNNI ILMI Interface Begin 1 From the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window, select the ILMI Configuration command, or press Ctrl+O. The PNNI ILMI Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 5-8). Figure 5-8. Commands PNNI ILMI Configuration Window The commands on this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-28 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Command Field Descriptions Function • Apply ILMI Configuration Applies the user input values entered on the window. • Go Back to Interface Screen Returns to the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window. 2 Select the values for the fields on this window from Table 5-7. Table 5-7. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Values [ILMI Oper Sta- InService tus] OutOfService (display only) Description Indicates that ILMI connectivity is operational. Indicates that ILMI connectivity is not operational. Default: Disabled If you select Disabled, the other fields in this window will not take effect. Enabled Enables ILMI. [Address Registration] Default: Disabled Address registration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. (display only) Enabled Enables address registration. ILMI Protocol This field detects the establishment and subsequent loss of ILMI connectivity. Connectivity Procedure Default: Disabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is disabled. You must select Enabled if you want to also enable the Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link fields. Enabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is enabled. Enablement of this field makes the Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link field functions available for enablement. This field detects a change of attachment point caused by possible swapping of 2 links that were not detected by signalling. [Attachment Point Detection] (display only) Default: Disabled Attachment Point Change Detection can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and ILMI Protocol fields are enabled. Enabled A query will be sent every 5 seconds to detect a change in the address. A response indicates that the user id and address information are the same. However, if there is a change in the address, all calls will be cleared. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-29 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Table 5-7. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Values [Secure Link] Description This field detects non-ILMI connections that were not dropped when an attachment point changed. (display only) Default: Disabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is disabled. It can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and Attachment Point Detection fields are enabled. Enabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is enabled. If a response is not received, all calls are cleared, and disconnected. Auto Configura- Default: tion Procedure Disabled The automatic configuration procedure is the ability to automatically configure the actual VPI/VCI range based on the local VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges (VPI and VCI range negotiation). If disabled, the actual VPI and VCI are not automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using local VPI/VCI ranges which are defined by user. For more information on automatic configuration procedures, see ATM Forum ILMI (Integrated Local Management Interface), 4.0, af-ilmi-0065.000, Section 8.3.4. Enabled If enabled, the actual VPI/VCI are automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using the overlap VPI/VCI ranges of the local VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges. Auto configuration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. Default: 5 Timer T in seconds. Used to poll when link is operational. Range: 0–(232-1) The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column). [TimerS] Default: 1 (display only) Range: 0–(232-1) Timer S in seconds. Used to poll when link is not operational. [TimerT] [RetryK] Default: 4 (display only) Range: 0–(232-1) [ILMI VPI] (display only) Default: 0 [ILMI VCI] Default: 16 (display only) This value does not change. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column). Retry K in seconds. Indicates the number of timeouts before the link becomes non-operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column). VPI for ILMI protocol channel in which VPI will run. This value does not change. VCI for ILMI protocol channel in which VCI will run. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-30 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface End Viewing PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Perform the steps in the following procedure to view PNNI ILMI statistics. Procedure for Viewing PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Begin 1 To view interface statistics for this connection, select the ILMI Statistics command on the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window and press Enter (or press Ctrl+I). The PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 5-10). Figure 5-9. PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Window The commands on this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-31 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Command Function • Continuous Update Continuously updates all fields once every second. • Reset Statistics Resets statistics counters for this interface. • Go Back to previous screen--> Returns to the ATM PNNI InterfaceConfiguration window. 2 The values for this window are described on Table 5-8. Table 5-8. Field Values for the ATM PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Window Field Name Description [Valid Cells Rcvd] Number of Valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Errored Cells Rcvd] Number of Errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Mismatched Cells Rcvd] Number of Mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Valid Cells Sent] Number of Valid cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Null Cells Sent] Number of Null cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Time Elapsed] Time elapsed since last reset. End Viewing PNNI Interface Statistics Steps to View PNNI Interface Statistics Begin To view interface statistics for this connection, select the View Interface Statistics –> command on the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window and press Enter (or press Ctrl+F). The ATM PNNI Interface Statistics window is displayed (Figure 5-10). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-32 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Figure 5-10. ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Field Descriptions • Continuous Update Continuously updates all fields once every second. • Reset Statistics Resets statistics counters for this interface. • Go Back to previous screen –> Returns to the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window. 3 Select the values for the fields on this window from Table 5-9. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 5-33 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Table 5-9. Field Values for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window Field Name Description [Valid Cells Rcvd] Number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Errored Cells Rcvd] Number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Mismatched Cells Rcvd] Number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Valid Cells Sent] Number of valid cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Null Cells Sent] Number of null cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. [Time Elapsed] Time elapsed since last reset in h:mm:ss (hour:minutes:seconds) format.. End Changing PNNI Values If you need to change the interface configuration values for AdminWeightcbr, AdminWeight-rtVbr, AdminWeight-nrtVbr, or AdminWeight-ubr at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must first take the interface out of service, reconfigure the desired values, apply those values, and bring the interface back into service (see “Taking the Interface Out of Service” in this chapter). Changing the Non-administrative Weight Values for the ATM PNNI Interface If you need to change the interface configuration values other than AdminWeight-cbr, AdminWeight-rtVbr, AdminWeight-nrtVbr, or AdminWeight-ubr at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must first take the interface out of service, delete the interface, and then re-create the interface by configuring the desired values. If you need to change the interface configuration values at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must take the interface out of service, delete the current interface, and then re-create another interface after configuring the desired values. Note: The interface must have in-service status in order for the PVCs and SVCs you establish on this interface to work. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-34 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Taking the Interface Out of Service To take the interface out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure. Steps to Take the Interace Out of Service Begin 1 Select the Take Interface Out Of Service command and press Enter. 2 Press the Y key (to indicate yes) to continue. The interface is taken out of service. Deleting the Interface ! CAUTION: If you delete the interface, the current permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and switched virtual circuits (SVCs) using this interface will be deleted from the system. Note: To delete the interface, the interface must be out-of-service. To delete the interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. Steps to Delete the Interface Begin 1 To delete an interface from the Interface Configuration window, select the Delete Interface and Return command and press Enter. Go to Step 4. 2 To delete an interface from the Port and Channel Configuration window, select Unconfigured in the Interface Type field on the Port and Channel Configuration window. 3 Select the Apply Configuration command. The following message is displayed: Taking the interface down will cause all SVCs to be lost. Continue? (y/n) 4 Press the Y key (to indicate yes) to continue. Are you sure you want to delete this interface? 5 Press Enter to delete the interface. 6 To re-create the interface, repeat steps in the procedure, "Setting the Values for the Interface." Note: The interface must have in-service status in order for the PVCs and SVCs you establish on this interface to work. End Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off After configuring the module ports and channels, the interface types for each port and channel, and the connections, you must save the configuration PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 5-35 Chapter 5 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface Configuring the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface permanently, before you exit the current session for the PSAX system console interface. It is recommended that you save your configuration frequently, after you configure each module, and then again after configuring the connections of each type you will have in your system. Finally, before you exit your current session, be sure you save your configuration for the last time by performing the steps in the following procedure. ! CAUTION: If your system or location loses power or your current session ends abnormally while you are in the process of configuring the system, and you have not yet saved the values permanently, you will lose all unsaved values you have applied on the various windows. Saving the PSAX System Values Begin 1 Press Ctrl+G while on any window to display the Console Interface Main Menu window. 2 Select the Save Configuration command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+A). Wait a few seconds while the system writes the values permanently to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. The system displays the following message while it is executing this command: Saving the equipment and connection information When the command is completed, the system displays the following message: T-SaveConfiguration: saveConfigurationReasonCode=AllOK You can now safely exit the current session. Note: In PSAX systems with redundant CPU2 modules, the backup CPU2 module reboots every time you save the configuration on the primary CPU2 module. This event is a function of the SVC retention feature and the result of saving the configuration changes you have made. 3 Select the Leave Console Interface command and press Enter. You are now logged off the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway system console interface. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 5-36 Release 7.0 255-700-171 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Overview of This Chapter This chapter provides instructions for configuring the following interface types for the 2-Port E3 ATM module: • ATM inter-switch signaling protocol (IISP) user • ATM inter-switch signaling protocol (IISP) network • ATM private network-network interface (PNNI) 1.0 • ATM user-network interface (UNI) 3.0 and 3.1 Before you can set interface configuration values, you must select an interface type value other than Unconfigured in the Interface Type field on the E3 ATM Channel Configuration window. Interface Types by Module Type For a matrix of interface types by PSAX I/O module types, see the “Interface Types by I/O Module Types Table” in the Reference Table appendix of this user guide. Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the Interim Interswitch Signaling protocol (IISP) user and network interfaces. IISP, formerly known as PNNI Phase 0, was introduced as an interim standard, pending completion of the PNNI Phase 1. Building on ATM UNI 3.0 and ATM UNI 3.1, it uses static routing tables established by the network administrator to route connections around link failures. The IISP interface requires the default range of values 0–255 for the virtual path identifier (VPI) and the virtual channel identifier (VCI) to accept and establish calls. Each connection using the IISP interface is configurable as either the user side or the network side. Setting Up the Interface When you select IispUser or IispNetwork as the interface type in the Channel Configuration page, the IISP Interface Configuration window (see Figure 6-1) appears. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-1 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Figure 6-1. Buttons ATM IISP Configuration Window The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve from NSAP database If you have previously established an NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Calculate Navis NSAP Address Note: This button appears only when you configure user properties to include the Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate PacketStar® AQueView® Element Management System User Guide. Automatically calculates the local NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Button Function • Bring Into Service (dis- Brings an out-of-service configured interface to plays when the Admin- in-service status. The value InService is disistrative Status field is played in the Administrative Status field. OutOfService) Note: You must first configure the interface before you can use this button. • Take Out of Service (displays when the Administrative Status field is InService) Takes an in-service configured interface to outof-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the Administrative Status field. • Delete Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring. Note: You must use this command first before using the Delete button. Note: You must first take interface out of service (by clicking the Take Out of Service button) before you can use this button. Field Descriptions • Copy Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels. • Close Closes this window. • Apply Applies the configuration field value you set. • Reset Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. To set values for the ATM IISP interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ATM IISP Interface Begin 1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 6-1. Field Descriptions Table 6-1 lists the field values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-3 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Table 6-1. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Operational Status (display only) InService The interface is operational. OutOfService The interface is not operational because some condition is preventing the port from being fully operational, such as a loss of signal to the port. Indicates the Administrative Status of the interfaces; or what the interface(s) are configured as. Administrative Status (display only) Over Subscription Note: Description Indicates whether the interface is operational according to the Administrative Status below. InService The interface is in service. OutOfService The interface is not in service. Default: 10 Range: 1–100 The risk factor for this function. This factor indicates the factor of oversubscription allowed for this interface. For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value. Minimum SVC VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The minimum VPI value in which signaling can occur. Note: Disable ATM signaling field if you want to use VPI 0. Maximum SVC VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The maximum VPI in which signaling can occur. Note: Disable ATM signaling field if you want to use VPI 0. Minimum SVC VCI Default: 32 The minimum VCI in which signaling Range: 0–65535 can occur. Maximum SVC VCI Default: 255 The maximum VCI in which signaling Range: 0–65535 can occur. ATM Signaling Default: SVCs cannot be created on this interface. Disabled Note: Enabled SVCs can be created on this interface. Note: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-4 VPI 0 is not available for use. VPI 0 is available for use. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Table 6-1. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values UPC Support Description Usage parameter control (policing) determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated PCR, SCR, or MBS. This feature is supported on these modules: • OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP • OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM • STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM • Channelized DS3-to-DS0 • High Density E1 • Medium Density DS1 UBR Load Balancing Default: UPC Support is disabled. Disabled Note: If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC. Enabled UPC Support is enabled, providing traffic policing support for all VCs. Default: Balance UBR traffic load among parallel links. Disabled UBR Load Balancing is disabled. Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR Load Balancing. Enabled UBR Load Balancing is enabled. Default: 0 This represents the total ingress and egress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field will decrease. The value of this field ranges from 0–353207 after being brought in service. Egress Avail BW Default: 0 (cps) This represents the total ingress and egress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field will decrease. The value of this field ranges from 0–353207 after being brought in service. Ingress Avail BW (cps) (display only) (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-5 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Table 6-1. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Description The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side. SSCOP Rx Wnd Size Default: 32 Range: 8–256 On the receiving side, values must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmit side for fastest transmission rates. An input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. Available on these modules only: STM-1 Multi-Mode and Single-Mode, OC-3c Multi-Mode and Single-Mode Traffic Shaping Default: Disabled Enabled Local NSAP Address (Hex) Disables the feature. Note: Enables the feature. This feature must be enabled if using rate shaping prior to egress from an ATM trunk port on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules The ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the local ATM interface. Adding NSAP Addresses Note: Step 2 through Step 4 are optional. If you do not want to add or retrieve an NSAP address, skip to Step 5. If an NSAP address exists in the NSAP address database for a given device, the local NSAP address automatically retrieved and displayed on the Interface Configuration window. You may choose to add an NSAP address for a slot, port, and channel in the NSAP address database and retrieve it by clicking Retrieve from NSAP database. 2 To add or retrieve an NSAP address, enter a valid NSAP address in the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field and click Retrieve from NSAP database. If the value entered in the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field is valid, the field becomes ghosted. The Select NSAP window appears (see the following figure). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Figure 6-2. Buttons Select NSAP Window The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Enters the NSAP address for a device that is selected on the Select Remote NSAP window into the Remote NSAP Address field of the Interface Configuration window. • Add Adds a new slot, port, channel, NSAP address mapping entry for the specified device. • Save Stores any modifications to the NSAP address database. • Close Closes this window. You can populate the Slot, Port, Channel, and NSAP Address fields for an existing device, or add a new entry, and click Add. 3 To display the NSAP addresses previously configured for a PSAX device, either select a remote device from the pull-down menu, or type the IP address of the remote device in the Remote Switch IP field. The list of NSAP addresses previously configured for that PSAX device is displayed in the table. 4 Select the desired entry (slot, port, channel, and NSAP address) and click Retrieve. The Local NSAP Address (Hex) field becomes populated in the window. Note: If the desired remote device does not appear in the Remote Switch IP pull-down menu, do the following: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-7 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface a. Highlight the Remote Switch IP field and enter the IP address that corresponds to the PSAX device you want to include. b. Type the desired values into the Slot, Port, and Channel fields and c. Click Add. The AQueView® system adds this information to the database file. Note: If you want to include a new entry for an existing device already in the database, select the device from the pull-down menu in the Remote Switch IP field, and type the desired values into the Slot, Port, and Channel fields and click Add. The AQueView® system adds this entry to the database file. Note: If you add database entries through the AQueView® system, save these database changes to the text editor file by using the main AQueView Menu Bar. Click View > NSAP Database > Save. 5 To apply the interface configuration values, click Apply. 6 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, click Bring Into Service. Note: The interface must have in-service status so that the PVCs and SVCs you will set up to use this interface will work. End Copying an Interface Configuration The Copy button on each Interface Configuration window enables you to copy an interface configuration to a range of channels. To copy an interface configuration to a range of channels, perform the steps in the following procedure from the appropriate Interface Configuration window. Copying an Interface Configuration to Multiple Channels Begin 1 In the Interface Configuration window, click Copy. The Copy Interface Configuration window appears with the slot, port, and channel of the interface you selected in the Start At: and Stop At: panels (see figure below). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-8 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Figure 6-3. Buttons Sample Copy Interface Configuration Window The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Copy Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels. 2 Select the range of channels to which you wish the interface configuration to be copied in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields. 3 To overwrite the pre-existing interface configuration, click the box beside Overwrite configured interfaces. 4 Click Copy. The interface configuration is copied to the range of channels you selected. 5 Click Close. End Viewing Interface Statistics To view interface statistics, click the Interface Statistics tab. The Interface Statistics page appears (see Figure 6-4). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-9 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Figure 6-4. Buttons ATM IISP Interface Statistics Page The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Update Updates the information in the fields. • Clear Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0. • Poll Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics and changes the button to Poll-. Poll- suspends polling and changes the button to Poll+. Field Descriptions Descriptions of the ATM IISP Interface Statistics window are described in Table 6-2. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-10 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Table 6-2. Field Values for the ATM IISP Interface Statistics Page Field Name Valid Cells Received Description Number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Errored Cells Received Number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Mismatched Cells Received Number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Valid Cells Sent Number of valid cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Null Cells Sent Number of null cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown inTime Elapsed field. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset. Interface Utilization The Utilization page can be displayed for the ATM interface connection types. You can use the Utilization page to calculate and display the average number of cells per second, average number of bits per second for a given ATM interface and for a given time interval. To view interface utilization information, click the Utilization tab. The Utilization page appears (see Figure 6-5). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-11 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Figure 6-5. Utilization Page Buttons ATM IISP Utilization Page The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions: Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-12 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring the IISP User or Network Interface Button Function • Clear Removes the data in the Average Bits/Sec and Average Throughput panels. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. Average Throughput/Utilization measurements for ATM interfaces may be enabled or disabled per interface (the default value is Disabled). 6 Select the time interval in the 60 sec field. 7 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. The following interface measurements are calculated and displayed: ~ Average number of cells per second ~ Average number of bits per second ~ Average interface utilization, displayed as a percentage of the interface speed Utilization Page Description These average calculations represent measurement intervals ranges from 5 seconds–5 minutes (default interval is 60 seconds). A maximum of 10 measurements are displayed, which enables you to quickly discern marked increases/decreases in any one of these calculations. The Average Bits/Sec panel displays the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Average Throughput panel displays the percentage of the channel that is being used from the total amount of bandwidth for the channel (shown in the Total Bandwidth (bps) panel). The Total Bandwidth (bps) panel displays the total width of the channel in bits per second. Note: The PSAX EMS polls the PSAX device and displays this data, but does not store it. If the you have installed the PSAX EMS on a network management system (NMS) framework, such as like HP OpenView, then you already have this functionlity through the NMS software. For example, HP OpenView NNM allows you collect and store data. 8 Click Poll- and the polling terminates. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-13 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the ATM user-to-network interface (UNI) 3.0, 3.1, 4.0 and Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) interfaces. Setting Up the Interface When you select AtmUni3-0, AtmUni3-1 or AtmUni4-0 as the interface type in the Channel Configuration page, the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window appears (see Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7). Figure 6-6. ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (3.0 or 3.1) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-14 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Figure 6-7. Buttons ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (4.0) The buttons in the ATM UNI windows have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve from NSAP database If you have previously established an NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Calculate Navis NSAP Address Note: This button appears only when you configure user properties to include the Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate AQueView® Element Management System User Guide. Automatically calculates the local NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-15 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Button Function • Bring Into Service (displays when the Administrative Status field is OutOfService) Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService appears in the Administrative Status field. • Take Out of Service (displays when the Administrative Status field is InService) Takes an in-service configured interface to outof-service status. The value OutOfService appears in the Administrative Status field. • Delete You must first configure the interface before you can use this button. You must use this command first before using the Delete button. Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring. You must first take interface out of service (by clicking the Take Out of Service button) before you can use this button. ATM UNI Interface Values • Copy Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels. • Close Closes this window. • Apply Applies the configuration field value you set. • Reset Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. To set values for the ATM UNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ATM UNI Interface Begin 1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 6-3. Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Administrative Status InService (display only) OutOfService Indicates that the interface is in service. Operational Status (display only) Unconfigured Indicates that this interface has not been configured. InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-16 Description Indicates that the interface is not in service. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Over Subscription Values Default: 10 Range: 1–100 Description The risk factor for this function. This factor indicates the level of oversubscription allowed by the system. Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI and VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value. The minimum and maximum VPI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface. SVC Min/Max VPI Note: Disable the ATM signaling field if you want to use VPI 0. SVC Min/Max VCI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 Enter the minimum value in the left box and the maximum value in the right box. Min: 32 (default) The minimum and maximum VCI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface. Enter the minimum value in the left box and the maximum value in the right box. Max: 255 (default) Range: 0–65535 ATM Signaling Default: Disabled SVCs cannot be created on this interface. Note: Enabled SVCs can be created on this interface. Note: Interface Type Default: Network VPI 0 is not available for use. VPI 0 is available for use. Indicates that the NNI format for the cell headers will be used. Note: When you select this value, the Network Prefix field is displayed below the Interface Name field. User Indicates that the UNI format for the cell headers will be used. Note: When you select this value, the User Address field is displayed below the Interface Name field. Interface Name (Maximum string of 20 characters) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 A textual name of this interface. This interface must be uniquely named on this system to distinguish parallel links with a neighboring system. If this interface does not have a textual name, the value of this object is a zero-length string. Release 7.0 6-17 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Description Network Prefix (Hex) Default: Network prefix address displays when 2020.2020.2020 the value Network is selected in the .2020.20 Interface Type field. This address is Range: 13-byte used only for address registration procedure of ILMI. This field represents (18-hexadecimal digit begin- the first 13 bytes of the 20-byte NSAP ning with 39, 45 address. The last 7 bytes are the user part of this address (User Address or 47) field). User Address Default: User address displays when the value 2020.2020.2020 User is selected in the Interface Type .2020.20 field. Range: 13-byte (18-hexadecimal digit beginning with 39, 45 or 47) Neighbor System IP Default: 0.0.0.0 This field is used for auto-discovery protocol. Displays the IP address of the attached device for an ILMI-enabled interface, or the user-configured IP address for an ILMI-disabled interface. For an ILMI-enabled interface, any user-configured value overrides ILMI discovered values. Enter the IP address of the PSAX chassis (or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface. Neighbor Name Format: 20 alphanumeric characters PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-18 This field is used for identifying network topology. Enter a descriptive name up to 20 characters in length for the PSAX chassis (or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values UPC Support Description Usage parameter control (policing) determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated PCR, SCR, or MBS. This feature is supported on these modules: • OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP • OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM • STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM • Channelized DS3-to-DS0 • High Density E1 • Medium Density DS1 UBR Load ing Balanc- Default: UPC support is disabled. Disabled Note: If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC. Enabled UPC support is enabled, providing traffic policing support for all VCs. Default: Unspecified bit rate (UBR) load balancing is disabled. Disabled Note: The virtual interface does not support UBR load balancing. Enabled UBR load balancing is enabled. Default: 0 This represents the total ingress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field decreases. The value of this field ranges from 0–353207 after being brought in service. Egress Avail BW (cps) Default: 0 (display only) This represents the total egress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field decreases. The value of this field ranges from 0–353207 after being brought in service. Ingress Avail BW (cps) (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-19 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values SSCOP Rx Wnd Size Description The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side. Default: 32 Range: 8–256 On the receiving side, the window size for this value must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmitting side for fastest transmission rates. Virtual interfaces connect to a module’s physical ports and allow virtual channels (VCs) to be assigned to virtual trunks, each with its own priority queue. This option is available only for these modules: VI Support • OC3-c APS • STM-1 MSP Note: This field and the Virtual Interface button below it will be ghosted if you are not configuring the ATM UNI interface on an OC-3c APS or an STM-1 MSP module. Enabled Virtual interface support is enabled, providing bandwidth allocation restrictions. In order to configure a virtual interface, you must select Enabled. VUNI Support (ATM UNI 4.0 only) Disabled VI support is disabled. Disabled (default) Virtual UNI support is disabled. Enabled Virtual UNI support is enabled. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-20 This field is displayed only when the value AtmUni4-0 is selected as the interface type on the module channel configuration window. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Description An input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. Available on these modules: STM-1 Multimode and Single-Mode, OC-3c Multimode and Single-Mode. Traffic Shaping Default: Disabled Disables the feature. Enabled Enables the feature. Note: This feature must be enabled if using rate shaping prior to egress from an ATM trunk port on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules. Global (default) ATM user address organizational scope. Addr Org Scope Intra Organization Organization PlusOne Community PlusOne Regional InterRegional The ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the local ATM interface (optional). Local NSAP Address (Hex) 2 If you want to enable support for virtual interfaces, select Enabled in the VI Support field. The Virtual Interface Table button becomes active. Adding NSAP Addresses Note: Step 2 through Step 4 are optional. If you do not want to add or retrieve an NSAP address, skip to Step 5. If an NSAP address exists in the NSAP address database for a given device, the local NSAP address automatically retrieved and displayed on the Interface Configuration window. You may choose to add an NSAP address for a slot, port, and channel in the NSAP address database and retrieve it by clicking Retrieve from NSAP database. 3 To add or retrieve an NSAP address, enter a valid NSAP address in the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field and click Retrieve from NSAP database. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-21 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface If the value entered in the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field is valid, the field becomes ghosted. The Select NSAP window appears (see the following figure). Figure 6-8. Buttons Select NSAP Window The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Enters the NSAP address for a device that is selected on the Select Remote NSAP window into the Remote NSAP Address field of the Interface Configuration window. • Add Adds a new slot, port, channel, NSAP address mapping entry for the specified device. • Save Stores any modifications to the NSAP address database. • Close Closes this window. You can populate the Slot, Port, Channel, and NSAP Address fields for an existing device, or add a new entry, and click Add. 4 To display the NSAP addresses previously configured for a PSAX device, either select a remote device from the pull-down menu, or type the IP address of the remote device in the Remote Switch IP field. The list of NSAP addresses previously configured for that PSAX device is displayed in the table. 5 Select the desired entry (slot, port, channel, and NSAP address) and click Retrieve. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-22 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface The Local NSAP Address (Hex) field becomes populated in the window. Note: If the desired remote device does not appear in the Remote Switch IP pull-down menu, do the following: a. Highlight the Remote Switch IP field and enter the IP address that corresponds to the PSAX device you want to include. b. Type the desired values into the Slot, Port, and Channel fields and c. Click Add. The AQueView® system adds this information to the database file. Note: If you want to include a new entry for an existing device already in the database, select the device from the pull-down menu in the Remote Switch IP field, and type the desired values into the Slot, Port, and Channel fields and click Add. The AQueView® system adds this entry to the database file. Note: If you add database entries through the AQueView® system, save these database changes to the text editor file by using the main AQueView Menu Bar. Click View > NSAP Database > Save. 6 To apply the interface configuration values, click Apply. 7 If you want to use the ILMI protocol, you must select Enabled in the ATM Signaling field. ILMI is not required if ATM signaling is disabled. 8 For more information about using the NSAP database, see the section, “Using the NSAP Address Database” in Chapter 8 of the appropriate AQueView® Element Management System User Guide. End Copying an Interface Configuration The Copy button on each Interface Configuration window enables you to copy an interface configuration to a range of channels. To copy an interface configuration to a range of channels, perform the steps in the following procedure from the appropriate Interface Configuration window. Copying an Interface Configuration to Multiple Channels Begin 1 In the Interface Configuration window, click Copy. The Copy Interface Configuration window appears with the slot, port, and channel of the interface you selected in the Start At: and Stop At: panels (see figure below). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-23 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Figure 6-9. Buttons Sample Copy Interface Configuration Window The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Copy Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels. 2 Select the range of channels to which you wish the interface configuration to be copied in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields. 3 To overwrite the pre-existing interface configuration, click the box beside Overwrite configured interfaces. 4 Click Copy. The interface configuration is copied to the range of channels you selected. 5 Click Close. End Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics To view statistics for the ATM UNI interface, on the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click the Interface Statistics tab. The ATM UNI Interface Statistics page appears (see Figure 6-10). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-24 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Figure 6-10. ATM UNI Interface Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions • Update Updates the information in the fields. • Clear Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0. • Poll Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics. Poll- suspends polling. The fields on this window are described in Table 6-4. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 6-25 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Table 6-4. Field Values for the ATM UNI Interface Statistics Page Field Name Description Valid Cells Received Number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Errored Cells Received Number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Mismatched Cells Number of mismatched cells received into interface side Received A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Valid Cells Sent Number of valid cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Null Cells Sent Number of null cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown inTime Elapsed field. Note: This parameter is not supported in the OC-12c/STM-4c SM/MM 1+1 APS/MSP modules. Time Elapsed Interface Utilization Time elapsed since the last reset in h:mm:ss (hour: minute:seconds) format. The Utilization page can be displayed for the ATM interface connection types. You can use the Utilization page to calculate and display the average number of cells per second, average number of bits per second for a given ATM interface and for a given time interval. To view interface utilization information, click the Utilization tab. The Utilization page appears (see Figure 6-11). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-26 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Figure 6-11. ATM UNI Utilization Page Utilization Page Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-27 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Removes the data in the Average Bits/Sec and Average Throughput panels. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. Average Throughput/Utilization measurements for ATM interfaces may be enabled or disabled per interface (the default value is Disabled). 6 Select the time interval in the 60 sec field. 7 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. The following interface measurements are calculated and displayed: ~ Average number of cells per second ~ Average number of bits per second ~ Average interface utilization, displayed as a percentage of the interface speed Utilization Page Description These average calculations represent measurement intervals ranges from 5 seconds–5 minutes (default interval is 60 seconds). A maximum of 10 measurements are displayed, which enables you to quickly discern marked increases/decreases in any one of these calculations. The Average Bits/Sec panel displays the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Average Throughput panel displays the percentage of the channel that is being used from the total amount of bandwidth for the channel (shown in the Total Bandwidth (bps) panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-28 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface The Total Bandwidth (bps) panel displays the total width of the channel in bits per second. Note: The PSAX EMS polls the PSAX device and displays this data, but does not store it. If the you have installed the PSAX EMS on a network management system (NMS) framework, such as like HP OpenView, then you already have this functionlity through the NMS software. For example, HP OpenView NNM allows you collect and store data. 8 Click Poll- and the polling terminates. End Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) The integrated link management interface (ILMI) contains a management information base (MIB) that provides status and communication information to the PSAX system and other switching devices configured for ATM UNI. ILMI supports bidirectional exchange of ATM interface parameters between two connected ATM Interface Management Entities (IMEs). ILMI provides status information and statistics using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and a MIB to provide any ATM device with status and configuration information concerning the virtual path connections (VPCs), virtual channel connections (VCCs), registered ATM network prefixes, registered ATM addresses, and registered services and capabilities available at its ATM interfaces. It also determines the operational status of the logical port. ILMI is supported for all ATM UNI 3.0 and ATM UNI 3.1 interfaces. Setting Up the Interface To set values for ILMI configuration, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ILMI Configuration Window Begin 1 Click the ILMI Configuration tab. The ILMI Configuration page appears (see Figure 6-12). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-29 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Figure 6-12. ILMI Configuration Page Buttons The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button • Registered User Address Table Displays the Registered User Address Table. • Apply Applies the configuration field values you set. • Reset Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. • Close Closes this window. • Update Updates the information in the fields. • Clear Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0. • Poll- or Poll+ Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics. Poll- suspends polling. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-30 Function Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface ILMI Interface Values 2 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 6-5. Table 6-5. Field Values for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Values Description ILMI Operational Status InService Indicates that ILMI connectivity is operational. (display only) OutOfService Indicates that ILMI connectivity is not operational. ILMI Protocol Default: Disabled If you select Disabled, the other fields in this window will not take effect. Enabled Enables ILMI. Default: Disabled Address registration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. Enabled Enables address registration. Default: Disabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is disabled. You must select Enabled if you want to also enable the Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link fields. Enabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is enabled. Default: Disabled Enabled Attachment Point Change Detection can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and ILMI Protocol fields are enabled. Enabled A query will be sent every 5 seconds to detect a change in the address. A response indicates that the user id and address information are the same. However, if there is a change in the address, all calls will be cleared. Default: Disabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is disabled. It can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and Attachment Point Detection fields are enabled. Enabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is enabled. If you do not receive a response, all calls are cleared, and you will be disconnected. Address Registration Connectivity Procedure Attachment Point Detection Secure Link (display only) Auto Configura- Default: tion Disabled The ability to automatically configure VPI and VCI is disabled. (display only) Automatically configures the VPI and VCI. Enabled Auto configuration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-31 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Table 6-5. Field Values for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Timer T Values Default: 5 Range: Varies Description Timer T in seconds. Used to poll when link is operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear. Timer S Default: 1 Range: Varies Timer S in seconds. Used to poll when link is not operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear. Retry K Default: 4 Range: Varies Retry K in seconds. Indicates the number of timeouts before the link becomes non-operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear. ILMI VPI Default: 0 This value does not change. ILMI VCI Default: 16 This value does not change. VPI for the ILMI protocol channel in which VPI will run. VCI for the ILMI protocol channel in which VCI will run. 3 To apply the interface configuration values, click Apply. 4 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close. 5 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, click Bring Into Service. End Viewing Registered Addresses To set values for ILMI registered addresses, perform the steps in the following procedure. Viewing Registered User Addresses Begin 1 Click Registered User Address Table on the ILMI Configuration page. The ILMI Registered User Address Table window appears (see Figure 6-13). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-32 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring An ATM UNI ILMI Interface Figure 6-13. Registered User Address Table The NSAP Address (Hex) column displays the user’s registered addresses. The Org Scope column displays the scope of the registered addresses. If the scope is not set by the user, it will default to global (a value of 15). 2 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close. End Viewing ILMI Statistics You can view ILMI statistics on the ILMI Statistics panel of the ILMI Configuration page (see Figure 6-12). Field Descriptions Descriptions of the ILMI statistics data fields are given in Table 6-6. Table 6-6. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page Field Name Link Resets Description Number of times connectivity went down and then up again. (display only) Attachment Point Changed Number of times attachment point change was detected. (display only) Attachment Point Verified Number of times attachment point was verified successfully. (display only) Secure Link Proc Initiated Number of times the secure link procedure was initiated. (display only) ILMI Timeouts Number of times the Get Request of any type was timed out. (display only) Packet Discarded (display only) Number of times a packet (pdu) was discarded due to format error. Cold Starts Transmitted Number of times a Cold Start trap message was transmitted. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-33 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Table 6-6. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page Field Name Description Cold Starts Received Number of times a Cold Start trap message was received. (display only) PDUs Received Total number of packets received. (display only) PDUs Transmitted Total number of packets transmitted. (display only) Time Elapsed Time, in seconds, since last reset. (display only) Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the ATM private network-network interface (PNNI)1.0. The following I/O modules have ATM PNNI 1.0 interface capability: Setting Up the Interface Before you can select the value as the interface type, you must first configure the PNNI node (see Chapter 6 in the appropriate AQueView® Element Management System User Guide). When you select AtmPnni1_0 as the interface type in the Channel Configuration page, the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window appears (see Figure 6-14). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-34 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Figure 6-14. ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Configuration Window Buttons The buttons in this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-35 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Button • Retrieve from NSAP database • Calculate Navis NSAP Address Function If you have previously established an NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field. Note: This button appears only when you configure user properties to include the Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate AQueView™ Element Management System User Guide. Automatically calculates the local NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel. • Bring Into Service (dis- Brings an out-of-service configured interface to plays when the Admin- in-service status. The value InService is disistrative Status field is played in the Administrative Status field. OutOfService) Note: You must first configure the interface before you can use this button. • Take Out of Service (displays when the Administrative Status field is InService) Takes an in-service configured interface to outof-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the Administrative Status field. • Delete Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring. Note: You must use this command first before using the Delete button. Note: You must first take interface out of service (by clicking the Take Out of Service button) before you can use this button. • Copy Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels. • Close Closes this window. • Apply Applies the configuration field value you set. • Reset Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. PNNI Interface Values To set the values for the ATM PNNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-36 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Setting the Values for the ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Begin 1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 6-7. Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Node Index Values Range: 0–65535 Description An index that identifies a logical PNNI entity within the managed system. The value zero indicates a logical entity within the switching system that manages routes only over non-PNNI interfaces. By default, only the node identified by the node index is created, and all PNNI interfaces are associated with that node; only one PNNI node can be provisioned per switch. Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value. Minimum SVC VPI Maximum SVC VPI Minimum SVC VCI Default: 0 Range: 1–255 (for lowspeed modules); 1–4095 (for high-speed modules). See Note at right. The lower boundary of the VPI for SVC connections. Default: 0 Range: 1–255 (for low-speed modules); 1–4095 (for high-speed modules). See Note at right. The upper boundary of the VPI for SVC connections. Default: 32/65535 Range: 32– 65535 The lower boundary of the VCI for SVC connections. Maximum SVC VCI Default: 65535 Note: As the PNNI signaling field is enabled by default on this interface, VPI 0 is not available. Note: As the PNNI signaling field is enabled by default on this interface, VPI 0 is not available. Range: 32– 65535 The upper boundary of the VCI for SVC connections. Default: 0 Range: 0–4095 The lower boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side. Default: 0 Range: 0–4095 The upper boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side. (display only) Default: 32/65535 Range: 32– 65535 The lower boundary of the VCI for SVC connections for the remote side. Remote SVC VCI Default: 65535 (display only) Range: 32– 65535 The upper boundary of the VCI for SVC connections for the remote side. Remote SVC VPI (display only) Remote SVC VPI (display only) Remote SVC VCI PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-37 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Over Subscription Values Default: 10 Range: 1–100 Description The risk factor for this function. This factor indicates the factor of oversubscription allowed for this interface. Usage parameter control (policing) determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated PCR, SCR, or MBS. This feature is supported on these modules: UPC Support • OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP • OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM • STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM • Channelized DS3-to-DS0 • High Density E1 • Medium Density DS1 UBR Load ing Default: UPC support is disabled. Disabled Note: If UPC support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC. Enabled UPC support is enabled, providing traffic policing support for all VCs. Balanc- Unspecified bit rate. This value balances UBR traffic load among parallel links. Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR load balancing. Default: UBR load balancing is disabled. Disabled Enabled UBR load balancing is enabled. AdminWeight - CBR Default: 5040 Range: 504–16777215 The administrative weight for the constant bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. Default: 5040 Range: 504–16777215 The administrative weight for the real time-variable bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. AdminWeight - NRT Default: 5040 Range: VBR 504–16777215 The administrative weight for the non-real timevariable bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. AdminWeight UBR The administrative weight for the unspecified bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table. AdminWeight - RT VBR Default: 5040 Range: 504–16777215 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-38 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Operational Status Values Description InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. Administrative Status InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. (display only) OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. PNNI Signaling Default: Enabled Enables ATM signaling over a PNNI link. (display only) Disabled Disables ATM signaling over a PNNI link. (display only) VPI Signaling Chan- Default: 0 nel Virtual path/Virtual channel identifier for SVC signaling. (display only) VPI Signaling Chan- Default: 5 nel Virtual channel identifier for SVC signaling. (display only) Remote Min/Max SVC VPI The lower/upper boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side. (display only) Port Id. Default: 201001 (display only) Aggregate Token Default: 0 Default: 0 Traffic Descriptor This field is not currently supported. Note: This field is not currently supported. The traffic descriptor index refers to the entry in the atmTrafficDescrParamTable defined in RFC 1695 that specifies the traffic allocation for the PNNI routing control channel (VCI=18) on this interface. (display only) Default: True The interface is capable of having VPCs established within it. False The interface cannot have VPCs established within it. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Note: The interface aggregate token determines which links to a given neighbor node are to be aggregated and advertised as a single node link. (display only) VP Capability The interface port identifier identifies a point of attachment of a logical link to a given logical node. This is automatically generated based on the location (slot, port, channel) of the interface. A value of 0 indicates that no port has been specified. Release 7.0 6-39 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window Field Name Values Description Service Category NrtVbr (default) Quality of service class type is non-realtime variable bit rate service. (display only) Cbr Quality of service class type is constant bit rate service. RtVbr Quality of service class type is real-time variable bit rate service. Abr Quality of service class type is available bit rate service. Ubr Quality of service class type is unspecified bit rate service. Default: 0 Available bandwidth for the incoming direction. Default: 0 Available bandwidth for the outgoing direction. Ingress Avail BW (cps) (display only) Egress Avail BW (cps) (display only) The service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side. SSCOP Rx Wnd Sz Default: 32 Range: 8–256 On the receiving side, the window size for this value must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmitting side for fastest transmission rates. The ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the local ATM interface. Local NSAP Address (Hex) Note: When configuring the Admin Weight fields, you can choose a value based on the range listed in Table 6-7. However, it is recommended that if you want to use a value greater than 5040 (the default value), you should choose a number divisible by 5040, such as 10080, 15120, and so on. If you want to use a value smaller than 5040, choose a multiple of 5040, such as 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and so on, or their multiples. Adding NSAP Addresses Note: Step 2 through Step 4 are optional. If you do not want to add or retrieve an NSAP address, skip to Step 5. If an NSAP address exists in the NSAP address database for a given device, the local NSAP address automatically retrieved and displayed on the Interface Configuration window. You may choose to add an NSAP address for a slot, port, and channel in the NSAP address database and retrieve it by clicking Retrieve from NSAP database. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-40 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface 2 To add or retrieve an NSAP address, enter a valid NSAP address in the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field and click Retrieve from NSAP database. If the value entered in the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field is valid, the field becomes ghosted. The Select NSAP window appears (see the following figure). Figure 6-15. Select NSAP Window Buttons The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Enters the NSAP address for a device that is selected on the Select Remote NSAP window into the Remote NSAP Address field of the Interface Configuration window. • Add Adds a new slot, port, channel, NSAP address mapping entry for the specified device. • Save Stores any modifications to the NSAP address database. • Close Closes this window. You can populate the Slot, Port, Channel, and NSAP Address fields for an existing device, or add a new entry, and click Add. 3 To display the NSAP addresses previously configured for a PSAX device, either select a remote device from the pull-down menu, or type the IP address of the remote device in the Remote Switch IP field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-41 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface The list of NSAP addresses previously configured for that PSAX device is displayed in the table. 4 Select the desired entry (slot, port, channel, and NSAP address) and click Retrieve. The Local NSAP Address (Hex) field becomes populated in the window. Note: If the desired remote device does not appear in the Remote Switch IP pull-down menu, do the following: a. Highlight the Remote Switch IP field and enter the IP address that corresponds to the PSAX device you want to include. b. Type the desired values into the Slot, Port, and Channel fields and c. Click Add. The AQueView® system adds this information to the database file. Note: If you want to include a new entry for an existing device already in the database, select the device from the pull-down menu in the Remote Switch IP field, and type the desired values into the Slot, Port, and Channel fields and click Add. The AQueView® system adds this entry to the database file. Note: If you add database entries through the AQueView® system, save these database changes to the text editor file by using the main AQueView Menu Bar. Click View > NSAP Database > Save. 5 To apply the interface configuration values, click Apply. 6 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, click Bring Into Service. End Copying an Interface Configuration The Copy button on each Interface Configuration window enables you to copy an interface configuration to a range of channels. To copy an interface configuration to a range of channels, perform the steps in the following procedure from the appropriate Interface Configuration window. Copying an Interface Configuration to Multiple Channels Begin 1 In the Interface Configuration window, click Copy. The Copy Interface Configuration window appears with the slot, port, and channel of the interface you selected in the Start At: and Stop At: panels (see figure below). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-42 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Figure 6-16. Sample Copy Interface Configuration Window Buttons The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Copy Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels. 2 Select the range of channels to which you wish the interface configuration to be copied in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields. 3 To overwrite the pre-existing interface configuration, click the box beside Overwrite configured interfaces. 4 Click Copy. The interface configuration is copied to the range of channels you selected. 5 Click Close. End Viewing Interface Statistics To view interface statistics, click the Interface Statistics tab. The Interface Statistics page appears (see Figure 6-17). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-43 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Figure 6-17. ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Statistics Page Buttons The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • Update Updates the information in the fields. • Clear Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0. • Poll- or Poll+ Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics and changes the button to Poll-. Poll- suspends polling and changes the button to Poll+. Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 6-8. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-44 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Table 6-8. Field Values for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Page Field Name Description Valid Cells Received Number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Errored Cells Received Number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Mismatched Cells Received Number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Valid Cells Sent Number of valid cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Null Cells Sent Number of null cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset in h:mm:ss (hour:minutes:seconds) format.. Interface Utilization The Utilization page can be displayed for the ATM interface connection types. You can use the Utilization page to calculate and display the average number of cells per second, average number of bits per second for a given ATM interface and for a given time interval. To view interface utilization information, click the Utilization tab. The Utilization page appears (see Figure 6-18). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-45 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Figure 6-18. ATM PNNI 1.0 Utilization Page Utilization Page Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-46 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Removes the data in the Average Bits/Sec and Average Throughput panels. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. Average Throughput/Utilization measurements for ATM interfaces may be enabled or disabled per interface (the default value is Disabled). 6 Select the time interval in the 60 sec field. 7 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. The following interface measurements are calculated and displayed: ~ Average number of cells per second ~ Average number of bits per second ~ Average interface utilization, displayed as a percentage of the interface speed Utilization Page Description These average calculations represent measurement intervals ranges from 5 seconds–5 minutes (default interval is 60 seconds). A maximum of 10 measurements are displayed, which enables you to quickly discern marked increases/decreases in any one of these calculations. The Average Bits/Sec panel displays the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Average Throughput panel displays the percentage of the channel that is being used from the total amount of bandwidth for the channel (shown in the Total Bandwidth (bps) panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-47 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface The Total Bandwidth (bps) panel displays the total width of the channel in bits per second. Note: The PSAX EMS polls the PSAX device and displays this data, but does not store it. If the you have installed the PSAX EMS on a network management system (NMS) framework, such as like HP OpenView, then you already have this functionlity through the NMS software. For example, HP OpenView NNM allows you collect and store data. 8 Click Poll- and the polling terminates. End Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) The integrated link management interface (ILMI) contains a management information base (MIB) that provides status and communication information to the PSAX system and other switching devices configured for ATM UNI. ILMI supports bi-directional exchange of ATM interface parameters between two connected ATM Interface Management Entities (IMEs). ILMI provides status information and statistics using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and a MIB to provide any ATM device with status and configuration information concerning the virtual path connections (VPCs), virtual channel connections (VCCs), registered ATM network prefixes, registered ATM addresses, and registered services and capabilities available at its ATM interfaces. It also determines the operational status of the logical port. ILMI is supported for all ATM UNI 3.0 and ATM UNI 3.1 interfaces. Setting Up the Interface To set values for ILMI configuration, perform the steps in the following procedure. Setting the Values for the ILMI Configuration Window Begin 1 Click the ILMI Configuration tab. The ILMI Configuration page appears (see Figure 6-19). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-48 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Figure 6-19. ILMI Configuration Page Buttons The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button • Registered User Address Table Displays the Registered User Address Table. • Apply Applies the configuration field values you set. • Reset Resets the fields to the last set of applied values. • Close Closes this window. • Update Updates the information in the fields. • Clear Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0. • Poll- or Poll+ Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics. Poll- suspends polling. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 6-49 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface ILMI Interface Values 2 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 6-9. Table 6-9. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Values Description ILMI Operational Status (display only) InService Indicates that ILMI connectivity is operational. OutOfService Indicates that ILMI connectivity is not operational. ILMI Protocol Default: Disabled If you select Disabled, the other fields in this window will not take effect. Enabled Enables ILMI. Address Registration Default: Disabled Address registration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. (display only) Enabled Enables address registration. This field detects the establishment and subsequent loss of ILMI connectivity. Connectivity Procedure Default: Disabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is disabled. You must select Enabled if you want to also enable the Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link fields. Enabled ILMI Connectivity Procedure is enabled. Enablement of this field makes the Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link field functions available for enablement. This field detects a change of attachment point caused by possible swapping of 2 links that were not detected by signalling. Attachment Point Detection (display only) Default: Disabled Attachment Point Change Detection can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and ILMI Protocol fields are enabled. Enabled A query will be sent every 5 seconds to detect a change in the address. A response indicates that the user id and address information are the same. However, if there is a change in the address, all calls will be cleared. This field detects non-ILMI connections that were not dropped when an attachment point changed. Secure Link (display only) Default: Disabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is disabled. It can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and Attachment Point Detection fields are enabled. Enabled ILMI Secure Link Procedure is enabled. If a response is not received, all calls are cleared, and disconnected. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-50 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Table 6-9. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window Field Name Values Auto Configura- Default: tion Disabled Description The automatic configuration procedure is the ability to automatically configure the actual VPI/VCI range based on the local VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges (VPI and VCI range negotiation). If disabled, the actual VPI and VCI are not automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using local VPI/VCI ranges which are defined by user. For more information on automatic configuration procedures, see ATM Forum ILMI (Integrated Local Management Interface), 4.0, af-ilmi-0065.000, Section 8.3.4. Enabled If enabled, the actual VPI/VCI are automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using the overlap VPI/VCI ranges of the local VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges. Auto configuration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled. Default: 5 Timer T in seconds. Used to poll when link is operational. Range: 0–(232-1) The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column). Timer S Default: 1 (display only) Range: 0–(232-1) Timer S in seconds. Used to poll when link is not operational. Timer T Default: 4 Retry K (display only) Range: 0–(232-1) ILMI VPI Default: 0 (display only) This value does not change. ILMI VCI Default: 16 (display only) This value does not change. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column). Retry K in seconds. Indicates the number of timeouts before the link becomes non-operational. The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column). VPI for ILMI protocol channel in which VPI will run. VCI for ILMI protocol channel in which VCI will run. 3 To apply the interface configuration values, click Apply. 4 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close. 5 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, click Bring Into Service. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-51 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Viewing Registered Addresses To set values for ILMI registered addresses, perform the steps in the following procedure. Viewing Registered User Addresses Begin 1 Click Registered User Address Table on the ILMI Configuration page. The ILMI Registered User Address Table window appears (see Figure 6-20). Figure 6-20. Registered User Address Table The NSAP Address (Hex) column displays the user’s registered addresses. The Org Scope column displays the scope of the registered addresses. If the scope is not set by the user, it will default to global (a value of 15). 2 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close. End Viewing ILMI Statistics You can view ILMI statistics on the ILMI Statistics panel of the ILMI Configuration page (see Figure 6-19). Field Descriptions Descriptions of the ILMI statistics data fields are given in the following table. Table 6-10. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page Field Name Link Resets Description Number of times connectivity went down and then up again. (display only) Attachment Point Changed Number of times attachment point change was detected. (display only) Attachment Point Verified Number of times attachment point was verified successfully. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-52 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Table 6-10. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page Field Name Description Secure Link Proc Initiated Number of times the secure link procedure was initiated. (display only) ILMI Timeouts Number of times the Get Request of any type was timed out. (display only) Packet Discarded (display only) Number of times a packet (pdu) was discarded due to format error. Cold Starts Transmitted Number of times a Cold Start trap message was transmitted. (display only) Cold Starts Received Number of times a Cold Start trap message was received. (display only) PDUs Received Total number of packets received. (display only) PDUs Transmitted Total number of packets transmitted. (display only) Time Elapsed Time, in seconds, since last reset. (display only) End Changing PNNI Values If you need to change the interface configuration values for AdminWeightcbr, AdminWeight-rtVbr, AdminWeight-nrtVbr, or AdminWeight-ubr at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must first take the interface out of service, reconfigure the desired values, apply those values, and bring the interface back into service (see ”Taking the Interface Out of Service”). Changing the Nonadministrative Weight Values for the ATM PNNI Interface If you need to change the interface configuration values other than AdminWeight-cbr, AdminWeight-rtVbr, AdminWeight-nrtVbr, or AdminWeight-ubr at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must first take the interface out of service, delete the interface, and then re-create the interface by configuring the desired values. If you need to change the interface configuration values at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must take the interface out of service, delete the current interface, and then re-create another interface after configuring the desired values. Note: Taking the Interface Out of Service The interface must have in-service status in order for the PVCs and SVCs you establish on this interface to work. To take the interface out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure, beginning from the Port and Channel Configuration window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-53 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface Steps to Take the Interace Out of Service Begin 1 Do one of the following to open the Port and Channel Configuration window: ~ In the Front Panel, double-click the left mouse button on the port to be configured or displayed. ~ In the Front Panel, click the right mouse button on the port and a menu appears. Click Configure. ~ In the Device Tree, click the desired port symbol or identifier. 2 Click the Channel Configuration tab. 3 Select the channel to be taken out of service. 4 Click Take Out Of Service. The interface is taken out of service. Deleting the Interface ! CAUTION: If you delete the interface, the current permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and switched virtual circuits (SVCs) using this interface will be deleted from the system. Note: To delete the interface, the interface must be out-of-service. To delete the interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. Steps to Delete the Interface Begin 1 From the Interface Configuration window, click Delete. A confirmation window is displayed (see Figure 6-21). Figure 6-21. Delete Interface Confirmation Window 2 Click Yes to delete the interface. 3 To re-create the interface, repeat steps in the procedure, "Setting the Values for the Interface." PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-54 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface 4 To save this interface configuration to the PSAX configuration database, in the Provisioning Menu Bar, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. Note: The interface must have in-service status in order for the PVCs and SVCs you establish on this interface to work. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 6-55 Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView® System Configuring an ATM PNNI Interface PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 6-56 Release 7.0 255-700-171 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Overview of This Chapter This chapter describes how to set up permanent virtual circuit (PVC), switched virtual circuit (SVC), and soft permanent virtual circuit (SPVC) connections in the Access Concentrator systems for service provisioning and how to view statistics data for billing and performance monitoring. Before you provision connections for the modules, you must have first completed the following tasks: • Setting the configuration values for one or more ports on the 2-Port E3 ATM module • Setting the configuration values for the various types of interfaces on the 2-Port E3 ATM module This chapter contains instructions for making the following types of connections: • PVC connections: ~ ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ ATM-to-ATM virtual path connection (VPC) ~ Circuit Emulation-to ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-VBR connection ~ Frame relay-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) connection ~ In-band management ATM PVC connection ~ Bridge-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ VBR-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) • SVC connections: ~ ATM-ATM virtual channel connection VCC (n) ~ ATM IISP CBR connection ~ ATM IISP VBR connection • SPVC connections: ~ Circuit Emulation-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (y) ~ ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (z) ~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (w) PVCs consist of connections between ports on the various Access Concentrator I/O modules. When setting up some types of connections, you can set up data traffic to flow in several ways, depending on the type of connection as follows: • Duplex PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-1 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Data flows in two directions between the two connection points (interface side A and interface side B). • Simplex Data flows in only one direction, from side A to side B, or from side B to side A. • Point-to-Multipoint Data flows in only one direction, from one point on side A to several points on side B, or from one point on side B to several points on side A. Before you can provision connections, you must select an interface type value other than Unconfigured in the Interface Type field on the E3 ATM Port and Channel Configuration window. Connection Types by Interface Type For a matrix of connection types by interface types, see the “Connection Types by Interface Types Table” in the Reference Table appendix of this user guide. Provisioning PVC Connections Accessing the Connection Configuration Menu Begin 1 Log onto the PSAX system (see the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide for instructions). The Console Interface Main Menu window (see Figure 7-1) is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-1. Console Interface Main Menu Window (Connection Configuration Selected) 2 Select the Connection Configuration command and press Enter. The Connection Configuration Menu window (see Figure 7-2) is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-3 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-2. Connection Configuration Menu Window (ATM-to-ATM VCC Option Selected) Follow the appropriate procedures in the sections of this chapter for the types of connections you want to configure. End Perform the steps in the following procedure to add an ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC connection, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. Creating an ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin Note: The Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) feature is enabled on this screen. Statistical OAM information is provided on the related statistics screen, while additional OAM functionality can be enabled from the Diagnostics Menu. 1 Select ATM-to-ATM VCC on the Connection Configuration Menu window and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-3). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-4 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-3. ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Table Window The ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window provides a way to view, create, delete, and monitor connections and connection statistics. This table loads and displays all current ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC connections. Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Table is empty. After you have set up connections, this window displays all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Page Up Scrolls up one page. • Page Down Scrolls down one page. • Top Displays entries at the top of the table. • Bottom Displays entries at the bottom of the table. • Find . . . Searches the table for a connection using the given interface. To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel, VPI, and VCI fields. If the connection exists, it displays on the first line of the table. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 7-5 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Command Display Fields Function • Add a Connection Displays the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. • Go Back to Connection Menu Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. The display fields on this window provide the following information about all the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC connections in the PSAX system: Field Description • ATM Interface A This column will display the information for all interface A sides of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port, channel, and VPI. • ATM Interface B This column will display the information for all interface B sides of the connections. • Flow This column will display the direction of the data traffic flow for the connections. An asterisk (*) will indicate if the connection is inactive. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the identification number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-4). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-4. Commands ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics window. • Add/View Backup PVC→ Displays window to add or view a backup PVC. • Go Back to Connection Table→ Field Descriptions 3 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-1. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Redisplays the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Table window. Release 7.0 7-7 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-1. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description ATM Interface A Side A of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface B Side B of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depend- Enter the slot number containing the module for which you ing on chassis type are creating a connection for both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–30 Note: Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection for both sides of the connection. Channel Range: 1–32 Note: Enter the channel number of the port on the module for both sides of the connection. VPI Range: 0–255 (ATM UNI); 0-4095 (NNI) Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VCI Range: 32–65535 Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VI 0 (default) Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on theOC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, default is 0. Range: 0–255 Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr- Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of sernrt2, vice (QoS) class. See the appendix in the appropriate PacketVbr-nrt1, Star® Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide. Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2, Cbr1 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-8 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-1. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Conformance Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the appendix in the appropriate PacketStar® Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to always change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. SAR Type Default: AAL-5 AAL-3/4, AAL-2, AAL-1, Null The segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type should correspond to the SAR type of the incoming data stream. Frwd Error Correct Default: None Eighth Rate, Quarter Rate, Half Rate, Auto Hi Q, Auto, Auto Lo Q The values Eighth Rate, Quarter Rate, and Half Rate are a Reed-Solomon encoding rate with a specific error-correction capability. The values Auto Hi Q, Auto, and Auto Lo Q are dynamically changing rate options. (Forward Error Correction) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-9 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-1. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Peak Rate(0+1) (cps) Values Default: 1 Description When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. SCR/PCR (0) (cps) Default: 1 When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. Max Burst Size (cells) Default: 1 Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value for peak rate to 0. Flow Duplex (default), SimplexA2B, Point-to-Multipoint A2B Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. Note: When you select SimplexA2B, the fields in the Traffic Parameters B to A section are not displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-10 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-1. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Oam Status Values Description Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AID/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. Seg-Pt The PSAX system is used as a single ATM link, or is part of a group of interconnected ATM links that process OAM maintenance cells only. End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. Intermediate-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a network node and an intermediate ATM device that does not terminate the ATM connection. It only generates AIS cells during a local failure. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. [Backup PVC] (display only) [Conn Status](display only) Intra-Segment-Pt Any connecting point inside a segment flow. Default: No, Yes This field displays a backup PVC, if one has been configured. Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 5 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window is returned (see Figure 7-3 on page 7-5), displaying the values you just applied. 6 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2 through 5 for more connections, as needed. 7 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. 8 Select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values in the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-11 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Viewing ATM-toATM VCC PVC Statistics On the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window, select the View Connection Statistics command. The ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 7-5). Figure 7-5. ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Window The commands on this window have the following functions: Commands Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the connection window. Display –> The fields on this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-12 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Field Descriptions Table 7-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VCC and ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Description AIS Rx/Tx (display only) Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received and transmitted.. RDI Rx/Tx (display only) Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received and transmitted. cell Drop/Tag (display only) Number of cells dropped and tagged on incoming side of interface A or B. Cells Received Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. (display only) Cells Transmitted (display only) FEC Rate Used Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. (ATM-to-ATM VCC only) Displays the forward error correction (FEC) rate being used by the FEC module in the A2B direction (for ATM Interface A panel), or B2A direction (for ATM Interface B panel). This field is dymanic when auto rates are selected. In other cases it will display the rate set by the user. Received Odometer Number of valid cells received since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Received field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Transmitted Odometer Number of valid cells transmitted since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Transmitted field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset. (display only) (displayed on Interface Side A Statistics panel) Time Since Reset (display only) Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Statistics command was used. (displayed on Interface Note: The Reset command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock.Other counters Side A Statistics increment for the life of the circuit. panel) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-13 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Adding/Viewing a Backup PVC Connection Procedure for Adding/Viewing a Backup PVC Connection Begin 1 From the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window, select the Add/View Backup PVC command. The ATM-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-6). Figure 7-6. Commands ATM-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection Window The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Field Descriptions • Add This Connection Adds the connection entered on the backup ATM interface right panel. • Delete Connection Deletes the backup connection. • Go Back to Primary PVC Connection –> Returns to the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. 2 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-3: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-14 Function Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-3. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM Backup VCC PVC Connection Window Field Name Values Description ATM Interface Panel (display only) [Slot] (display only) Varies depending on equipment Current primary connection slot in use. [Port] (display only) Determined by the num- Current primary connection port on module ber of ports available on in slot in use. the module selected in the Slot field [Channel] (display only) Determined by the num- Current primary connection channel on ber of channels availport on module on slot in use. able on the port selected in the Port field [VPI] (display only) Default: 0 Range: 0 - 255 The primary connection virtual path identifier assigned to the interface [VCI] (display only) Default: 32 Range: 32-65535 The primary connection virtual channel identifier assigned to the interface Backup ATM Interface Panel Slot Listed as available from the PSAX device Port Determined by the num- Select the port number on the module for ber of ports available on which you are creating a connection. the module selected in the Slot field Channel Determined by the num- Select the channel number of the port on ber of channels availthe module for which you are creating a able on the port selected connection. in the Port field VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The backup connection.virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32-65535 The backup connection virtual channel identifier assigned to the interface VI Default: 0 Backup connection virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Range: 0-255 [Current Active None PVC] Primary (display only) Backup PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Indicates that the connection is inactive. Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). Release 7.0 7-15 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-3. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM Backup VCC PVC Connection Window Field Name Values [Switch Back to Yes (default) Primary Automatically] (display only) No Description CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. End Adding ATM-to-ATM VPC Connections Creating a ATM-toPerform the steps in the following procedure to create an ATM-to-ATM VPC ATM VPC Connection connection, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. Steps to Create an ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Begin Note: The Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) feature is enabled on this screen. Statistical OAM information is provided on the related statistics screen, while additional OAM functionality can be enabled from the Diagnostics Menu. 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select ATM-to-ATM VPC and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Table window (see Figure 7-7) is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-16 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-7. ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Table Window The ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Table window provides a way to view, create, delete, and monitor connections and connection statistics. This table loads and displays all current ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC connections. Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window is displayed all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Page Up Scroll up one page. • Page Down Scrolls down one page. • Top Displays entries at the top of the table. • Bottom Displays entries at the bottom of the table. • Find . . . Searches the table for a connection using the given interface. To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Chnl, and VPI fields. If the connection exists, it will display on the first line of the table. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 7-17 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Command • Add a Connection→ Function Displays the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu→ Menu window. Display Descriptions The display-only fields on this window provide the following information about all the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC connections in the PSAX system: Field Description • ATM Interface A This column will display the information for all interface A sides of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port, channel, and VPI. • ATM Interface B This column will display the information for all interface B sides of the connections. • Flow This column will display the direction of the data traffic flow for the connections. An asterisk (*) will indicate if the connection is inactive. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the identification number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection window (see Figure 7-8) is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-18 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-8. Commands ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics window. • Add/View Backup PVC→ Displays window to add or view a backup PVC. • Go Back to Connection Table→ Field Descriptions 3 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-4. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Redisplays the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Table window. Release 7.0 7-19 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-4. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description ATM Interface A One side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface B The other side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on chassis type Port Range: 1–30; 7 for DS1 IMA and E1 IMA modules; 30 for DS3 IMA module Note: Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides of the connection. Channel Range: 1–32; 1–3 for DS1 IMA and E1 IMA modules; 1–14 for DS3 IMA module Enter the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter channel numbers for both sides of the connection. VPI Range: 0–255 (AtmUNI); 0-4095 (NNI) Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VI 0 (default) Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, default is 0. Range: 0–255 Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2, Cbr1 Enter the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Note: PSAX system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the Reference Appendix in this guide for more information. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-20 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-4. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Conformance Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the Reference Appendix in this guide for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. SAR Type 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: Null The segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type must correspond to the SAR type of the incoming data stream. Aal5, Aal3-4, Aal2, Aal1, Peak Rate(0+1) Default: 1 cps When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Rate field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-21 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-4. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names SCR/PCR(0) Values Default: 1 cps Description When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) 1 (default) Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value for maximum burst size to 0. Flow Default: Duplex Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, When you select SimplexA2B, the fields in the Traffic Point-to-point- Parameters B to A panel do not display. Multi-point A2B Oam Status Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-toend connections only. Seg-Pt The PSAX system is used as a single ATM link, or is part of a group of inter-connected ATM links that process OAM maintenance cells only. End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. Intermediate-Pt The PSAX system is used as a network node and an intermediate ATM device that does not terminate the ATM connection. It only generates AIS cells during a local failure. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-toend connections only. Intra-SegmentPt Any connecting point inside a segment flow. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-22 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-4. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names [Backup PVC] (display only) [Conn Status] (display only) Values Description Default: No, Yes This field displays a backup PVC, if one has been configured. Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 5 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Table window is returned (see Figure 7-7), displaying the values you just applied. 6 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2 through 5 for more connections as needed. 7 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. 8 Select Save Configuration and press Enter to store the values in the PSAX system database. End Viewing ATM-toATM VPC Statistics Steps to View ATM-to-ATM VPC Statistics Begin 1 From the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection window, select the View Connection Statistics command and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics window is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-9. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-23 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-9. Commands ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics Window The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the connection window. Display –> Field Descriptions The fields of this window have the following values: Table 7-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VCC and ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Description AIS Rx/Tx (display only) Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received and transmitted.. RDI Rx/Tx (display only) Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received and transmitted. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-24 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VCC and ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Description cell Drop/Tag (display only) Number of cells dropped and tagged on incoming side of interface A or B. Cells Received Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. (display only) Cells Transmitted Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. (display only) FEC Rate Used (ATM-to-ATM VCC only) Displays the forward error correction (FEC) rate being used by the FEC module in the A2B direction (for ATM Interface A panel), or B2A direction (for ATM Interface B panel). This field is dymanic when auto rates are selected. In other cases it will display the rate set by the user. Received Odometer Number of valid cells received since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Received field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Transmitted Odometer Number of valid cells transmitted since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Transmitted field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset. (display only) (displayed on Interface Side A Statistics panel) Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Statistics command was used. Time Since Reset (display only) (displayed on Interface Note: The Reset command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock.Other counters Side A Statistics increment for the life of the circuit. panel) End Adding/Viewing a Backup ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Steps for Adding/Viewing a Backup ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Begin 1 From the ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection window, select the Add/View Backup PVC command and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VPC Backup Connection window is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-10. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-25 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-10. ATM-to-ATM VPC Backup PVC Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Field Descriptions Function • Add This Connection Adds the connection entered on backup ATM interface right panel. • Delete Connection Deletes the selected connection. • Go Back to Primary PVC Connection –> Returns to the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. The fields on this window have the following values: Table 7-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM Backup VPC PVC Connection Window Field Name Values Description ATM Interface Panel (display only) [Slot] (display only) Varies depending on Current primary connection slot in use. equipment [Port] (display only) Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-26 Current primary connection port on module in slot in use. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM Backup VPC PVC Connection Window Field Name Values Description [Channel] (display only) Determined by the number of channels available on the port selected in the Port field Current primary connection channel on port on module on slot in use. [VPI] (display only) Default: 0 Range: 0 - 255 The primary connection virtual path identifier assigned to the interface Backup ATM Interface Panel Slot Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Port Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Channel Determined by the number of channels available on the port selected in the Port field Select the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The backup connection.virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 Backup connection virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. [Current Active PVC] (display only) [Switch Back to Primary Automatically] (display only) Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-27 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM PVC Connections This is a CBR type of connection. This type of connection also supports the use of a backup ATM interface with the option of automatic switchback. Note: The Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) feature is enabled on this screen. Statistical OAM information is provided on the related statistics screen, while additional OAM functionality can be enabled from the Diagnostics Menu. Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a circuit emulation-toATM VCC PVC connection. Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Connection Provisioning a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM PVC Connection Begin 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC and press Enter. The Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Table (see Figure 7-11) window is displayed. Figure 7-11. Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Table Window Note: At the time of initial installation, the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window displays all the connections of this type in the system. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-28 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Page Up Scroll up one page. • Page Down Scrolls down one page. • Top Displays entries at the top of the table. • Bottom Displays entries at the bottom of the table. • Find . . . Searches the table for a connection using the given interface. To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel, VPI, and VCI fields. If the connection exists, it displays on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection Displays the CE-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu Menu window. Display Fields The display fields on this window provide the following information about all the circuit emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC connections in the PSAX system: Display Field Description • Circuit Em. This panel displays the information for all circuit emulation sides of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port and channel. • ATM Side This panel displays the information for all ATM interface sides of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port, channel, VPI, and VCI. • Flow This panel displays whether the following fields are set to None or Disabled: Voice Compression, Silence Detection, Echo Cancellation, Tone Detection, Coding Translation. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection (see Figure 7-12) window is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-29 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-12. Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics window. • Add/View Backup PVC→ Displays the backup PVC connection for this primary connection or enables you to add a backup PVC for this primary PVC. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Table window. Table→ Field Descriptions 3 Select the values for the fields on this window from Table 7-7. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-30 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-7. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Circuit Emulation Interface Field values in this panel relate to the circuit emulation side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface Field values in this panel relate to the ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on chassis type Enter the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range: Variable Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides of the connection. Channel Range: ATM side: 1 On the Circuit Emulation Interface side, enter the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. On the ATM Interface side, do not change the default value (1) in this field. VPI Range: 0–255 (ATM UNI); 0–4095 (NNI) Enter the virtual path identifier for ATM side of the connection. VCI Range: 32–65535 Enter the virtual channel identifier for the ATM side of the connection. VI/VUNI Default: 0 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. This field is currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, the default value is 0. Range: 0–255 AAL2 Cid Default: 0 (display only Range: 8–255 per trunk unless SAR type is (0–7 not available; Aal2Std) reserved) Voice Compression None (default) G726-16k G726-24k G726-32k G726-40k G729a-8k PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Enter a channel identifier only if the value Aal2Std is selected in the SAR Type field described below. Otherwise, accept the default value of 0. If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. Instead, select the desired type and rate of voice compression from the list of choices. Release 7.0 7-31 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-7. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Silence Detection Values Disabled (default) Enabled Description If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. Choosing Enabled enables Silence Detection. Echo Cancellation None (default) G.165-nearEnd G.168 If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. Select G165-nearEnd if you want to enable Echo Cancellation on this connection. Tone Detection Coding Translation Disabled (default) If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, use Bypass. Bypass The value Bypass indicates that the fax tones are to be recognized and data sent by fax is not to be processed by compression and echo cancellation. FaxRelay The fax calling tone is detected. FxRlyMdmBypass Fax Relay Modem Bypass. Fax Relay is detected and modem is done in bypass mode. None (default If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. The other values indicate the desired type of pulse code modulation (PCM) translation. You must specify one of these PCM types to enable data traffic processing through the DSP2x Voice Server modules. MuLaw2muLaw ALaw2aLaw MuLaw2aLaw ALaw2MuLaw PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-32 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-7. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Conformance Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the Reference Tables appendix in this guide for ATM Traffic Descriptors for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. [FailCause A/B] (display only) Default: None Presents the AAL2 status reason code for both sides of the connection. Service Type Cbr-1 (default)) Cbr-2 PSAX system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the Reference Tables appendix in this guide for a detailed description of the values for this field. Cbr-3 Cbr-4 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-33 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-7. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Flow Values Duplex (default), SimplexA2B, SimplexB2A PointToMulti-pointA2B PointToMulti-pointB2A Description Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. Note: The values change on either side of the connection window as you scroll through this field. Indicates the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type of the incoming data stream. SAR Type Aal1 (default) AAL1 Aal2Std AAL2 Standard. Note: Choose this type for AAL2 trunking. Enter the associated channel identifier in the AAL2 field in the upper right panel. OAM STATUS Non-Mux-Aal2 Non-multiplexed AAL2 (Lucent proprietary) Unsupp (default) OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. [Backup PVC] (display only) End-Seg-Pt The PSAX system is used as both a termination point and a segment point for ATM traffic. Default: No Yes Indicates whether a backup PVC has been configured. [Conn Status](dis- Inactive play only) Active Active: The connection is passing traffic Inactive: The connection is not passing traffic. 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 5 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window is displayed with the values you just applied. 6 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2–5 for more connections as needed. 7 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-34 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections 8 Select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. End Connection Statistics Viewing Connection Statistics Begin 1 From the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window, select the View Connection Statistics command press Enter. The Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics window is displayed. Figure 7-13. Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Window Commands The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Display PVC Connection window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-35 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 7-8. Table 7-8. Field Values for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Field Names Values Description Circuit Emulation Interface The circuit emulation side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on the chassis type Enter the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range:1 to 8 Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides of the connection. Channel CE side: Range: 1 to 24 (DS1), 1 to 31 (E1), On the Circuit Emulation Interface side, enter the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. On the ATM Interface side, do not change the default value (1) in this field. ATM side:1 VPI Range: 0 to 255 Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for ATM side of the connection. VCI Range: 32 to 65535 Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. Cells Encoded 0.0000 e0 (default) The total number of encoded (transmitted) user cells going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). Cells Decoded 0.0000 e0 (default) The total number of decoded (received) user cells going out of interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). Encoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter (default) The total number of encoded user cells going into interface side B since the connection was created. Decoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter (default) The total number of decoded user cells decoded going out of interface side B since the connection was created. Time Elasped Total time elasped for OAM statistics collection since the circuit was established. Time Since Reset Total time elapsed for OAM statistics collection since the last time the Reset Odometers command was used. Note: The Reset Odometers command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. AIS Rx/Tx 0/0 (default) Number of OAM alarm indication signal cells received and transmitted. RDI 0/0 (default) Number of OAM remote defect indication cells received and transmitted. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-36 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-8. Field Values for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Field Names Values Description Cells Received 6.5000 e1 (default) The total number of received OAM cells going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in the Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created). Cells Transmitted 6.5000 e1 (default) The total number of transmitted OAM cells going out of interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created.) Received Odometer 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells received since odometer was last reset. Transmitted Odometer 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells transmitted since odometer was last reset. End Backup Connection Steps to View/Add a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connecion Begin 1 From the Circuit Emulation -to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window, select the Add/View Backup PVC command and press Enter. The Circuit Emulation -to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-14). Figure 7-14. Circuit Emulation -to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-37 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Field Descriptions Function • Add This Connection Adds connection entered on Backup ATM interface right panel. • Delete Connection Deletes backup connection. • Go Back to Primary PVC Connection –> Returns to ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. 2 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-9. Table 7-9. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Window Field Name Slot (display only for Circuit Emulation Interface) Port (display only for Circuit Emulation Interface) Channel (display only for Circuit Emulation Interface) [Current Active PVC] Values Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the number of channels module for which you are creating a connecavailable on the port tion. selected in the Port field None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. (display only) [Switch Back to Primary Automatically] (display only) Description Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Backup ATM Interface (right panel) Slot Listed as available from the PSAX device PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-38 Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a backup connection. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-9. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Window Field Name Values Description Port Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Channel Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the number of channels module for which you are creating a backup available on the port connection. selected in the Port field VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this backup interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this backup interface. VI Default: 0 Backup virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on theOC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Range: 0-255 Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a backupconnection. 3 Press Ctrl+G and select the Save Configuration option. End Adding Frame Relay-to-ATM PVC Connections Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a frame relay-to-ATM VCC PVC connection, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. Steps to Create a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin Note: The Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) feature is enabled on this screen. Statistical OAM information is provided on the related statistics screen, while additional OAM functionality can be enabled from the Diagnostics Menu. 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select Frame Relayto-ATM VCC and press Enter. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-39 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window (see Figure 7-15) is displayed. Figure 7-15. Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Table Window Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window displays all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Chnl, VPI, and DLCI/VCI fields. If the connection exists, it is displayed on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection→ Displays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ Field Descriptions The display-only fields on this window provide the following information about all the frame relay-to-ATM PVC connections in the PSAX system: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-40 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Display Field Description • Frame Relay Interface This panel displays the information for all interface A sides of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port, channel, and DLCI or VPI. • ATM Interface This panel displays the information for all interface B sides of the connections. • Flow This panel displays the direction of the data traffic flow for the connections. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window (see Figure 7-16) is displayed. Figure 7-16. Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-41 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Configure Traffic Parameters Displays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Traffic Parameters window. • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics window. • Add/View Backup PVC Displays backup PVC or option to add backup PVC. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Table→ PVC Table window. Field Descriptions 3 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values in Table 7-10. Table 7-10. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Frame Relay Interface The frame relay side of the connection. ATM Interface The ATM side of the connection. Slot Number of slots Enter the slot number containing the module for varies with both sides of the connection. chassis type Port Range: 1–28, Enter the port number on the module for both sides depending on of the connection. module selected Channel Range: The channel on which you are creating a connection. ATM side: 1 On the ATM Interface side, do not change the value 1 in this field. FR side: 1–32 On the Frame Relay Interface side, enter the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. DLCI Range: 16–1007 Data link connection identifier. DLCI is used when the remote end point is frame relay. VPI Range: 0–225 (ATM UNI); 0-4095 (NNI) Virtual path identifier. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-42 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-10. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Connection Window Field Names Values Description VCI Range: 0–65535 Virtual channel identifier. VI 0 (default) Range: 0–255 Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC3c APS, and STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, default is 0. Multiservice Media Gateway-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Cnfrmnce Type See the appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-43 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-10. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Connection Window Field Names Flow OAM Status Values Duplex, SimplexA2B, SimplexB2A, Point-to-pointMulti-point A2B Description Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. Note: Only Duplex and Simplex are applicable for DS3 IMA. Note: When you select SimplexA2B and Configure Traffic Parameters, only fields in the Traffic Parameters In side are displayed; when you select SimplexB2A and Configure Traffic Parameters, only fields in the Traffic Parameters Out side are displayed. Unsupp (default) OAM is not in use. End-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for endto-end connections only. End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. [Backup PVC] Default: No, This field displays the backup PVC, if configured. (display only) Yes [Conn Status] Inactive, Active (display only) This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. End Configuring Traffic Parameters To configure the traffic parameters for this connection, perform the steps in the following procedure. Steps to Configure Traffic Parameters Begin 1 On the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window (see Figure 7-16), select Configure Traffic Parameters and press Enter. The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Traffic Parameters window is displayed (see Figure 7-17). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-44 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-17. Frame Relay-to-ATM PVC Traffic Parameters Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Add This Connection Function Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection and Deletes the connection having the values Return currently displayed on the window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Table→ PVC Connection Table window. Field Descriptions 2 Select the values for the traffic parameter fields on this window from the values given in Table 7-11. Table 7-11. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Traffic Parameters Window Field Name Values Description Frame Size for Rate Cal. Default: 4096 Measured in bytes. Committed Burst Size Default: 0 Use the default value. Excess Burst Size Default: 45000000 Measured in bits per second. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-45 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-11. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Traffic Parameters Window Field Name Values Committed Info Default: 0 Rate Interworking Function [Time Interval] Default: Frf8-Transl, Frf8-Pass, Frf5 Description Committed information rate is the rate of traffic (measured in bits per second) for a given connection that the system will attempt to provide guaranteed delivery. FRF.8 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. FRF.5 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. Default: 1000 Time, in seconds, since the last reset. (display only) [Peak Cell Rate] Default: 1 (display only) [Sustained Cell Rate] Default: 1 Sustained cell rate. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Default: 1 Maximum burst size. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. (display only) [Max Burst Size] Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. (display only) 3 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 4 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window returns, displaying the values you just applied. 5 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2 through 5 for more connections as needed. End Viewing the Statistics From the Frame Relay-to-ATM PVC window, select the View Statistics Window command. The Frame Relay-to-ATM PVC Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 7-18). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-46 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-18. Frame Relay-to-ATM PVC Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Reset Odometers Function Resets the Encoded Odometer, Decoded Odometer, In Odometer, and Out Odometer fields to zero. Note: If a call is disconnected, all odometers are reset to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next connection of this type. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Display PVC Connection window. Field Descriptions The fields on this window have the following values: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-47 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-12. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Description Cells Encoded Number of cells encoded going into Frame Relay Interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Cells Decoded Number of cells decoded going out of Frame Relay Interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Frames Dropped Number of frames going out of Frame Relay Interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Encoded Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into Frame Relay Interface side A since this counter was reset. Decoded Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of Frame Relay Interface side A since this counter was reset. AAL5 Error Frames Number of AAL5 errored frames which are not dropped due to UPC in A2B direction. Only applicable to input side. Frames Tagged Number of frames tagged due to UPC in A2B direction. Only applicable to input side. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear or Reset Statistics command was used. Note: The Reset command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. AIS Rx/Tx Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received and transmitted. RDI Rx/Tx Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received and transmitted. cell Drop/Tag Number of cells dropped and tagged on incoming side of ATM interface B. Cells Received Number of cells Received into ATM Interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Cells Transmitted Number of cells Transmitted out of ATM Interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. In Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into ATM Interface side B since this counter was last reset. Out Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of ATM Interface side B since ince this counter was last reset. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-48 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Adding an In-Band Management ATM PVC Connection You can create an in-band management PVC connection between a configured in-band management address and any module that supports ATM interfaces. This connection supports the UBR and VBR-express service types. Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an in-Band management-to-ATM VCC connection. Note: Creating an In-Bandto-ATM VCC Connection As a prerequisite to enable in-band PVC provisioning, you must select and apply the value Disabled in the SVC Connections field on the In-Band Management Configuration window. For more information, see the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide. Steps for Creating an In-Band-to-ATM Connection Begin Use the steps in the following procedure to add an in-band management ATM PVC connection, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select the In-Band Management IP PVC option and press Enter. The In-Band Management IP PVC Connection Table window (see Figure 7-19) is displayed. Figure 7-19. In-Band Management IP PVC Connection Table Window Note: At the time of initial installation, the In-Band Management IP PVC Connection Table window is empty. After you have set up PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-49 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections connections, this window displays all the connections of this type in the system. Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Chnl, VPI, and VPI/VCI fields. If the connection exists, it is displayed on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection→ Displays the In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ Display Fields The display fields on this window provide the following information about the in-band management ATM PVC connections in the Multiservice Media Gateway system: Display Field Description • IP Address, Mask This column displays the IP addresses and masks for the managed Multiservice Media Gateway systems that are being managed from the management workstation. • In-Band Management PVC This column displays the slot, port, channel, VPI, and VCI of the connection to each managed Access Concentrator chassis • Type If the connection is inactive, an “S” will show in the column. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The In-Band Management ATM PVC Connection Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 7-20). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-50 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-20. In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Add Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Add/View Backup PVC Displays backup PVC or option to add backup PVC. • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the In-Band Management IP PVC Connection Table window. Table→ Field Descriptions 3 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values in Table 7-13. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-51 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-13. Field Descriptions for the In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration Window Field Name Values Description Slot, Port, Channel, VPI, VCI and VI Varies Enter the values for slot, port, channel, VPI, VCI, and VI for the interface in the Multiservice Media Gateway chassis to which you are connecting. Service Type Ubr (default) Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (Qos) class. Vbr-express Note: The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds.See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Conformance Type Best-effort (default) This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Peak Rate (cps) 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: 1 When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Rate field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-52 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-13. Field Descriptions for the In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration Window Field Name Sustained Rate (cps) Values Default: 1 Description When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) Default: 1 Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and amount of bandwith you are setting up for each interface on the module. IP Address, and IP Mask Variable Enter the IP address and the IP mask for one of the following depending on your in-band management scheme: • The in-band IP address of the management workstation. This IP address must be different from the one for the management workstation’s same network. • The in-band IP address of the "router" Access Concentrator system. This IP address must be different from the one for the Ethernet interface on the CPU. • The in-band IP address of the managed Access Concentrator system. This IP address must be different from the one for the Ethernet interface on the CPU. [Connection Type] Primary Displays connection type you selected. [Backup PVC] No (default) This field displays the backup PVC, if configured. (display only) Yes [Conn Status] (display only) Inactive (default) (display only) This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. Active 4 Select the Add Connection command and press Enter. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to set up as many connections as needed. 6 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. 7 Select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values in the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-53 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Setting PVC Connections for Direct In-band Connections Steps to Setting Connections for Direct In-band Connections Begin Perform the steps in the following procedure, which is a test to verify the working of console interface screens for configuring the in-band management IP address and the PVC connection. 1 Configure the Primary IP address for in-band management on the CPU module (Node- A) using the console interface (This IP address should different from the IP address of Ethernet interface on the CPU module.) Use [Site Specific Configuration]->[In-Band Management] menu. Example: Primary IP Address: 136.242.140.223 Primary IP Mask : 255.255.255.000 2 Set up the in-band management connection on the CPU module ( Node A). For setting up a connection from the OC-3c module to the CPU module, configure the OC-3c module and put it in service. Then configure the PVC the FORECARD, using the console interface [Connection Configuration]-> [In-Band Management IP PVC] -> [Add Connection] screen. Example: Slot<OC3 Slot>VPI: 0IP Address: 136.242.140.222 Port1 VCI: 300IP Mask: 255.255.255.000 Channel 1 Similar connections can be set up on other remote AC systems. 3 Use ping, telnet, rlogin and ftp from the SUN to test the TCP/IP connection to the CPU module using the Primary and Backup IP Address. 4 During an ftp session on the in-band management connection, disconnect one of the cables out of the pair of cables connecting the AC to the SUN machine. Reconnect the cable and check whether the ftp session is still alive, and whether the software recovers from a momentary connection loss. End Configuring a In-Band ATM Backup PVC Connection Begin 1 From the In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration window, select the Add/View Backup PVC command. The INBAND-ATM Backup Connection window is displayed, (see Figure 7-21). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-54 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-21. INBAND-ATM PVC Connection Configuration Window The commands on this window have the following functions: Commands Command Function • Add This Connection Adds the backup connection for the specified slot, port, channel, VPI, VCI, and VI • Delete Connection Deletes the backup connection. • Go Back to Primary PVC Connection Redisplays the Inband ATM PVC Connection Configuration window. 2 Select the values for the fields on this window from the following table: Table 7-14. Field Descriptions for the Inband-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection Window Field Name Values Description Backup ATM Interface side Slot (display only) Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a backup connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-55 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-14. Field Descriptions for the Inband-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection Window Field Name Port (display only) Channel (display only) Values Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Description Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a backup connection. Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the module number of channels for which you are creating a backup connection. available on the port selected in the Port field VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Range: 0-255 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC3c APS, and STM-1 MSP modules. None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). Yes (default) The CPU monitors the primary connection. If the primary connection becomes available, the connection on the backup circuit will be switched back to the primary circuit. No Not currently supported. [Current Active PVC] (display only) [Switch Back to Primary Automatically] (display only) Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. IP Interface side [IP Address], and [IP Mask] (display only, IP Interface side) Variable The IP address and the IP mask you entered for the primary connection. See these field descriptions on the primary In-band Connection window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-56 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Adding Bridge-to-ATM PVC Connections Creating a Bridge-to- This type of connection supports all non-CBR service types. Perform the steps ATM VCC Connection in the following procedure to create a bridge-to-ATM PVC connection. Creating a Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin Note: The Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) feature is enabled on this screen. Statistical OAM information is provided on the related statistics screen, while additional OAM functionality can be enabled from the Diagnostics Menu. 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select Bridge-to-ATM VCC and press Enter. The Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window will display (see Figure 7-22). Figure 7-22. Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Table Window Note: At the time of initial installation, the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window will display all the connections of this type in the system. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-57 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel, VPI, and VCI fields. If the connection exists, it displays on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection→ Displays the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ Display-Only Fields The display fields on this window provide the following information about all the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC connections in the PSAX system: Display Field Description • Bridge Side This column displays the information for the interface A side of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port, channel, VPI, and VCI. • ATM Side This column displays the information for the interface B side of the connections. • Flow This column displays the direction of the data traffic flow for the connections. • (S) Status (display only) Indicated status of connection. An asterisk indicates an operational connection. No asterisk indicates inactive connection. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the identification number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-58 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections The Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window will display (see Figure 7-23). Figure 7-23. Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Statistics window. Field Descriptions • Add/View Backup PVC Displays backup PVC or option to add backup PVC. • Go Back to Connection Table→ Redisplays the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window. 3 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-15. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-59 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-15. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Bridge Interface A The bridge side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface B The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Default: 0 Enter the slot number containing the Ethernet module for which you are creating a connection. [Port] (display only) 6 The virtual port number of the Ethernet module. Channel Default: 1 Enter the channel number associated with the port number on the Ethernet module for which you are creating a connection. Range: 1–70 VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 (AtmUNI); 0–4095 (IISP) VCI Default: 0 Range: 32–65535 VI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Grf2 Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS, and the STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, default is 0. Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the section, “Quality of Service Classes for ATM Traffic,” in the appendix. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-60 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-15. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Conformance Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Peak Rate (cps) 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1 (default) When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Rate field. Sustained Rate (cps) 1 (default) When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Rate field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-61 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-15. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Max Burst Size (cells) Values 1 (default) Description Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at one time. This value allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the SCR. If the burst is larger than the traffic contract allows, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for that module. [Conn Status] Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. [Backup PVC] (display only) No, Yes Displays backup PVC or option to display backup PVC. OAM Status End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. (display only) (default) End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. Unsupp OAM is not in use. 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 5 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter. The Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window will display, with the values you just applied. End Viewing Statistics To view the statistics for this connection, select the View Connection Statistics command and press Enter. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-62 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections The Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics window will display (see Figure 7-24). Figure 7-24. Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Display Connection window. Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 7-16. Table 7-16. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Slot (display only) Port (display only) Description Slot identifier of the ATM interface for either the Bridge Interface panel or the ATM Interface panel. Port identifier of the ATM interface for either the Bridge Interface panel or the ATM Interface panel. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-63 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-16. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Channel Description Channel identifier for either Interface A or Interface B. (display only) VPI (ATM Interface panel only) Virtual path identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. (display only) VCI (ATM Interface panel only) Virtual channel identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. (display only) Cells Encoded (display only) Cells Decoded (display only) Number of cells encoded going into interface side Aor B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Number of cells decoded going out of interface side Aor B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Encoded Odome- Total number of cells encoded going into interface side A or B since this counter was reset. ter (display only) Decoded Odome- Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A or B since this counter was reset. ter (display only) [Time Elapsed] Time elapsed since the circuit was established. (display only) Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Statistics command was used. (display only) Note: AIS Rx/Tx(display only) Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received or transmitted. RDI Rx/Tx(display only) Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received or transmitted. Cell Drop/Tag Number of cells dropped or tagged on incoming side of interface A or B. The Reset command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. (display only) Cells Received (display only) Number of cells received into interface side B since the connection was created. Cells Transmitted Number of cells transmitted out of interface side B since the connection was created. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-64 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-16. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Window Field Name In Odometer (display only) Out Odometer (display only) Description Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since this counter was reset. Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side B since this counter was reset. 6 Select the Go Back to Connection Display command and press Enter. Creating Backup PVC Connections Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a backup bridge-toATM PVC connection. Creating a Backup Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin 1 To view or set up a backup PVC connection, select the Add/View Backup PVC command and press Enter. The Bridge-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection window will display (see Figure 7-25). Figure 7-25. Bridge-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-65 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Command Function • Add This Connection Adds connection entered on Backup ATM interface. • Delete Connection Deletes selected connection. • Go Back to Primary PVC Connection –> Returns to Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. 2 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2 through 5 for more connections as needed. Field Descriptions 3 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-17. Table 7-17. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection Window Field Name Slot (display only for Bridge Interface) Port (display only for Bridge Interface) Channel (display only for Bridge Interface) Values Description Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module configured with an ATM interface, for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module configured with an ATM interface, for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the port connumber of chanfigured with an ATM interface, for which you are crenels available on the ating a connection. port selected in the Port field VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). [Current Active PVC] (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-66 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-17. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Connection Window Field Name [Switch Back to Primary Automatically] (display only) Values Description Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. 4 Select Add This Connection command and press Enter. 5 Select the Go Back to Primary PVC Connection command and press Enter. End Adding VBR-to-ATM PVC Connections Creating a VBR-toPerform the steps in the following procedure to create a VBR-to-ATM PVC ATM VCC Connection connection. Steps to Create a VBR-to-ATM VCC Connection Begin Note: The Operations Administration and Maintenance (OAM) feature is enabled on this screen. Statistical OAM information is provided on the related statistics screen, while additional OAM functionality can be enabled from the Diagnostics Menu. Use the steps in the following procedure to add a VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC connection, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select VBR-to-ATM VCC Connection and press Enter. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-67 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections The VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window (see Figure 7-26) is displayed. Figure 7-26. VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Table Window Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window is displayed all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel, VPI, and VCI fields. If the connection exists, it will display on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection→ Displays the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window (see Figure 7-27) is displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-68 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-27. VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics window. • Add/View Backup PVC→ Displays backup PVC or option to add backup PVC. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Table→ Connection Table window. Field Descriptions 3 The fields on this window are described on the following table: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-69 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-18. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description VBR Interface A The VBR side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface B The ATM side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Number of slots varies with chassis type Enter the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–28, depending on module selected Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides of the connection. Channel Range: 1–32 Do not change the value 1 in this field. VPI Range: 0–225 (ATM UNI); 0–4095 (NNI) Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VCI Range: 32– 65535 Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VI 0 (default) Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, default is 0. Range: 0–255 Peak Rate (cps) Default: 1 When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Rate field. Sustained Rate (cps) Default: 1 When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Rate field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-70 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-18. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Max Burst Size (cells) Values 1 (default) Description Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. Service Type Flow Ubr (default), Vbrnrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. Default: Duplex, SimplexA2B, SimplexB2A Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. See the appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. When you select SimplexA2B or SimplexB2A, the fields in the Traffic Parameters B to A or the Traffic Parameters A to B section, respectively, are not displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-71 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-18. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Conformance Type(displayed on the Traffic Parameters B to A panel) Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the “ATM Traffic Descriptors" appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. OAM Status Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-toend connections only. End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. [Backup PVC] Default: No, This field displays the backup PVC if designated. (display only) Yes [Conn Status] (display only) Default: Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-72 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 5 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Table window (see Figure 7-26) is returned, displaying the values you just applied. 6 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2–5 for more connections as needed. 7 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. 8 Select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values to the PSAX system database. End Viewing the VBR-toATM Connection Statistics From the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window, select the View Connection Statistics command and press Enter. The VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics window is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-28. Figure 7-28. VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-73 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the connection window. Display –> Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in the following table. Table 7-19. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC/SPVC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Description VBR Interface Slot Slot number of VBR interface Port Port number of VBR interface Channel Channel number on port of VBR interface. Cells Encoded Number of cells encoded going into interface side Aor B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. (display only) Cells Decoded (display only) Encoded Odometer (display only) Decoded Odometer Number of cells decoded going out of interface side A or B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Total number of cells encoded going into interface side A or B since this counter was reset. (display only) Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A or B since this counter was reset. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. (display only) Time Since Reset (display only) Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Statistics command was used. Note: The Reset command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. ATM Interface AIS Rx/Tx Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received/transmitted. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-74 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-19. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC/SPVC Connection Statistics Window Field Name RDI Rx/Tx Description (display only) Number of remote defect indicator signal (AIS) cells received/transmitted. cell Drop/Tag Number of cells dropped/tagged. (display only) Cells Received Total number of cells received. (display only) Cells Transmited Total number of cells transmitted. (display only) In Odometer (display only) Out Odometer (display only) Adding/Viewing a Backup PVC Connection Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since the connection statistics were reset. Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since the connection statistics were reset. Steps to Add/View a Backup VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin 1 From the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window, select the Add/View Backup PVC command. The VBR to-ATM VCC PVC Backup Connection window is displayed. Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Field Descriptions • Add This Connection Adds connection entered on Backup ATM interface right panel. • Delete Connection Deletes backup connection. • Go Back to Primary PVC Connection –> Returns to VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window. 2 The fields on this window are described in the following table. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Release 7.0 7-75 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-20. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC Backup PVC Window Field Name Slot (display only for VBR Interface) Port (display only for VBR Interface) Channel (display only for VBR Interface) Values Description Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the number of channels module for which you are creating a connection. available on the port selected in the Port field VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Range: 0-255 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. [Current Active PVC] (display only) [Switch Back to Primary Automatically] (display only) Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. End Adding VBR-to-VBR PVC Connections Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a VBR-to-VBR VCC connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-76 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Steps to Create a VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Begin 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select VBR-to-VBR Connection and press Enter (or press Ctrl+O). The VBR-to-VBR PVC Table window (see Figure 7-29) is displayed. Figure 7-29. VBR-to-VBR PVC Table Window Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the VBR-to-VBR PVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window is displayed all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel, VPI, and VCI fields. If the connection exists, it will display on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection→ Displays the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu→ Menu window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-77 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+A). The VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection window (see Figure 7-30) is displayed. Figure 7-30. VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • View Connection Statistics Displays the VBR-to-VBR PVC Statistics window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the VBR-to-VBR PVC Table Table window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-78 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Field Descriptions 3 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-21. Table 7-21. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description VBR Interface A Side A of the connection that will send and receive signals. VBR Interface B Side B of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on chassis type Enter the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–6 Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides of the connection. Channel 1 Do not change the value 1 in this field. Peak Rate (cps) Default: 1 When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. Sustained Rate (cps) Default: 1 When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. Max Burst Size (cells) 1 (default) Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-79 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-21. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Field Names Flow Values Description Default: Duplex, Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B Note: When you select SimplexA2B, the fields in the Traffic Parameters B to A panel do not display. The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Conformance Type Note: See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-80 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Table 7-21. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Field Names Service Type Values Ubr (default) Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express [Conn Status] Inactive, Active (display only) Description Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the section, “Quality of Service Classes for ATM Traffic,” in the appendix. This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+A). 5 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The VBR-to-VBR PVC Table window is returned, displaying the values you just applied. 6 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2–5 for more connections as needed. 7 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. 8 Select Save Configuration and press Enter (or press Ctrl+A) to store the values to the PSAX system database. End Viewing VBR-to-VBR PVC Statistics Begin 1 From the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection window, select the View Connection Statistics command. The VBR-to-VBR PVC Statistics window is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-31. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-81 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 7-31. VBR-to-VBR PVC Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the connection window. Display –> Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 7-22. Table 7-22. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR VCC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Cells Encoded (display only) Cells Decoded (display only) Description Number of cells encoded going in interface side A or B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created). Number of cells decoded going out interface side A or B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-82 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-22. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR VCC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Encoded Odometer (display only) Decoded Odometer Description Total number of cells encoded going in interface side A or B since the connection was created. (display only) Total number of cells decoded going out interface side A or B since the connection was created. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. (display only) Time Since Reset (display only) Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Odometers command was used. Note: The Reset Odometers command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. Provisioning SVC Connections Viewing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connections The SVC connections that display on the ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Table window change dynamically as they are created and then torn down. Use the following steps to display SVC connections, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. In the Connection Configuration Menu window, select ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-32). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-83 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-32. ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Table Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Find Function To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Chnl, VPI, and VCI fields If the connection exists, it is displayed on the first line of the table. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ To refresh the display of SVCs, select the Go Back to Connection Menu command, and then select the ATM-to-ATM VCC option again. Enabling SVC Connections To display SVC connections in the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP table, they must be enabled by configuring IISP or PNNI links on the PSAX system. To enable SVC connections, you must first set up a PNNI link or an IISP link. Setting Up a PNNI Link To set up a PNNI link, do the following: 1. Configure a PNNI node and bring it into service. Be sure that Up is displayed in the [Admin Status] field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-84 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections For instructions on PNNI node configuration, the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide. 2. Configure a channel on an I/O module with the ATM PNNI interface, and bring the interface into service. For instructions on ATM PNNI interface configuration, see the appropriate PacketStar® Module User Guide. After enabling this PNNI link, ATM-to-ATM SVC connections can be dynamically created by the PSAX system. If you enable a PNNI link and a IISP link, the PSAX system will use the PNNI link first to create a SVC. If the PNNI link goes down, the IISP link will be used to sustain the SVC. Setting Up an IISP Link To set up a IISP link, do the following: 1. Configure a channel on an I/O module with the ATM IISP User or ATM IISP Network interface, and bring the interface into service. For instructions on ATM IISP interface configuration, see the appropriate PacketStar® Module User Guide. 2. Add an entry to the IISP VBR routing table or the IISP CBR routing table. For instructions on adding IISP VBR and IISP CBR routing entries, see the appropriate PacketStar® Module User Guide. After enabling this IISP link, ATM-to-ATM SVC connections can be dynamically created by the PSAX system. If you enable a PNNI link and a IISP link, the PSAX system will use the PNNI link first to create a SVC. If the PNNI link goes down, the IISP link will be used to sustain the SVC. Editing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connection Entries The SVC connections that display on the ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Table window change dynamically as they are created and then torn down. Viewing or Editing an Perform the steps in the following procedure to view or edit an ATM-to-ATM ATM-to-ATM SVC SVC connection, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. Connection Steps to View or Edit an ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connection Begin 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select the ATM-toATM VCC/VPC (n) option and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-33). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-85 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-33. ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Find Function To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Chnl, VPI, and VCI fields If the connection exists, it is displayed on the first line of the table. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu Menu window. If connection entries exist in the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table window, you may edit traffic parameters. 2 To edit an existing SVC connection entry in the table, select the entry and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-34). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-86 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-34. ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Connection window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table window. Table→ Field Descriptions 3 You may edit this entry by entering the values for the fields on this window as described in Table 7-23. Table 7-23. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Window Field Names Values Description Slot Varies depending on chassis type Select the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Select slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–30 Select the port number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Select slot numbers for both sides of the connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-87 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-23. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Window Field Names Values Description Channel Range: 1–32 The channel number of the port on the module for which this connection was created. VPI 0 (default) Range: 0–4095 Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. 0 (default) Virtual channel identifier. VCI Range: 32–65535 Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Gfr-1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2, Cbr1, Gfr-2 Conformance Type Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the appendix in the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide for a detailed description of the values for this field. The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1B-NT-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). 2B-NT-0+1-0+1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. 2B-NT-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. 2B-T-0+1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to always change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-88 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-23. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Window Field Names SAR Type Values Description Null (default) The segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type should correAal5, Aal3/4, Aal2, spond to the SAR type of the incoming data stream. Aal1 Default: None Eighth Rate, Quar(Forward Error ter Rate, Half Rate, Auto Hi Q, Auto, Correction) Auto Lo Q The values Eighth Rate, Quarter Rate, and Half Rate are a Reed-Solomon encoding rate with a specific error-correction capability. The values Auto Hi Q, Auto, and Auto Lo Q are dynamically changing rate options. Peak Rate(0+1) Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (measured in cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. Frwd Error Correct Default: 1 When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. SCR/PCR (0) Default: 1 Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells, measured in cells per second. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than or equal to the Peak Rate(0+1) field. Max Burst Size Default: 1 Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value for peak rate to 0. Flow(display only) Duplex (default), SimplexA2B, Point-to-Multipoint A2B Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-89 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-23. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Window Field Names Oam Status Values Description Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a termination point for ATM. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. Seg-Pt Not supported. End-Seg-Pt Not supported. Intermediate-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a network node and an intermediate ATM device that does not terminate the ATM connection. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. [Conn Status](display only) Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. 4 To view the updated SVC entry, select the Go Back to Connection Table command. This entry is displayed in the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table window (Figure 7-34 on page 7-87) with the values you set in the ATMto-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Connection window(see Figure 7-33). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-90 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-35. ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table Window (Displaying Entries) End Viewing Connection Statistics To view the statistics for the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP connection, go to the ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Connection window (see Figure 7-34 on page 7-87), select the View Connection Statistics command and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 7-36). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-91 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-36. ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the connection window. Display –> Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 7-24. Table 7-24. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC /VPC SVC/SVP Statistics Window Field Names Values Description Interface A Statistics The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface B Statistics The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot (display only) Varies depending on chassis type Select the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Select slot numbers for both sides of the connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-92 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-24. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC /VPC SVC/SVP Statistics Window Field Names Port Values Range: 1-30 Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Select port numbers for both sides of the connection. Range: 1-32 Select the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. Select channel numbers for both sides of the connection. (display only) Channel Description (display only) VPI Range: 0 to 255 Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for ATM side of the connection. VCI Range: 32 to 65535 cell Drop/Tag Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. Cells dropped or tagged due to UPC/traffic policing. Cells Received 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of OAM cells received on Interface A or B. Cells Transmitted 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of OAM cells transmitted on Interface A or B. Received Odometer 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells received on Interface A or B since odometer was last reset. Transmitted Odome- 6.5000 e1 ter (default) Total number of ATM cells transmitted on Interface A or B since odometer was last reset. Time Elapsed (Format is ) Total time elapsed for OAM statistics collection. Time Since Reset Format is ) Total time elapsed for OAM statistics collection since the last odometer reset. 5 Press Ctrl+G and select the Save Configuration menu option. End Adding Entries to the ATM IISP CBR Routing Table Creating IISP VBR Entries Use the steps in the following procedure to add an entry to the CBR routing table, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. Creating Entries in the IISP VBR Routing Table Begin 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select the IISP CBR Routing Table option and press Enter. The IISP CBR Routing Table window will display (see Figure 7-37). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-93 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-37. IISP CBR Routing Table Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Find Function Finds the routing entry with the specified NSAP address. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration window. Menu→ 2 Select the Add an Entry field, and press Enter. a. Type a network service access point (NSAP) address up to 20 bytes (160 bits) long (10 groups of 4 characters each), and press the Tab key. b. In the Num Bits field, type a value from 1–152 for the NSAP address mask, and press the Tab key. c. In the Slot Port Chnl field, type the slot, port, and channel values for the ATM-cell-bearing I/O module that has a configured ATM IISP (User or Network) interface. d. Press Enter to add the entry to the table. 3 Repeat step 2 as many times as needed to add entries to the table. 4 To permanently save these table entries, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-94 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections 5 Select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. End Adding Entries to the ATM IISP VBR Routing Table Creating IISP VBR Entries Use the steps in the following procedure to add an entry to the VBR routing table, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. Adding NSAP Address Entries Begin 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select the IISP VBR Routing Table option and press Enter. The IISP VBR Routing Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-38). Figure 7-38. IISP VBR Routing Table Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-95 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Find Function Finds the routing entry with the specified NSAP address. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu→ window. 2 Select the Add an Entry field, and press Enter. a. Type a network service access point (NSAP) address in hexadecimal format up to 20 bytes (160 bits) long (10 groups of 4 characters each), and press the Tab key. b. In the Num Bits field, type a value from 1–152 for the NSAP address mask, and press the Tab key. c. In the Slot Port Chnl field, type the slot, port, and channel values for the ATM-cell-bearing I/O module that has a configured ATM IISP (User or Network) interface. d. Press Enter to add the entry to the table. 3 Repeat step 2 as many times as needed to add entries to the table. 4 To permanently save these table entries, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. 5 Select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. End Provisioning SPVC Connections Adding ATM-to-ATM SPVC Connections Creating an ATM-toATM VCC SPVC Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-96 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Steps to Create an ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Begin 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select SPVC Configuration Screen (y) and press Enter. The SPVC Connection Configuration Menu window is displayed (see Figure 7-39). Figure 7-39. SPVC Connection Configuration Menu 2 On the SPVC Connection Configuration Menu window, select ATM-toATM VCC(z) for SPVC configuration, and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-40). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-97 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-40. ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table Window Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window is displayed all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel, VPI, and VCI fields. If the connection exists, it is displayed on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection→ Displays the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window. • Restart all unconnected Restarts connection establishment procedure for all active ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVCs which are not previously set up. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ Field Descriptions The display-only fields on this window provide the following information about all the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC connections in the PSAX system: The fields on this window provide the following information about all the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC connections in the AQueView system: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-98 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Display Field Description • ATM PVC Interface This column displays the information for all interface A (PVC) sides of the connections. The connection entries are shown in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port, channel, VPI, and VCI. • Remote Port Address This column displays the ATM NSAP address for the remote end of the connection in hexadecimal notation. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 3 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-41). Figure 7-41. ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-99 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • View Connection Statistics→ Displays the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Restart this connection Restarts connection establishment procedure for this ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC. • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Table window. Table→ Field Descriptions 4 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-25. Table 7-25. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description ATM Interface A Side A (PVC side)of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface B Side B (SVC side)of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot The range varies Enter the slot number containing the module for which depending on you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for chassis type. both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–28, Enter the port number on the module for which you are depending on creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides module selected of the connection. Channel Range: 1–32 This is the channel where the call originates. For example, on a port of the DS3 IMA module, you can configure more than one channel in a port. VPI Range: 0–4095 Virtual path identifier; an addressing identifier that routes cell traffic. VCI Range: 0–4095 Virtual channel identifier; an addressing identifier that routes cell traffic. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-100 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-25. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Field Names Conn Type Values Default: ActiveSvc The type of connection. ActiveSvc attempts calls. PassiveSvc accepts calls. PassiveSvc Note: Remote VPI/VCI Default: (shown when Required ActiveSvc is selected as the connection Any type) Flow Description Many fields disappear in this mode. This field indicates whether the remote VPI/VCI values are to be used at the destination. The destination device uses the values specified at this end. The destination device selects the VPI/VCI values. The VPI and VCI fields disappear when Any is selected. VPI Range: 0-4095 Virtual path identifier. VPI displays when Required is selected. VCI Range: 32–65535 Virtual channel identifier. VCI displays when Required is selected. Default: Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, • Duplex PointToMultipoi Data flows in two directions between the two connecntA2B, Simplex tion points (interface side A and interface side B). B2A • Simplex Data flows in only one direction, from side A to side B, or from side B to side A. • Point-to-multipoint Data flows in only one direction, from one point on side A to several points on side B, or from one point on side B to several points on side A. Retry Limit Default: 0 Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful Range: 0–65535 call setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. Note: A value of 0 will result in an infinite number of retries. Retry Interval (sec) Remote NSAP Addr (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: 12 The number of seconds between retry intervals. Range: 0–3600 Note: The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote ATM interface. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 A value of 0 will result in a retry with no delay. Release 7.0 7-101 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-25. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Service Type Default: Ubr Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2, Cbr1 Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. Peak Rate(0+1) Default: 1 Peak cell rate. The maximum allowed cell transmission rate (in cells per second), which defines the shortest time period between cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Note: If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value for peak rate to 0. [Oper Status] Default: Other None of the types specified below. (display only) EstablishConnection is not operational, but call attempts are mentInProgress ongoing. Connected Connection is currently operational. RetriesExhausted Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. NoAddressSupplied No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. LowerLayerDown PVC endpoint is out of service. WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingForRetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. [Last Rls Diag] (display only) Last release diagnosis. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. [Retry Failure Count] Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Multiservice Media Gateway will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (display only) [Last Rls Cause] Default: 0 (display only) Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-102 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections 5 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 6 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is returned, displaying the values you just applied. 7 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2 through 5 for more connections as needed. Viewing Connection Statistics To view statistics, select the View Connection Statistics command and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 7-42). Figure 7-42. ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-103 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Command • Reset Odometers Function Resets the Encoded Odometer, Decoded Odometer, In Odometer, and Out Odometer fields to zero. Note: If a call is disconnected, all odometers are reset to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next connection of this type. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window. Display→ Field Descriptions 8 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-26. ` Table 7-26. ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Name Description Slot Slot identifier of the ATM interface for either the ATM Interface A panel or the ATM Interface B panel. Port Port identifier of the ATM interface for either the ATM Interface A panel or the ATM Interface B panel. Channel Channel identifier of the ATM interface for either Interface A or Interface B. VPI Virtual path identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. VCI Virtual channel identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. Cells Received Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. Cells Transmitted Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. FEC Rate Used Displays the forward error correction (FEC) rate being used by the FEC module in the A2B direction (for ATM Interface A panel), or B2A direction (for ATM Interface B panel). This field is dymanic when auto rates are selected. In other cases it will display the rate set by the user. Received Odometer Number of valid cells received since this counter was reset. Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the cells Tx/Rx counters track usage for the life of the circuit. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-104 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-26. ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Name Description Transmitted Odometer Number of valid cells transmitted since this counter was reset. Time Elapsed Time, in hours, minutes, and seconds, since last reset. Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the cells Tx/Rx counters track usage for the life of the circuit. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Odometers command was used. End Adding NSAP Addresses To add NSAP addresses, perform the steps in the following procedure. Adding NSAP Addresses to the SPVC Address Table Begin 1 On the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The SPVC Connection Configuration Menu is displayed (see Figure 7-39). 2 Select the Configure Local Address command and press Enter. The SPVC Address Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-43). Figure 7-43. SPVC Address Table Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-105 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Find . . . Function Finds the specified NSAP address. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table→ Table window. 3 Select the Add an Entry field, and press Enter. a. Type a network service access point (NSAP) address up to 20 bytes (160 bits) long (10 groups of 4 characters each), and press the Tab key. b. In the Slot Port Chnl field, type the slot, port, and channel values for the ATM-cell-bearing I/O module that has a configured ATM IISP (User or Network) or ATM UNI 3.0 or 3.1 interface. c. Press Enter to add the entry to the table. 4 Repeat step 2 as many times as needed to add NSAP addresses. 5 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to return to the Console Interface Main Menu window. 6 Select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values in the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. End Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connections Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a circuit emulation-toATM VCC SPVC connection. Steps to Create a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Begin 1 On the SPVC Connection Configuration Menu window, select Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC(y), and press Enter. The Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-44). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-106 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-44. Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table Window Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window will display all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel fields. If the connection exists, it will display on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection Displays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window. Enter the CE side slot, port, channel, and parameters of the new connection on this window. • Restart all unconnected Restarts connection establishment procedure for all inactive Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVCs which were not previously operationally active. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Menu SPVC Table window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-107 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Display Field Descriptions The display-only fields on this window provide the following information about all the circuit emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC connections in the PSAX system: Display Field Description • Circuit Emulation Side This column displays the information for all circuit emulation sides of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port and channel. • Remote Port Address This column displays the ATM NSAP address for the remote end of the connection in hexadecimal notation. • Flow This column displays the direction of the data traffic flow for the connections. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-45). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-108 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-45. Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Restart This Connection Restarts connection establishment procedure for Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVCs which were not previously operationally active. • Configure DSP2 Parameters • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • View Connection Statistics Displays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Table SPVC Table window. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-109 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Field Descriptions 3 Select the values for the fields on this window from Table 7-27. Table 7-27. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Circuit Emulation Interface Description The circuit emulation side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface Interface Dependent The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on chassis type Enter the CE-side slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Port Range: 1–28, depending on the module selected Enter the CE-side port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Channel On the Circuit Emulation Interface side, enter the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. VPI (display only) Range: 0–4095 Virtual path identifier (ATM side). VCI (display only) Range: Virtual channel identifier (ATM side). Connection Type ActiveSvc (default), PassiveSvc ActiveSvc attempts calls when a call has not been previously established, or re-starts calls that have failed. PassiveSvc accepts calls. Other fields disappear when PassiveSvc is selected. Service Type Cbr-2 (default), Cbr-3, Cbr-4 Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the Reference appendix for more information. Flow Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. (default), SimplexA2B, Simplex B2A, PointToMultipoi ntA2B, PointToMultipoi ntB2A Remote NSAP Addr (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) 0– 65535 The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote circuit emulation or ATM interface. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-110 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-27. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names SAR Type Note: If you are upgrading your CPU software, see Note below table. Retry Limit Values Description Default: Non-Mux-Aal2 Non-multiplexed AAL2. Note: Choose this type to configure an SPVC if using DSP parameters with the connection. Note: If using structured, channelized T1 service, see Note below table). Aal1 AAL1. Uncompressed CBR. Default: 0 Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful call Range: 0–65535 setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. Note: A value of 0 will result in an infinite number of retries. Retry Interval(sec) Default: 1 The number of seconds between retry intervals. Range: 0–3600 Note: [Oper Status] Default: Other None of the types specified below. (display only) EstablishConnection is not operational, but call attempts are ongoing. mentInProgress A value of 0 will result in a retry with no delay. Connected Connection is currently operational. Retries Exhausted Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. NoAddress Supplied No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. LowerLayer Down PVC endpoint is out of service. WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingFor RetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. [Last Rls Diag] (display only) Last release diagnostic. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. [Last Rls Cause] Default: 0 Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (display only) [Retry Failure Count] Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Multiservice Media Gateway will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (display only) Note: SAR Type for Using Structured, Channelized T1 Service. You must select non-multiplexed AAL2 (non-mux AAL2) when using structured, channelized T1 service on the following PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-111 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections modules: Channelized DS3 (multifunction), 1-port Channelized DS3 CES, 3-port Channelized DS3 CES (Release 7.0 CPU software required), Channelized STS-1e CES, Channelized STS-1e T1, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1 (21 port), and Medium Density DS1 (12-port). Save your SVCs before upgrading your CPU software, or you will have to re-enter their configurations. 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. End Viewing Connection Statistics From the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window, select the View Connection Statistics command and press Enter. The Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 7-46). Figure 7-46. Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-112 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Commands The commands in this window have the following functions: Command Function • Reset Odometers Returns all statistics odometers to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next selected connection. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Display SPVC Connection window. Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 7-28. Table 7-28. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Names Values Description Circuit Emulation Interface The circuit emulation side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot (display only) Variable depending on the chassis type The slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Port Range:1–8 The port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. CE side: Range: 1–24 (DS1), 1–31 (E1), On the Circuit Emulation Interface side, enter the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. On the ATM Interface side, do not change the default value (1) in this field. (display only) Channel (display only) ATM side:1 VPI Range: 0–255 Virtual path identifier (ATM side). VCI Range: Virtual channel identifier (ATM side). (display only) 32–65535 Cells Encoded 0.0000 e0 (default) Number of cells encoded going into either interface side during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). 0.0000 e0 (default) Number of cells decoded going out of either interface side during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). (display only) (display only) Cells Decoded (display only) Encoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter Total number of cells encoded going into either interface side since the odometer was last reset. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-113 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-28. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Names Values Decoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter (default) Description Total number of cells decoded going out of either interface side since the odometer was last reset. (display only) Time elapsed since the circuit was established. Time Elapsed (display only) Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Odometers command was used. This command resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. Time Since Reset (display only) Cells Received (display only) 6.5000 e1 (default) Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. Cells Transmitted 6.5000 e1 (default) Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells received since odometer was last reset. 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells transmitted since odometer was last reset. (display only) Received Odometer (display only) Transmitted Odometer (display only) Adding Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connections Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Follow the steps below to create a frame relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC connection. Steps to Create a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Begin Use the steps in the following procedure to add a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC connection, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. 1 On the Connection Configuration Menu window, select SPVC Configuration Screen(y), and press Enter. The SPVC Connection Configuration Menu window is displayed (see Figure 7-47). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-114 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-47. SPVC Connection Configuration Menu Window 2 Select Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC and press Enter. The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-48). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-115 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-48. Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table Window Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window displays all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Channel, and DLCI fields. If the connection exists, it will display on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection Displays the Frame Relay-to ATM VCC SPVC Connection window. • Restart all unconnected Restarts connection establishment procedure for all active Frame Relay-to ATM VCC SPVCs which are not previously set up. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu Menu window. Display Fields The display fields on this window provide the following information about all the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC connections in the Access Concentrator system: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-116 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Display Field Description • (Frame Relay) This column displays the information for all interface A (PVC) sides of the connections. The connection entries are displayed in ascending numerical order by slot, then by port, channel, and DLCI. • (ATM Side) This column displays the information for all interface B (SVC) sides of the connections. • Flow This column displays the data traffic flow for the connections. (S) • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 3 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-49). Figure 7-49. Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-117 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Restart this Connection Restarts connection establishment procedure for this Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC. • Configure Traffic Parameters Displays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Traffic Parameters window. • View Connection Statistics Displays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window. • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table Connection Table window. Field Descriptions 4 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 7-29. Table 7-29. Field Values for the Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Frame Relay Interface Frame relay side (PVC side) of the connection. ATM Interface ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. ([Slot], [Port], [Channel], [VPI], and [VCI] fields are display only) Slot Varies depending on chassis type Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Channel Enter the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for both sides of the connection. 1 The channel number on the module for which you are creating a connection. This is the channel where the call originates. For example, on a port of the Enhanced DS1 module, you can configure more than one channel in a port. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-118 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-29. Field Values for the Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description DLCI Range: 16–1007 Data link connection identifier. DLCI is used when the remote end point is frame relay. Conn Type Default: ActiveSvc The type of connection. ActiveSvc attempts calls. PassiveSvc accepts calls. PassiveSvc Service Type Default: Ubr Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Flow Default: Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, • Duplex Simplex B2A Data flows in two directions between the two connection points (interface side A and interface side B). Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. • Simplex Data flows in only one direction, from side A to side B, or from side B to side A. Interworking Function Default: Frf8-Transl FRF.8 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. Frf8-Pass; Frf5 FRF.5 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. Note: No matter which value you select in this field, you can set values for the Remote Remote VPI,VCI/DLCI field. Remote VPI,VCI/DLCI (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: Required This field indicates whether the remote VPI, VCI, and DLCI values are to be used at the destination. The destination device uses the values specified at this end. Any The destination device selects the VPI/VCI values. VPI Range: 0–4095 Virtual path identifier. VCI Range: 32–65535 Virtual channel identifier. DLCI Range: Data link connection identifier. DLCI is used when the remote end point is frame relay. 16–1007 Note: Note: Retry Limit (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: 0 If you want to use DLCI, set VPI to 0. Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful call setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. See the ATM UNI Specification, Version 3.1 Cause Code table in the Reference Table appendix of this guide for causes that will prompt a retry as reported by the far end. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 If you want to use DLCI, set VPI to 0. Release 7.0 7-119 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-29. Field Values for the Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Retry Interval Default: 2 (sec) (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The waiting period before attempting to establish the SPVC after one call attempt has failed. Remote NSAP Addr (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote frame relay or ATM interface in hexadecimal notation. [Oper Status] Default: Other None of the types specified below. (display only) EstablishConnection is not operational, but call attempts are ongomentInProgress ing. Connected Connection is currently operational. RetriesExhausted Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. NoAddressSupplied No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. LowerLayerDown PVC endpoint is out of service. WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingForRetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. [Last Rls Diag] (display only) Last release diagnosis. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. [Retry Failure Count] Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Multiservice Media Gateway will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (display only) [Last Rls Cause] Default: 0 (display only) Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.1 specification for more information. End Configuring Traffic Parameters To configure the traffic parameters for this connection, perform the steps in the following procedure. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-120 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Steps to Configure Traffic Parameters Begin 1 On the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window (see Figure 7-47), select Configure Traffic Parameters and press Enter. The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Traffic Parameters window is displayed (see Figure 7-50). Figure 7-50. Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Traffic Parameters Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Add This Connection Function Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection and Deletes the connection having the values Return currently displayed on the window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Screen SPVC Connection Table window. Field Descriptions 2 Select the values for the traffic parameter fields on this window from the values given in Table 7-30. Stimpfle 8-15-01, added Rel 7 info on CIR for STM1/OC3 traffic shaping. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-121 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Note to Writers: Woodard: This table is exclusively for the console, not AQV. Please leave the table anchor tagged as “ModuleGuide.” Table 7-30. Field Values for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Traffic Parameters Window Field Name Values Description Frame Size for Rate Default: 4096 Cal. Measured in bytes. Committed Burst Size Default: 0 Use the default value. Excess Burst Size Default: 45000000 Measured in bits per second. Committed Info Rate Default: 0 Committed information rate is the rate of traffic (measured in bits per second) for a given connection that the system will attempt to provide guaranteed delivery. [Time Interval] Default: 1000 Time, in seconds, since the last reset. (display only) [Peak Cell Rate] Default: 1 Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Default: 1 Sustained cell rate. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Default: 1 Maximum burst size. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. (display only) [Sustained Cell Rate] (display only) [Max Burst Size] (display only) 3 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 4 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window returns, displaying the values you just applied. 5 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2 through 5 for more connections as needed. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-122 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Viewing Connection Statistics To view the statistics for this connection, perform the steps in the following procedure. On the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window (see Figure 7-49), select View Connection Statistics and press Enter. The Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window is displayed. Figure 7-51. Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Reset Odometers Function Resets the Encoded Odometer, Decoded Odometer, In Odometer, and Out Odometer fields to zero. Note: If a call is disconnected, all odometers are reset to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next connection of this type. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window. Display→ Field Descriptions The connection statistics on this window as described in Table 7-31. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-123 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-31. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Statistics Window Field Name Description Slot Slot identifier of the frame relay interface (Interface A). Port Port identifier of the frame relay interface (Interface A). Channel Channel identifier of the frame relay interface (Interface A). DLCI Data link control identifier of the frame relay interface in which the call is configured. VPI Virtual path identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. VCI Virtual channel identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. Cells Encoded Number of cells encoded going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Cells Decoded Number of cells decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Frames Dropped Number of frames dropped for a given DLCI in the A2B direction. This field is only applicable to the input side. Encoded Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into interface side A since the connection was created or statistics were reset. Decoded Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side B since the connection was created or statistics were reset. Time Elapsed Time, in hours, minutes, and seconds, since last reset. Time Since Reset Time, in hours, minutes, and seconds, since the Reset Odometer command was used. Cells Received Number of cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Cells Transmitted Number of cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. In Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since the connection statistics were reset. Out Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since the connection statistics were reset. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Reset command was used. The Reset command on the statistics window resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. Adding VBR-to-ATM SPVC Connections Creating a VBR-toATM Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an VBR-to-ATM SPVC connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-124 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Steps to Create a VBR-to-ATM SPVC Connection Begin To add a VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC connection, proceed as follows. 1 On the SPVC Connection Configuration Menu window, select VBR-toATM VCC(w), and press Enter. The VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is displayed (see Figure 7-52). Figure 7-52. VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table Window Note: Commands At the time of initial installation, the VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is empty. After you have set up connections, this window is displayed all the connections of this type in the system. The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • Find . . . To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields. If the connection exists, it is displayed on the first line of the table. • Add a Connection→ Displays the VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window. • Restart all Unconnected→ Restarts connection establishment procedure for this VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-125 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Field Descriptions The display-only fields on this window provide the following information about all the VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC connections in the PSAX system: Table 7-32. VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table Display Field Description • VBR Side This panel is displayed the slot, port, and chan nel information for all VBR interface sides of the connections. • Remote Port Address This panel is displayed the ATM NSAP address for the remote end of the connection in hexadecimal notation. • Flow This panel is displayed the direction of the data traffic flow for the connections. • Total: 0/0 The first number in this field indicates the number of the connection table entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of connection table entries for this connection type. 2 Select the Add a Connection command and press Enter. The VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 7-53). Figure 7-53. VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-126 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command Function • View Connection Statistics Displays the VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Restart This Connection Restarts connection establishment procedure for all active VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVCs which are not previously set up. • Display Next Connection Displays the next connection of this type in the table. • Add This Connection Adds a connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Delete Connection Deletes the connection having the values currently displayed on the window. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC ConTable nection Table window. Field Descriptions 3 The fields on this window are described in Table 7-33. Table 7-33. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description VBR Interface A The VBR side of the connection that will send and receive signals. ATM Interface B The ATM side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on chassis type Enter the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–30, depending on the module selected Enter the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter port numbers for both sides of the connection. Channel Range: 1–32, depending on the module selected The channel number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Do not change the value 1 in this field. VPI Range: 0–255 Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. VCI Range: 32– 65535 Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. Conn Type ActiveSvc (default), The type of connection. ActiveSvc attempts calls. PassiveSvc accepts calls. (Other fields are not shown.) PassiveSvc PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-127 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-33. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Service Type Values Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Remote NSAP Addr (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Description Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote VBR or ATM interface. Flow Default: Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, Simplex B2A Retry Limit (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: 0 Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful call Range: 0–65535 setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. Retry Interval Default: 2 (sec) (shown Range: 0–3600 when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The waiting period before attempting to establish the SPVC after one call attempt has failed. Peak Rate (cps) When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. 1 (default) If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value for peak rate to 0. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-128 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-33. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description [Oper Status] Default: Other None of the types specified below. (display only) Establishment InProgress Connection is not operational, but call attempts are ongoing. Connected Connection is currently operational. Retries Exhausted Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. NoAddress Supplied No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. LowerLayer Down PVC endpoint is out of service. WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingFor RetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. [Last Rls Diag] (display only) Last release diagnosis. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. [Retry Failure Count] Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Access Concentrator will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (display only) [Last Rls Cause] Default: 0 (display only) Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. 4 To add (apply) the connection configuration, select the Add This Connection command and press Enter. 5 To review this connection, select the Go Back to Connection Table command and press Enter (or press Ctrl+B). The VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Table window is returned, displaying the values you just applied. 6 To add more connections of this type, repeat steps 2–5 for more connections as needed. End Viewing Connection Statistics Viewing Connection Statistics Begin 1 Select the View Connection Statistics command and press Enter. The VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 7-54). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-129 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 7-54. VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Reset Odometers Function Resets the Encoded Odometer, Decoded Odometer, In Odometer, and Out Odometer fields to zero. Note: If a call is disconnected, all odometers will reset to zero. • Continuous Update Updates the values in the fields every second. • Display Stats for Next Connection Displays the statistics for the next connection of this type. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Display→ Connection Table window. Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 7-34. Table 7-34. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Name Description Slot Slot identifier of the ATM interface for either the ATM Interface A panel or the ATM Interface B panel. Port Port identifier of the ATM interface for either the ATM Interface A panel or the ATM Interface B panel. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-130 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections Table 7-34. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Name Description Channel Channel identifier of the ATM interface for either Interface A or Interface B. VPI (ATM Interface panel only) Virtual path identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. VCI (ATM Interface panel only) Virtual channel identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. Cells Encoded Number of cells encoded going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Cells Decoded Number of cells decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Encoded Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into interface side A since the connection was created or statistics were reset. Decoded Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since the connection was created or statistics were reset. Cells Received Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. Cells Transmitted Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. In Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since the connection statistics were reset. Out Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since the connection statistics were reset. Time Elapsed Time, in hours, minutes, and seconds, since last reset. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Reset Odometers command was used. 2 Select the Go Back to Connection Display command and press Enter. 3 To permanently save these connections, press Ctrl+G to redisplay the Console Interface Main Menu window, select Save Configuration, and press Enter to store the values to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 7-131 Chapter 7 Provisioning Connections Using the Console Interface Provisioning SVC Connections PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 7-132 Release 7.0 255-700-171 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Overview of This Chapter This chapter describes how to set up permanent virtual circuit (PVC), switched virtual circuit (SVC), and soft permanent virtual circuit (SPVC) connections in the AQueView™ EMS for service provisioning and how to view statistics data for billing and performance monitoring. Before you provision connections for the modules, you must have first completed the following tasks: • Setting the configuration values for one or more ports on the 2-Port E3 ATM module • Setting the configuration values for the various types of interfaces on the 2-Port E3 ATM module This chapter contains instructions for making the following types of connections: • PVC connections: ~ ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ ATM-to-ATM virtual path connection (VPC) ~ Circuit Emulation-to ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-VBR connection ~ Frame relay-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) connection ~ In-band management ATM PVC connection ~ Bridge-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) ~ VBR-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) • SVC connections: ~ ATM-ATM virtual channel connection VCC (n) ~ ATM IISP CBR connection ~ ATM IISP VBR connection • SPVC connections: ~ Circuit Emulation-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (y) ~ ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (z) ~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (w) PVC Data Flow PVCs consist of connections between ports on the various Access Concentrator I/O modules. When setting up some types of connections, you can set up data traffic to flow in several ways, depending on the type of connection as follows: • Duplex PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-1 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Managing Connections Data flows in two directions between the two connection points (interface side A and interface side B). • Simplex Data flows in only one direction, from side A to side B, or from side B to side A. • Point-to-Multipoint Data flows in only one direction, from one point on side A to several points on side B, or from one point on side B to several points on side A. Before you can provision connections, you must select an interface type value other than Unconfigured in the Interface Type field on the E3 ATM Port and Channel Configuration window. Connection Types by Interface Type For a matrix of connection types by interface types, see the “Connection Types by Interface Types Table” in the Reference Table appendix of this user guide. Managing Connections Within the Connections tab are four tabs that open the following pages: • By default, the Listing page appears when you click the Connections tab (see Figure 8-1). The Listing page displays all existing connections established on the device by default, that you can filter (see ”Filtering Connections in the List” on page 8-9). Connections can be created from this window by clicking the right mouse button to display the connections menu. The number in parentheses on the tab is the number of connections in the list. • The Filter page enables you to sort and view connection types listed on the Listing page by connection type, slot, port, and channel (see ”Filtering Connections in the List” on page 8-9) • The SPVC NSAP Address page enables you to enter new SPVC NSAP addresses and to view a list of existing SPVC NSAP addresses (see ”SPVC NSAP Addresses” on page 8-12) • The AAL2 Trunk page allows you to add AAL2 trunk entries (see ”AAL2 Trunk Configuration” on page 8-13) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Managing Connections Figure 8-1. Buttons Connections Tab (Displaying Listing Page) The buttons in the Listing page have the following functions: Button Function • Find Searches the table and displays a matching text string entered in the Show connections containing: field. • Reset Removes text entered in the Show connections containing: field. Searching for Specific Connection Entries In the Listing and the SPVC NSAP Address pages, you can search for any combination of letters or numbers (a text string), and the page will change its display to show only the entries that contain the text string you enter. For example, the Listing page shown in Figure 8-2 has hundreds of connection entries. It is quicker to search this page based on a text string than to scroll up and down the page looking for a specific entry. Perform the steps in the following procedure to search for entries using a text string. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-3 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Managing Connections Note: This procedure uses the Listing page, but the procedure is the same for the SPVC NSAP Address page (see Figure 8-9). Searching Connection Entries Using a Text String Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears (see Figure 8-2). Figure 8-2. Listing Page (Displaying Multiple Entries) 2 In the Show connections containing: field (at the bottom of the Listing page) or Show table entries containing: field (in the middle of the SPVC NSAP Address page), enter a string of letters and/or numbers that you want to find. (In this example, 19 is used.) 3 Click Find. The page displays the entries that contain the text string you entered (see Figure 8-3). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-4 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Managing Connections Figure 8-3. Listing Page (Displaying Search Results) 4 To perform another search, repeat Step 2 and Step 3 as often as needed. 5 To return the page to its original display, click Reset. End Viewing Connection Details To view the connections for a specific PSAX device, view the Listing page in the Connections tab for that PSAX device. To view the detailed information for a specific connection, double-click the connection in the Connections page. Displaying and You can do either of the following to view the Display Connection window: Updating Connection ~ Click on any entry in the Listing page, right-click the mouse, and Information select Display from the right-click menu ~ Create a connection, and the Display Connection window will appear for the selected connection PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-5 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Managing Connections Up to four tabs may be displayed within the Display Connection window: Primary, Statistics, Backup, and Utilization. Display Connection Tabs Clicking the Primary tab displays the Primary page, which contains the same information as the Create Connection window for the selected connection. Clicking the Statistics tab displays the Statistics page, which contains statistical information for the selected connection. Clicking the Backup tab displays the Backup page, which can be displayed for all PVC and SPVC connection types. You can use the Backup page to establish a backup PVC or SPVC connection. Backup connections can be created at any time after the primary connection has been established. Clicking the Utilization tab displays the Utilization page, which can be displayed for all PVC and SPVC connection types. You can use the Utilization page to calculate and display the average number of cells per second, the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC and for a given time interval (from 20 seconds to 5 minutes). Copying a Connection Configuration The Copy button on the Create Connection window and the Primary page of each Display Connection window enables you to copy an interface configuration to a range of channels. Copying a Connection Configuration to Multiple Interfaces Begin 1 To copy a connection configuration to a range of channels, begin by opening the Create Connection window or Display Connection window with the connection configuration you wish to copy. 2 Click Copy. One of the following Copy Connection Configuration windows appears; the appropriate interface types will appear in the Start At: and Stop At: panels (see Figure 8-4 through Figure 8-7). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Managing Connections Figure 8-4. Copy Connection Configuration Window (ATM) Figure 8-5. Copy Connection Configuration Window (Frame Relay) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-7 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Managing Connections Buttons Figure 8-6. Copy Connection Configuration Window (SPVC Connection Types) Figure 8-7. Copy Connection Configuration Window (GR-303 Connection Type) The buttons in these windows have the following functions: Button • Close Closes this window. • Copy Copies this interface to a range of channels. • Abort Terminates the copy process. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-8 Function Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Filtering Connections in the List 3 Select the range of channels which you wish the connection configuration to be copied in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields 4 Enter values in the VPI, VCI, DLCI, Remote VPI, Remote VCI fields as necessary. Valid ranges are 0–4095 for VPI and Remote VPI, 0-65535 for VCI and Remote VCI, and 16–1007 for DLCI. Note: The VPI and VCI fields appear for ATM interface types. The DLCI fields appear for the frame relay interface types, and the Remote VPI and Remote VCI fields appear for the SPVC connection types. 5 Click Copy. The connection configuration is copied to the range of channels you selected. End Filtering Connections in the List You can determine which connection types appear in the Listing page of the Connections tab (see Figure 8-1). This is accomplished by making selections in the Filter By Connection Type and Filter By Interface panels in the Filter page of the Connections tab (see Figure 8-8). Filtering the Listing Page by Connection Type This section describes how to filter the Listing page in the Connections tab by choosing the types of connections that should be displayed. Perform the steps in the following procedure to filter the Listing page by the types of connections you select in the Filter page. Filtering the Listing Page by Connection Type Begin 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears (see Figure 8-1). 2 Click the Filter tab and the Filter page appears (see Figure 8-8). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-9 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Filtering Connections in the List Figure 8-8. Filter Page The Filter page contains the Connection Type and Filter By Interface panels. Buttons The buttons in this window have the following functions: Button Function • De-select All Removes check marks from all connection types and changes the button label to Select All. • Select All Places check marks in all connection types and changes the button label to De-select All. • Apply Filter Filters the connection types that you checked, or that you selected on the Filter By Interface panel (see “Filtering the Listing Page by PSAX Locations”). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-10 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Filtering Connections in the List 3 Remove the check mark next to any connection type that you do not wish to view in the Listing page. 4 If you want to filter the Listing page further, make selections in the Filter By Interface panel (see “Filtering the Listing Page by PSAX Locations”). 5 When finished selecting all the desired filters, click Apply Filter. Note: Only the connection types you selected will appear in the Listing page. End Filtering the Listing Page by PSAX Locations The Filter By Interface panel in the Filter page lets you select specific locations on the PSAX device by which to filter the list of connections. This panel contains the following user-selectable options: ~ Slot—Allows you to view only connections from a specific module or from all modules. ~ Port—Allows you to view only connections from a specific port or from all ports ~ Channel—Allows you to view only connections from a specific channel or from all channels Perform the steps in the following procedure to filter the Connection List by PSAX hardware. Viewing Connections by PSAX Location Begin 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the Filter tab and the Filter page appears. 3 In the Filter by Interface panel (see Figure 8-8), select the following values: a. A module in the Slot field to remove any connection that does not begin or end at the module from the Connection page. b. A port number in the Port field to remove any connection that does not begin or end at a port with that number from the Connection page. c. A channel number in the Channel field to remove any connection that doesn't begin or end at a port with that channel from the Connection page. 4 If you want to filter the Listing page further, make selections in the Filter By Connection Type panel (see “Filtering the Listing Page by Connection Type”). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-11 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System SPVC NSAP Addresses 5 When finished selecting all the needed filters, click Apply Filter. Note: Only the types of connections you selected will appear in the Listing page. End SPVC NSAP Addresses You can enter new SPVC NSAP addresses and view a list of existing SPVC NSAP addresses on the SPVC NSAP Address page (see Figure 8-9). Figure 8-9. Buttons SPVC NSAP Address Page The buttons on this window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-12 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration Button Function • Find Searches the table and displays a matching text string entered in the Show table entry containing: field. • Reset Removes text entered in the Show table entry containing: field and de-selects any selected entries. • Retrieve from NSAP Searches the entries listed on this page for the database NSAP address entered in the NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Add Address Adds the information you entered in the fields on the bottom right panel to the SPVC NSAP Address page. • Delete Selected Removes the selected entry from the SPVC NSAP Address page. • Update Refreshes the SPVC NSAP Address page manually. For information about using the NSAP address database, see the appropriate PacketStar® AQueView® Element Management System User Guide. AAL2 Trunk Configuration You can add an AAL2 trunk entry using the slot, port, and channel of an I/O module that supports ATM and circuit emulation on the AAL2 Trunk page. Configuring AAL2 Trunking with DSP Processing DSP processing is optional with ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2). You can set up AAL2 groups by configuring the DSP2C Voice Server module with any module providing circuit emulation support (CES). Because the minimum AAL2 trunk transports 50 cells per second, we recommend that at 8 Kbps you multiplex at least 2 channels. A total of 64 trunk groups is permitted. Figure 8-10 shows a representation of AAL2 trunking architecture. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-13 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration Figure 8-10. AAL2 Trunking Architecture Note: AAL2 trunking with DSP parameters cannot be used on an SPVC connection. You can do the following: • Assign up to 128 connections in DSP2A or DSP2B mode in up to 64 trunk groups. Each DSP on the DSP2C Voice Server module can be assigned 4 DS0 connections in DSP2A or DSP2B mode. • Assign up to 224 echo-canceled connections in up to 64 trunk groups. Each DSP on the DSP2C Voice Server module can be assigned 7 DS0 connections in Echo Cancellation mode. To configure the AAL2 groups, complete these tasks: 1. Configure an interface for circuit emulation by completing instructions in the appropriate module user guide for any module supporting circuit emulation service. For a matrix of modules and the interface types they support, see any PacketStar® PSAX module user guide. 2. Select a protocol for the connection on an I/O module that supports ATM. Protocols that support AAL2 trunking are: ~ ATM IISP ~ ATM PNNI 1.0 ~ ATM UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0 3. Complete the procedure “Configuring an AAL2 Trunking Connection with DSP Parameters” in this chapter. 4. On the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection window, complete these steps: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-14 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration a. Assign the slot, port, and channel for the DSP connection you want to multiplex. b. In the same window, select Aal2Std in the SAR Type field. Selecting this value enables you to select connection identifiers (Cids) 8–255 in the AAL2 Cid field on the upper right panel. Assign one CID per connection. Adding an AAL2 Trunk Entry To create a non-multiplexed AAL2 or AAL-1 connection, you need a configured circuit emulation interface. To create a standard AAL2 connection, you need a configured circuit emulation interface and an AAL2 trunk. Perform the steps in the following procedure to add an AAL2 trunk. Steps to Configure an AAL2 Trunk Connection Begin 1 Click the AAL2 Trunk tab in the Connections tab. The AAL2 Trunk page appears, displaying the AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table (see Figure 8-11). If the AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table is empty before you perform Step 2, the AAL2 Trunk Config Entry window will appear with the default values. If you select an existing AAL2 trunk entry before performing Step 2, the AAL2 Trunk Config Entry window will appear as a template, containing the values of the original AAL2 trunk entry. Figure 8-11. AAL2 Trunk Page (Displaying Menu) 2 Right-click the mouse and a menu appears. Select Create. The AAL2 Trunk Config Entry window appears (see Figure 8-12). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-15 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration Figure 8-12. AAL2 Trunk Config Entry Window (ADD) Note: Buttons Upon initial configuration, this window displays “ADD” in its title; upon updating this configuration, this window displays “VIEW” in its title. The buttons in these windows have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Add • Adds this entry to the AAL2 Trunk Configuration table. • Close • Closes this window. 3 Select the values for the fields in this window as described in Table 8-1. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-16 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table 8-1. Field Descriptions for the AAL2 Trunk Config Entry Window Field Name Values Description Slot (Pull-down menu with list of modules present in the PSAX device) Use this field to select the module for which you want to add an AAL2 trunk on the ATM side output. Port (Pull-down menu with list of modules present in the PSAX device) Use this field to select the port on the module indicated on the Slot field to which you want to add an AAL2 trunk on the ATM side output. Channel Range: 1–32 Use this field to select the channel on the module indicated on the Slot field to which you want to add an AAL2 trunk on the ATM side output. VPI Default: 0 User-to-User and Network-to-Network interface types are set on the ATM UNI or PNNI Configuration windows. Use this field to set a virtual path identifier. Enter a value for the ATM output side of the connection. Range: 0–255 (User-to-User interface, output side) 0–4095, (Network-to-Network interface, output side) Note: If using FaxRelayMode on the DSP2C Voice Server Module, the send and receive sides must use the same value. VCI Default: 0 Range: 32–65535; 5–32 (signaling disabled) Use this field to set a virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for the ATM output side of the connection. VI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 VI support must be enabled on the appropriate Interface Configuration window. Use this field to set a virtual interface, providing bandwidth allocation restrictions for the ATM output side. Currently available only on OC-3c 1+1 APS and STM-1 1+1 MSP modules. When the virtual interface is disabled, the default is 0. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-17 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table 8-1. Field Descriptions for the AAL2 Trunk Config Entry Window Field Name Peak Rate (cps) Values Default: 1 Description Use this field to set the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (in cells per second), defining the shortest time period allowed between cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Note: Ensure that the peak cell rate for the connection is correct. The Call Admission Control (CAC) function uses this value to determine whether or not a call can be completed to the subscriber line. Sustained Rate (cps) Default: 1 Use this field to set the sustained cell rate with CLP (cell loss priority) =0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate (PCR) with CLP=0 cells. For VBR traffic, the value you set is the SCR, or the average cell transmission rate (cells per second), for the CLP=0 cells, as allowed by your traffic contract. For CBR traffic, the value you set is the PCR, or the maximum allowed transmission rate (cells per second), for the CLP=0 cells, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are allotting for each interface on the module. Max Burst Size (cells) Default: 1 Use this field to set the maximum burst size, the maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Available Bandwidth (display only) This field presents the total ingress and egress bandwidth available for the trunk. This value is based on line rate, or on what the user sets in the Peak Rate and Sustained Rate fields. Adding CE connections to the trunk decreases the amount of available bandwidth, as indicated in this field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-18 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table 8-1. Field Descriptions for the AAL2 Trunk Config Entry Window Field Name Values Conformance Type Description This field indicates the type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds traffic parameter thresholds. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best-effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucketnotag-0plus10plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, 0plus1 CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. FailCause B Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to always change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells. The system then attempts to send all cells in a “best-effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: None This field presents the AAL2 connection status reason code. (display only) Oam Status Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. End-Seg-Pt Service Type Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. Cbr-1 (default), Use this field to set the Multiservice Media Gateway systemCbr-2, Cbr-3, supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the reference Cbr-4 appendix “Quality of Service Classes for ATM Traffic” in any PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-19 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table 8-1. Field Descriptions for the AAL2 Trunk Config Entry Window Field Name Traffic Flow (display only) Values Description Default: Duplex This field presents the direction of the flow of data traffic in ; SimplexA2B, this connection. PointToMultipoi • Duplex ntA2B, Data flows in two directions between the two connection Simplex B2A points (interface side A and interface side B). Simplex Data flows in only one direction, from side A to side B, or from side B to side A. • Point-to-multipoint Data flows in only one direction, from one point on side A to several points on side B, or from one point on side B to several points on side A. GR303 Support Connection Status Default: Disabled Use this field to disable GR-303 interface support. Enabled This field must be enabled if using AAL2 trunking on a GR303 interface. Use this field to enable GR-303 interface support. Inactive, This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. Active (display only) 4 Click Add. The AAL2 trunk is added to the AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table. 5 Click Close. End Deleting an AAL2 Trunk Entry To delete an AAL2 trunk entry, perform the steps in the following procedure. Deleting an AAL2 Trunk Begin 1 Click the AAL2 Trunk tab in the Connections tab. The AAL2 Trunk page appears, displaying the AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table (see Figure 8-11). 2 Do one of the following (a or b): a. Select the entry that you want to delete in the AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table. Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Select Delete. A confirmation window appears (see Figure 8-13). Proceed to Step 5. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-20 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Creating Connections Figure 8-13. Delete AAL2 Trunk Config Entry Confirmation Window b. Do one of the following: ~ Double-click the entry you want to delete. ~ Click the entry you want to delete, and select Display from the right mouse menu. The VIEW AAL2 Trunk Config Entry window appears. 3 Click Delete. A confirmation window appears (see Figure 8-13). 4 Click Yes. The AAL2 trunk entry is removed from the AAL2 Trunk Configuration Table. Proceed to Step 5. 5 Click Close. 6 In the Provisioning Menu Bar, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration. End Creating Connections This section provides instructions on how to create connections and describes the errors that can occur when you are creating them. If an error occurs while creating a connection, the AQueView system displays an error message. There are many causes for these errors, but the errors that occur the most frequently are described below: • Using an out-of-range VPI, VCI, or DCLI • Selecting an interface that does not support flow settings that are entered • Selecting out-of-range transmission parameters • Attempting to create a connection on an unconfigured interface or an interface that has never been brought into service • Exceeding the maximum bandwidth available for a VBR and CBR connection PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-21 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Using the Right-Click Menu • Attempting to create a connection that already exists • Attempting to use a VCI, VPI, DCLI, or channel that is already allocated elsewhere For more information about these SNMP trap messages, see the appendix “SNMP Trap Messages” in the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide. Note: An interface for the appropriate port and channels must be applied and the interfaces must be brought into service at least once before creating a connection. Note: To create a non-UBR connection type, the committed rates and burst sizes must be adjusted to match a portion of the available bandwidth. Using the Right-Click Menu You can perform various functions in the AQueView system by clicking the right mouse button. This section describes the right-click menu options you can use in the various windows in the AQueView system when creating connections. Connection Provisioning Figure 8-14. Connection Configuration Right-Click Menu Options Table 8-2. Descriptions of the Connection Provisioning Right-Click Menu Options Option Description Display Displays the Display Connection window for the specified connection Delete Eliminates all selected connections. You can select multiple connections to delete simultaneously by holding the Ctrl key while highlighting the connections with the mouse. Create New Makes a new connection on any existing interfaces PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-22 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Context-Sensitive Help When you right-click on a field in a connection configuration window, a description of that field appears (see Figure 8-15): Figure 8-15. Sample of Context-Sensitive Help (As Displayed on a Display Connection Window) Provisioning PVC Connections Adding ATM-to-ATM PVC Connections Creating an ATM-to- Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an ATM-to-ATM PVC ATM VCC Connection connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-23 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Creating an ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-16). Figure 8-16. Create Connection Window 3 On the Side A and Side B panels, select the appropriate slot, port, and channel combinations to indicate the type of connection being created. The type of connection will be displayed in the ATM Connection Type field at the bottom of the window. If the connection is not a valid type of connection, None will be displayed in the ATM Connection Type field. 4 Once the desired connection type appears in the ATM Connection Type field, click Create. The Create ATM-to-ATM_VCC Connection window appears (see Figure 8-17). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-24 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-17. Create ATM-to-ATM_VCC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. 5 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-3. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-25 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-3. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface Side A:ATM_UNI30, ATM_UNI31, ATM_UNI40, IISP_USER, IISP_NETWORK or PNNI1_0 Side A of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface Side B:ATM_UNI30, ATM_UNI31, ATM_UNI40, IISP_USER, IISP_NETWORK or PNNI1_0 Side B of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depend- Select the slot number containing the module for which you ing on chassis type are creating a connection. Select slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–30 Select the port number containing the module for both sides of the connection. The port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Note: Channel Range: 1–32 Select the channel number of the port on the module for both sides of the connection. Note: VPI Range: 0–255 (ATM UNI); 0-4095 (NNI) Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VCI Range: 32–65535 Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VI Range: 0–255 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on theOC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr- Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of sernrt2, vice (QoS) class. See the appendix in the appropriate PacketVbr-nrt1, Star® Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide. Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2, Cbr1 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-26 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-3. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the appendix in the appropriate PacketStar® Multiservice Media Gateway User Guide for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. SAR Type Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucketnotag-0plus10plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to always change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: Null The segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type should correspond to the SAR type of the incoming data stream. Aal5, Aal3-4, Aal2, Aal1 Forward Error Correction Default: None Eighth Rate, Quarter Rate, Half Rate, Auto Hi Q, Auto, Auto Lo Q The values Eighth Rate, Quarter Rate, and Half Rate are a Reed-Solomon encoding rate with a specific error-correction capability. The values Auto Hi Q, Auto, and Auto Lo Q are dynamically changing rate options. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-27 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-3. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Peak Rate(0+1) (cps) Values Default: 1 Description Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. Sustained Cell Rate(0) (cps) Default: 1 Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Cell Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) Default: 1 Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value for peak rate to 0. Traffic Flow Duplex (default), SimplexA2B, Point-to-Multipoint A2B Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. Note: When you select SimplexA2B, the fields in the Traffic Parameters B to A section are not displayed. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-28 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-3. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names OAM Status Values Description Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AID/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. Seg-Pt The PSAX system is used as a single ATM link, or is part of a group of interconnected ATM links that process OAM maintenance cells only. End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. Intermediate-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a network node and an intermediate ATM device that does not terminate the ATM connection. It only generates AIS cells during a local failure. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. Connection Status Intra-Segment-Pt Any connecting point inside a segment flow. Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. (display only) If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-18): Primary, Statistics, Backup, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-3 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-29 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-18. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM PVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons on the Primary page have the following functions: Button Statistics Page Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection youconfigured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-19). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-30 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-19. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_VCC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-31 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Field Descriptions The fields on this window are described in Table 8-4. Table 8-4. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VCC and ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Statistics Page Field Name AIS Received Description Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received. (display only) AIS Transmitted Number of AIS cells transmitted. (display only) RDI Received Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received. (display only) RDI Transmitted Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells transmitted. (display only) Cell Drop Number of cells dropped on incoming side of interface A or B. (display only) Cell Tag Number of cell tagged on incoming side of interface A or B. (display only) Cells Received (display only) Cells Transmitted (display only) FEC Rate Used Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. (ATM-to-ATM VCC only) Displays the forward error correction (FEC) rate being used by the FEC module in the A2B direction (for ATM Interface A panel), or B2A direction (for ATM Interface B panel). This field is dymanic when auto rates are selected. In other cases it will display the rate set by the user. Received Odometer Number of valid cells received since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Received field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Transmitted Odometer Number of valid cells transmitted since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Transmitted field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset. (display only) (displayed on Interface Side A Statistics panel) Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. (display only) Note: The Clear button resets only the odometer fields (labelled (displayed on Interface as Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters Side B Statistics panel) increment for the life of the circuit. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-32 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Polling Statistics Using the Odometer Delta Perform the steps in the following procedure to use the odometer on the Statistics page. Using the Odometer Delta to Poll Statistics Begin 1 Click Odometer. The Odometer Delta window appears (see the figure below). Figure 8-20. Odometer Delta Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Reset Odometer Resets the values in this window to zero. • Display Results Shows the polling results in all the fields on this window. The Odometer Delta window allows you to restart polling in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. 2 To begin polling click Reset Odometer. A message appears (see the figure below). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-33 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-21. Odometer Delta Window (Displaying Message) 3 To stop polling, click Display Results. The resulting odometer values are displayed (see the figure below). Figure 8-22. Odometer Delta Window (Displaying Results) 4 To reset the values in this window to zero, click Reset Odometer. 5 To close the window, click Close. End Backup Page The Backup tab displays the information used to create a backup connection (see Figure 8-23). Creating a backup connection is optional. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-34 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-23. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_VCC (Backup Page) Backup Page Buttons The buttons on the Backup page have the following functions: Button • Create Backup PVC Function Establishes the backup PVC connection you configured. Note: You cannot create a backup PVC connection without selecting an ATM interface type in the Backup ATM Interface panel. Therefore, this button is active when the Slot, Port, and Channel fields correspond to an ATM interface type in the Interface field. Otherwise, the button will be ghosted. • Close Field Descriptions 6 Select the values from the fields as described in Table 8-5. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Closes this window. Release 7.0 8-35 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-5. Field Values for the Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Values Description Slot Listed as available from the PSAX device Port Determined by the num- Select the port number on the module for ber of ports available on which you are creating a connection. the module selected in the Slot field Channel Determined by the num- Select the channel number of the port on ber of channels availthe module for which you are creating a able on the port selected connection. in the Port field Interface AtmUni3_0 (display only) AtmUni3_1 AtmUni4_0 Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. The interface type that is configured on the slot, port, and channel (selected in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields). IispUser IispNetwork CircuitEmulation DbCirEm FrameRelayUni FrameRelayNni Pri_Isdn_Network Pri_Isdn_User HldcPassThrough AtmPnni1-0 OperStatus (display only) InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. AdminStatus InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. (display only) VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The backup connection.virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32-65535 The backup connection virtual channel identifier assigned to the interface VI Default: 0 Backup connection virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Range: 0-255 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-36 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-5. Field Values for the Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Automatic Switchback Values Description Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Current Active PVC Utilization Page None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-24). Figure 8-24. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_VCC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-37 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-38 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding ATM-to-ATM VPC Connections Creating an ATM-to- Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an ATM-to-ATM VPC ATM VPC Connection connection. Creating an ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Begin 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-25). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-39 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-25. Create Connection Window 3 On the Side A and Side B panels, select the desired slot, port, and channel to identify the connection endpoints within the PSAX system. Based on these parameters, the corresponding connection type appears in the ATM Connection Type field at the bottom of the window. If the A-side and B-side parameters do not correspond to a valid type of connection, or if one of the selected channels is unconfigured, None appears in the ATM Connection Type field. 4 Click Create. The Create ATM-to-ATM_VPC Connection window appears (see Figure 8-26). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-40 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-26. Create ATM-to-ATM_VPC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. 5 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-6. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-41 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface Side A:ATM_UNI30, Interface Side A:ATM_UNI31, Interface SideA: IISP_USER, or Interface Side A:IISP_NETWO RK One side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface Side B:ATM_UNI30, Interface Side B:ATM_UNI31, Interface SideB: IISP_USER, or Interface Side B:IISP_NETWO RK The other side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot The slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. (display only) Port The port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. (display only) Note: Channel Enter the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. Enter channel numbers for both sides of the connection. (display only) Note: VPI Range: 0–255 (AtmUNI); 0-4095 (NNI) Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VI Range: 0–255 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2, Cbr1 PSAX system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the Reference Appendix in this guide for more information. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-42 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the Reference Appendix in this guide for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucketnotag-0plus10plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, 0plus1 CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. SAR Type Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: Null The segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type must correspond to the SAR type of the incoming data stream. Aal5, Aal3-4, Aal2, Aal1, PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-43 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names Peak Rate(0+1) (cps) Values Default: 1 cps Description Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. Sustained Cell Rate(0) (cps) Default: 1 cps Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) 1 (default) Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value for maximum burst size to 0. Traffic Flow Default: Duplex Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, When you select SimplexA2B, the fields in the Traffic Point-to-point- Parameters B to A panel do not display. Multi-point A2B PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-44 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-6. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Connection Window Field Names OAM Status Values Description Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-toend connections only. Seg-Pt The PSAX system is used as a single ATM link, or is part of a group of inter-connected ATM links that process OAM maintenance cells only. End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. Intermediate-Pt The PSAX system is used as a network node and an intermediate ATM device that does not terminate the ATM connection. It only generates AIS cells during a local failure. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-toend connections only. Intra-SegmentPt Connection Sta- Inactive, tus Active Any connecting point inside a segment flow. This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. (display only) If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-27): Primary, Statistics, Backup, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-6 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-45 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-27. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM VPC (Primary Page) Statistics Page The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-28). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-46 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-28. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM VPC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. Field Descriptions • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The values for the fields in this window are described in the following table. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-47 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM VCC and ATM-to-ATM VPC Connection Statistics Page Field Name AIS Received Description Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received. (display only) AIS Transmitted Number of AIS cells transmitted. (display only) RDI Received Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received. (display only) RDI Transmitted Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells transmitted. (display only) Cell Drop Number of cells dropped on incoming side of interface A or B. (display only) Cell Tag Number of cell tagged on incoming side of interface A or B. (display only) Cells Received (display only) Cells Transmitted (display only) FEC Rate Used Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. (ATM-to-ATM VCC only) Displays the forward error correction (FEC) rate being used by the FEC module in the A2B direction (for ATM Interface A panel), or B2A direction (for ATM Interface B panel). This field is dymanic when auto rates are selected. In other cases it will display the rate set by the user. Received Odometer Number of valid cells received since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Received field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Transmitted Odometer Number of valid cells transmitted since this counter was reset. (display only) Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the Cells Transmitted field tracks usage for the life of the circuit. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since last reset. (display only) (displayed on Interface Side A Statistics panel) Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. (display only) Note: The Clear button resets only the odometer fields (labelled (displayed on Interface as Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters Side B Statistics panel) increment for the life of the circuit. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-48 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Polling Statistics Using the Odometer Delta Perform the steps in the following procedure to use the odometer on the Statistics page. Using the Odometer Delta to Poll Statistics Begin 1 Click Odometer. The Odometer Delta window appears (see the figure below). Figure 8-29. Odometer Delta Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Reset Odometer Resets the values in this window to zero. • Display Results Shows the polling results in all the fields on this window. The Odometer Delta window allows you to restart polling in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. 2 To begin polling click Reset Odometer. A message appears (see the figure below). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-49 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-30. Odometer Delta Window (Displaying Message) 3 To stop polling, click Display Results. The resulting odometer values are displayed (see the figure below). Figure 8-31. Odometer Delta Window (Displaying Results) 4 To reset the values in this window to zero, click Reset Odometer. 5 To close the window, click Close. End Backup Page The Backup page displays the information used to create a backup connection (see Figure 8-32). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-50 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-32. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM VPC (Backup Page) Backup Page Buttons The buttons on the Backup page have the following functions: Button • Create Backup PVC Function Establishes the backup PVC connection you configured. Note: You cannot create a backup PVC connection without selecting an ATM interface type in the Backup ATM Interface panel. Therefore, this button is active when the Slot, Port, and Channel fields correspond to an ATM interface type in the Interface field. Otherwise, the button will be ghosted. • Close Field Descriptions 6 Select the values for the for fields as described in Table 8-8. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Closes this window. Release 7.0 8-51 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-8. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM_VPC Backup Page Field Name Values Description Slot Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Port Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Channel Determined by the number of channels available on the port selected in the Port field Select the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a connection. Interface AtmUni3-0 (display only) AtmUni3-1 The interface type that is configured on the slot, port, and channel (selected in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields). IispUser IispNetwork CircuitEmulation DbCirEm FrameRelayUni FrameRelayNni Pri_Isdn_Network Pri_Isdn_User HldcPassThrough AtmPnni1-0 OperStatus (display only) InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. AdminStatus (display only) InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The backup connection.virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Backup connection virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Range: 0–255 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-52 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-8. Field Descriptions for the ATM-to-ATM_VPC Backup Page Field Name Automatic Switchback Values Description Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Current Active PVC Utilization Page None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-33). Figure 8-33. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM VPC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-53 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-54 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding a Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection Creating a Bridge-to- This type of connection supports all non-CBR service types. Perform the ATM VCC Connection steps in the following procedure to create a Bridge-to-ATM PVC connection. Creating a Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button in the Listing page and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-34). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-55 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-34. Create Connection Window 3 Select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for each side to select a Bridge and ATM interface. The type of connection appears in the Connection Type field at the bottom of the window. If the connection is not a valid type of connection, None appears in the Connection Type field. 4 Click Create. The Create Bridge_to_ATM_VCC Connection window will appear (see Figure 8-35). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-56 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-35. Create Bridge_to_ATM VCC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. 5 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-9. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-57 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-9. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM_PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface Side A: Bridge The bridge side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface Side B:ATM_UNI30, ATM_UNI31, ATM_UNI40, IISP_USER, IISP_NETWORK or PNNI1_0 The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot The slot number containing the Ethernet module for which you are creating a connection. (display only) Port (display only) 6 Channel The channel number associated with the port number on the Ethernet module for which you are creating a connection. (display only) VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 (AtmUNI); 0–4095 (IISP) VCI Default: 0 Range: 32–65535 VI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 Service Type The virtual port number of the Ethernet module. Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Grf2 Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for the ATM side of the connection. Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS, and the STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, default is 0. Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the section, “Quality of Service Classes for ATM Traffic,” in the appendix. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-58 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-9. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM_PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucketnotag-0plus10plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, 0plus1 CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Peak Cell Rate (cps) Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. 1 (default) Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-59 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-9. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM_PVC Connection Window Field Names Sustained Cell Rate (cps) Values 1 (default) Description Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Cell Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) 1 (default) Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at one time. This value allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the SCR. If the burst is larger than the traffic contract allows, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for that module. Connection Status Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. (display only) OAM Status (default) End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. Unsupp OAM is not in use. If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-36): Primary, Statistics, Backup, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary tab displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-9 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-60 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-36. Display Connection: Bridge-to-ATM PVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons on the Primary page have the following functions: Button Statistics Page Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection youconfigured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-37). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-61 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-37. Display Connection: Bridge-to-ATM PVC Statistics Page Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-62 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Field Descriptions 6 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-10. Table 8-10. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Cells Encoded (display only) Description On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going into interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Cells Decoded (display only) On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Encoded Odome- On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going ter into interface side A since this counter was reset. (display only) On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going into interface side B since this counter was reset. Decoded Odome- On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since this counter was reset. ter (display only) On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side B since this counter was reset. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. (display only) Cells Received (display only) Number of cells received into interface side B since the connection was created. Cells Transmitted Number of cells transmitted out of interface side B since the connection was created. (display only) In Odometer (display only) Out Odometer (display only) Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since this counter was reset. Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side B since this counter was reset. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. (display only) Note: AIS Received Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received. The Clear button on the statistics page resets only the odometer fields (labelled as Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-63 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-10. Field Values for the Bridge-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Page Field Name AIS Transmitted Description Number of AIS cells transmitted. (display only) Cells Dropped Number of cells dropped on incoming side of interface A or B. (display only) Cells Tagged Number of cells tagged on incoming side of interface A or B. (display only) RDI Received Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received. (display only) RDI Transmitted Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells transmitted. (display only) Backup Page The Backup tab displays the information used to create a backup connection (see Figure 8-38). Creating a backup connection is optional. Figure 8-38. Display Connection: Bridge-to-ATM PVC (Backup Page) Backup Page Buttons The buttons on the Backup page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-64 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button Function • Create Backup PVC Establishes the backup PVC connection you configured. Note: You cannot create a backup PVC connection without selecting an ATM interface type in the Backup ATM Interface panel. Therefore, this button is active when the Slot, Port, and Channel fields correspond to an ATM interface type in the Interface field. Otherwise, the button will be ghosted. • Close Field Descriptions Closes this window. 7 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-11. Table 8-11. Field Values for the Display Connection: Bridge-to-ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Slot (display only for Bridge Interface) Port (display only for Bridge Interface) Channel (display only for Bridge Interface) Values Description Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module configured with an ATM interface, for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module configured with an ATM interface, for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the port connumber of chanfigured with an ATM interface, for which you are crenels available on the ating a connection. port selected in the Port field PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-65 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-11. Field Values for the Display Connection: Bridge-to-ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Values Interface AtmUni3_0 (display only) AtmUni3_1 AtmUni4_0 Description The interface type that is configured on the slot, port, and channel (selected in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields). IispUser IispNetwork CircuitEmulation DbCirEm FrameRelayUni FrameRelayNni Pri_Isdn_Network Pri_Isdn_User HldcPassThrough AtmPnni1-0 OperStaus (display only) InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. AdminStatus (display only) InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Range: 0–255 Automatic Switchback Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Current Active PVC None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-66 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Utilization Page The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-39). Figure 8-39. Display Connection: Bridge-to-ATM PVC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Resets all statistics to zero. Release 7.0 8-67 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • Poll Function Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 8 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 9 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 10 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 11 To refresh this window, click Clear. 12 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 13 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-68 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connections This is a CBR type of connection. This type of connection also supports the use of a backup ATM interface with the option of automatic switchback. Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a circuit emulation-toATM VCC PVC connection. Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Connection Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-40). Figure 8-40. Create Connection Window 3 On the Side A and Side B panels, select the desired slot, port, and channel to identify the connection endpoints within the PSAX system. Based on these parameters, the corresponding connection type appears in the Connection Type field at the bottom of the window. If the values PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-69 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections selected in the Side A and Side B panels do not correspond to a valid type of connection, or if one of the selected channels is unconfigured, None appears in the Connection Type field. 4 Click Create. The Create Circuit Emulation_to_ATM Virtual Circuit Connection window appears (see Figure 8-41). Figure 8-41. Create Circuit Emulation_to_ATM VCC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-70 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Field Descriptions 5 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-12. Table 8-12. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface Side A:CIRCUIT_EM Field values in this panel relate to the circuit emulation side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface Side B:ATM_UNI30,AT M_UNI31, ATM_IISP, PNNI10 Field values in this panel relate to the ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot (display only) Variable depending on chassis type The slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Port Range: Variable The port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Range: ATM side: 1 The channel on which you are creating a connection. Range: 0–255 (ATM UNI); 0–4095 (NNI) Enter the virtual path identifier for ATM side of the connection. Range: 32–65535 Enter the virtual channel identifier for the ATM side of the connection. VI/VUNI Default: 0 (displayed on Interface Side B panel only) Range: 0–255 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. This field is currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. AAL2 Cid Default: 0 (display only) Channel (display only) VPI (displayed on Interface Side B panel only) VCI (displayed on Interface Side B panel only) (display only Range: 8–255 per trunk unless SAR type is (0–7 not available; Aal2Std) reserved) Voice Compression None (default) G726-16k G726-24k G726-32k G726-40k G729a-8k PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Enter a channel identifier only if the value Aal2Std is selected in the SAR Type field described below. Otherwise, accept the default value of 0. If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. Instead, select the desired type and rate of voice compression from the list of choices. Release 7.0 8-71 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-12. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Silence Detection Values Disabled (default) Enabled Description If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. Choosing Enabled enables Silence Detection. Echo Cancellation None (default) G.165-nearEnd G.168 If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. Select G165-nearEnd if you want to enable Echo Cancellation on this connection. Tone Detection Coding Translation Disabled (default) If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, use Bypass. Bypass The value Bypass indicates that the fax tones are to be recognized and data sent by fax is not to be processed by compression and echo cancellation. FaxRelay The fax calling tone is detected. FxRlyMdmBypass Fax Relay Modem Bypass. Fax Relay is detected and modem is done in bypass mode. None (default If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. The other values indicate the desired type of pulse code modulation (PCM) translation. You must specify one of these PCM types to enable data traffic processing through the DSP2x Voice Server modules. MuLaw2muLaw ALaw2aLaw MuLaw2aLaw ALaw2MuLaw PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-72 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-12. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. (displayed on the Traffic Parameters B to A panel only) Note: See the Reference Tables appendix in this guide for ATM Traffic Descriptors for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Traffic Flow Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucket-notag0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucket-notag0plus1-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-notag0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Duplex (default), SimplexA2B, SimplexB2A PointToMulti-pointA2B PointToMulti-pointB2A Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Note: The values change on either side of the connection window as you scroll through this field. Release 7.0 8-73 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-12. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Indicates the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type of the incoming data stream. SAR Type Aal1 (default) AAL1 Aal2Std AAL2 Standard. Note: Choose this type for AAL2 trunking. Enter the associated channel identifier in the AAL2 field in the upper right panel. Non-Mux-Aal2 Non-multiplexed AAL2 (Lucent proprietary) Service Type Ubr (default,) Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Cbr-4, Cbr-3, Cbr-2, Cbr-1 PSAX system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the Reference Tables appendix in this guide for a detailed description of the values for this field. OAM Status Unsupp (default) OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. End-Seg-Pt The PSAX system is used as both a termination point and a segment point for ATM traffic. Connection Status Inactive Active (display only) Active: The connection is passing traffic Inactive: The connection is not passing traffic. Connection Failure Cause A Default: None This field presents the AAL2 status reason code for the A side of the connection. Default: None This field presents the AAL2 status reason code for the B side of the connection. (display only) Connection Failure Cause b (display only) If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-42): Primary, Statistics, Backup, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-74 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-12 for field descriptions. Figure 8-42. Display Connection: Circuit_Emulation-to-ATM_VCC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons on the Primary page have the following functions: Button Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection youconfigured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-75 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Statistics Page The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-43). Figure 8-43. Display Connection: Circuit_Emulation-to-ATM_VCC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-76 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Field Descriptions Button Function • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The values for the fields on this window are given in Table 8-13. Table 8-13. Field Values for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Page Field Names Values Description Cells Encoded 0.0000 e0 (default) The total number of encoded (transmitted) user cells going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). Cells Decoded 0.0000 e0 (default) The total number of decoded (received) user cells going out of interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). Encoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter (default) The total number of encoded user cells going into interface side B since the connection was created. Decoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter (default) The total number of decoded user cells decoded going out of interface side B since the connection was created. Time Elasped Total time elasped for OAM statistics collection since the circuit was established. Cells Received 6.5000 e1 (default) The total number of received OAM cells going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in the Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created). Cells Transmitted 6.5000 e1 (default) The total number of transmitted OAM cells going out of interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created.) Received Odometer 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells received since odometer was last reset. Transmitted Odometer 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells transmitted since odometer was last reset. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. AIS Received Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received. AIS Transmitted Number of AIS cells transmitted. RDI Received Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-77 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-13. Field Values for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC Statistics Page Field Names Values Description RDI Transmitted Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells transmitted. Cell Drop Number of cells dropped on incoming side of interface A or B. Cell Tag Number of cells tagged on incoming side of interface A or B. Backup Page The Backup page displays the information used to create the connection (see Figure 8-44). Figure 8-44. Display Connection: Circuit_Emulation-to-ATM_VCC (Backup Page) Backup Page Buttons The buttons on the Backup page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-78 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • Create Backup PVC Function Establishes the backup PVC connection you configured. Note: You cannot create a backup PVC connection without selecting an ATM interface type in the Backup ATM Interface panel. Therefore, this button is active when the Slot, Port, and Channel fields correspond to an ATM interface type in the Interface field. Otherwise, the button will be ghosted. • Close Field Descriptions Closes this window. 6 Select the values for the for fields as described in Table 8-14. Table 8-14. Field Descriptions for the Display Connection: Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Backup Page Field Name Slot (display only for Circuit Emulation Interface) Port (display only for Circuit Emulation Interface) Channel Values Description Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. (display only for Circuit Emulation Interface) Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the number of channels module for which you are creating a connecavailable on the port tion. selected in the Port field Interface CircuitEmulation The interface type that is configured on the slot, port, and channel (selected in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields). InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. (display only) OperStatus (display only) AdminStatus (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-79 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-14. Field Descriptions for the Display Connection: Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC Backup Page Field Name Values Description VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this backup interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this backup interface. VI Default: 0 Backup virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on theOC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. Range: 0-255 Automatic Switchback Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Current Active PVC None Utilization Page Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-45). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-80 Indicates that the connection is inactive. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-45. Display Connection: Circuit_Emulation-to-ATM_VCC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-81 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Descriptions • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-82 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, in the Provisioning Menu Bar, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding a Frame Relay-to-ATM Connection Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a frame relay-to-ATM VCC connection. Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM Virtual Circuit Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-46). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-83 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-46. Create Connection Window 3 On the Side A and Side B panels, select the desired slot, port, and channel to identify the connection endpoints within the PSAX system. Based on these parameters, the corresponding connection type appears in the Connection Type field at the bottom of the window. If the A-side and B-side parameters do not correspond to a valid type of connection, or if one of the selected channels is unconfigured, None appears in the Connection Type field. 4 Click Create. The Create Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC Connection window appears (see Figure 8-47). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-84 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-47. Create Frame_Relay_to_ATM_VCC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. 5 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values in Table 8-15. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-85 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-15. Field Descriptions for the Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface Side A:FR_UNI or FR_NNI The frame relay side of the connection. Interface Side B:ATM_UNI30, ATM_UNI31, ATM_UNI40, IISP_USER, IISP_NETWORK The ATM side of the connection. Slot Number of slots Select the slot number containing the module for varies with both sides of the connection. chassis type Port Select the port number containing the module for both sides of the connection. Channel The channel on which you are creating a connection. (display only) DLCI Range: 16–1007 Data link connection identifier. DLCI is used when the remote end point is frame relay. VPI Range: 0–225 (ATM UNI); 0-4095 (NNI) VCI Range: 0–65535 Virtual channel identifier. VI Range: 0–255 Interworking Func- Default: tion Frf8-Transl; Frf8-Pass; Frf5 Virtual path identifier. Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC3c APS, and STM-1 MSP modules. . FRF.8 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. FRF.5 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. Frame Size (bytes) Default: 4096 Measured in bytes. Committed Burst Size (bits/second) Default: 0 Use the default value. Excess Burst Size (bits) Default: 45000000 Measured in bits per second. Committed Info Rate Default: 0 Committed information rate is the rate of traffic (measured in bits per second) for a given connection that the system will attempt to provide guaranteed delivery. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-86 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-15. Field Descriptions for the Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC Connection Window Field Names Values Time Interval (mil- Default: 1000 liseconds) Description Time, in milliseconds, since the last reset. (display only) Peak Cell Rate Default: 1 Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Sustained Cell Rate Default: 1 Sustained cell rate. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. (display only) (display only) Max Burst Size Default: 1 Maximum burst size. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.0 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Duplex, SimplexA2B, SimplexB2A Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. (display only) Traffic Flow Note: Only Duplex and Simplex are applicable for the 1-Port DS3 IMA module. Note: When you select SimplexA2B and Configure Traffic Parameters, only fields in the Traffic Parameters In side are displayed; when you select SimplexB2A and Configure Traffic Parameters, only fields in the Traffic Parameters Out side are displayed. Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Multiservice Media Gateway-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-87 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-15. Field Descriptions for the Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC Connection Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. See the appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucketnotag-0plus10plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucketnotag-0plus1-0 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buck0plus1-0 ets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. OAM Status Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Unsupp (default) OAM is not in use. End-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for endto-end connections only. End-Seg-Pt Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-88 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-15. Field Descriptions for the Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC Connection Window Field Names Connection Status Values Inactive, Active (display only) Description This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. Connection Failure None (default) Cause A Physical, LMI, (display only) DLCI Frame Relay connection failure cause. Connection Failure None (default) Cause B Physical, LMI, (display only) DLCI Frame Relay connection failure cause. If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-48): Primary, Statistics, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-15 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-89 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-48. Display Connection: Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons on the Primary page have the following functions: Button Statistics Page Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection youconfigured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-49). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-90 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-49. Display Connection: Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC Window (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. Release 7.0 8-91 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The values for the fields in this page are described in Table 8-16. Table 8-16. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Description Cells Encoded Number of cells encoded going into Frame Relay Interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Cells Decoded Number of cells decoded going out of Frame Relay Interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Frames Dropped Number of frames going out of Frame Relay Interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Encoded Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into Frame Relay Interface side A since this counter was reset. Decoded Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of Frame Relay Interface side A since this counter was reset. AAL5 Error Frames Number of AAL5 errored frames which are not dropped due to UPC in A2B direction. Only applicable to input side. Frames Tagged Number of frames tagged due to UPC in A2B direction. Only applicable to input side. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear or Reset Statistics command was used. Note: The Clear button on the statistics page resets only the odometer fields and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. AIS Rx/Tx Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received and transmitted. RDI Rx/Tx Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received and transmitted. cell Drop/Tag Number of cells dropped and tagged on incoming side of ATM interface B. Cells Received Number of cells Received into ATM Interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-92 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-16. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Description Cells Transmitted Number of cells Transmitted out of ATM Interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. In Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into ATM Interface side B since this counter was last reset. Out Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of ATM Interface side B since ince this counter was last reset. Backup Page The Backup page displays the information used to create a backup connection (see Figure 8-50). Creating a backup connection is optional. Figure 8-50. Display Connection: Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC (Backup Page) Backup Page Buttons The buttons on the Backup page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-93 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • Create Backup PVC Function Establishes the backup PVC connection you configured. Note: You cannot create a backup PVC connection without selecting an ATM interface type in the Backup ATM Interface panel. Therefore, this button is active when the Slot, Port, and Channel fields correspond to an ATM interface type in the Interface field. Otherwise, the button will be ghosted. • Close Field Descriptions Closes this window. 6 Select the values from the fields on this page as described in Table 8-17. Table 8-17. Field Descriptions for the Display Connection: Frame Relay_to_ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Slot (display only for Frame Relay Interface) Port (display only for Frame Relay Interface) Channel (display only for Frame Relay Interface) Values Listed as available Select the slot containing the module for which from the PSAX device you are creating a backup connection. Determined by the Select the port number on the module for number of ports avail- which you are creating a backup connection. able on the module selected in the Slot field Determined by the number of channels available on the port selected in the Port field PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-94 Description Select the channel number of the port on the module for which you are creating a backup connection. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-17. Field Descriptions for the Display Connection: Frame Relay_to_ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Values Interface AtmUni3-0 (display only) AtmUni3-1 IispUser Description The interface type that is configured on the slot, port, and channel (selected in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields). IispNetwork CircuitEmulation DbCirEm FrameRelayUni FrameRelayNni Pri_Isdn_Network Pri_Isdn_User HldcPassThrough AtmPnni1-0 OperStatus (display only) InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. AdminStatus InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. (display only) Range: 0–255 Automatic Switchback Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Current Active PVC Utilization Page None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-95 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-51. Display Connection: Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-96 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-97 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding an In-Band Management ATM PVC Connection You can create an in-band management PVC connection between a configured in-band management address and any module that supports ATM interfaces. This connection supports the UBR and VBR-express service types. The in-band management PVC connection is configured in two steps: 1. Disabling SVC connections in the Site-Specific tab within the Provisioning window 2. Creating the in-band management PVC connection from the Connections tab within the Provisioning window Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an in-Band management-to-ATM VCC connection. Disabling an SVC Connection Disabling SVC Connections Begin 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Site-Specific tab. The Site-Specific page appears (see Figure 8-52). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-98 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-52. Site Specific Page (Displaying Site-Specific Page) 2 Click the In-Band Mgmt tab. The In-Band Mgmt page appears (see Figure 8-53). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-99 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-53. In-Band Mgmt Page 3 In the In-Band Mgmt page, enter the primary in-band management IP address and IP mask for the PSAX device. Note: This address must be on a different subnet from the subnet that is assigned to the Ethernet interface for the management host. 4 In the SVC Connections field, select Disabled. 5 Click Apply. 6 Save the configuration by clicking Device > Save PSAX Configuration. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-100 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Creating an In-Bandto-ATM Connection Creating an In-Band-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-54). Figure 8-54. Create Connection Window 3 On the Side A panel in the Slot field, select In-Band Management. 4 Select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for a module that is configured with one of the following interfaces on the Side B panel: ~ ATM UNI 3.0 ~ ATM UNI 3.1 ~ ATM IISP ~ ATM PNNI The interface name appears in the Interface field on the Side B panel. In-Band_Management_IP_PVC appears in the Connection Type field. 5 Click Create. The Create In-Band_to_ATM IP PVC Connection window appears (see Figure 8-55). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-101 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-55. In-Band_Management_IP_PVC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. 6 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values in Table 8-18. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-102 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-18. Field Descriptions for the In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration Window Field Name Values Destination IP Varies Address, and Subnet IP Mask Description Enter the IP address and the IP mask for one of the following depending on your in-band management scheme: • The in-band IP address of the management workstation. This IP address must be different from the one for the management workstation’s same network. • The in-band IP address of the "router" Access Concentrator system. This IP address must be different from the one for the Ethernet interface on the CPU. • The in-band IP address of the managed Access Concentrator system. This IP address must be different from the one for the Ethernet interface on the CPU. Slot, Port, and Channel, VPI, VCI and VI Varies The values for slot, port, channel, VPI, VCI, and VI for the interface in the Multiservice Media Gateway chassis to which you are connecting. Ubr (default) Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (Qos) class. (display only) Service Type Vbr-express PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-103 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-18. Field Descriptions for the In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration Window Field Name Values Description Note: The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds.See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Cnfrm Type Best-effort (default) This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucketnotag-0plus10plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, 0plus1 CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Peak Cell Rate (cps) Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: 1 Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-104 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-18. Field Descriptions for the In-Band ATM PVC Connection Configuration Window Field Name Sustained Cell Rate (cps) Values Default: 1 Description Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Cell Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) Default: 1 Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and amount of bandwith you are setting up for each interface on the module. Connection Status Inactive (default) This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. (display only) Active Connection None (default) Failure Cause A Physical (display only) General connection failure cause. Connection None (default) Failure Cause B Physical (display only) General connection failure cause. If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-56): Primary and Backup (if a backup connection was established). If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-18 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-105 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-56. Display Connection: In-Band_Management_IP_PVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons on the Primary page have the following functions: Button Backup Page Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection youconfigured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. The Backup page displays the information used to create a backup connection (see Figure 8-57). Creating a backup connection is optional. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-106 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-57. Display Connection: In-Band Management IP PVC (Backup Page) Backup Page Buttons The buttons on the Backup page have the following functions: Button • Create Backup PVC Function Establishes the backup PVC connection you configured. Note: You cannot create a backup PVC connection without selecting an ATM interface type in the Backup ATM Interface panel. Therefore, this button is active when the Slot, Port, and Channel fields correspond to an ATM interface type in the Interface field. Otherwise, the button will be ghosted. • Close Field Descriptions 7 Select the values from the fields as described in Table 8-19. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Closes this window. Release 7.0 8-107 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-19. Field Values for the Display Connection: In-Band_Management_IP_PVC Backup Page Field Name Slot (display only) Port (display only) Channel (display only) Values Description Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a backup connection. Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a backup connection. Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the module number of channels for which you are creating a backup connection. available on the port selected in the Port field Interface AtmUni3_0 (display only) AtmUni3_1 AtmUni4_0 The interface type that is configured on the slot, port, and channel (selected in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields). IispUser IispNetwork CircuitEmulation DbCirEm FrameRelayUni FrameRelayNni Pri_Isdn_Network Pri_Isdn_User HldcPassThrough AtmPnni1-0 OperStatus (display only) InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. AdminStatus InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC3c APS, and STM-1 MSP modules. (display only) Range: 0-255 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-108 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-19. Field Values for the Display Connection: In-Band_Management_IP_PVC Backup Page Field Name Automatic Switchback Values Description Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Current Active PVC None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). 8 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding a VBR-to-ATM VCC Connection Creating a VBR-toPerform the steps in the following procedure to create a VBR-to-ATM PVC ATM VCC Connection connection. Creating a VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window is displayed (see Figure 8-58). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-109 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-58. Create Connection Window 3 Select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for a module that is configured with one of the following interfaces for Side A: ~ HDLC Passthrough ~ Terminal Emulation The interface name is displayed at the bottom. 4 Select a slot, port, and channel on Side B that is configured with an ATM interface (ATM UNI, ATM IISP, or ATM PNNI). 5 Once the desired connection type is displayed in the Connection Type field, click Create to begin creating the connection. The Create VBR_to_ATM VCC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 8-59). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-110 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-59. Create VBR_to_ATM VCC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. 6 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-20. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-111 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-20. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM _VCC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface SideA: HDLC_PASS THRU The VBR side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface SideB: ATM_UNI30, ATM_UNI31, ATM_UNI40, IISP_USER, IISP_NETWORK, ATMPNNI1_0 The ATM side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Number of slots varies with chassis type Port Select the slot number containing the module for both sides of the connection. Select the port number containing the module for both sides of the connection. Channel Range: 1–32 Select the channel number on which you are creating a connection. VPI Range: 0–225 (ATM UNI); 0–4095 (NNI) Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VCI Range: 32– 65535 Virtual channel identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. VI 0 (default) Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. When disabled, default is 0. Range: 0–255 Peak Cell Rate (cps) Default: 1 Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-112 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-20. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM _VCC Connection Window Field Names Sustained Cell Rate (cps) Values Default: 1 Description Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Cell Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) 1 (default) Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-113 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-20. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM _VCC Connection Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. (displayed on the Traffic Parameters B to A panel) Note: See the “ATM Traffic Descriptors" appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucket-notag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no 0plus1 tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucket-notag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no 0plus1-0plus1 tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-notag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no 0plus1 tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Traffic Flow Service Type Two-bucket-tag0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Default: Duplex, SimplexA2B, SimplexB2A Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. Ubr (default), Vbrnrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express When you select SimplexA2B or SimplexB2A, the fields in the Traffic Parameters B to A or the Traffic Parameters A to B section, respectively, are not displayed. Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the section, “Quality of Service Classes for ATM Traffic,” in an appendix in the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways User Guide for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-114 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-20. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM _VCC Connection Window Field Names OAM Status Values Description Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The PSAX system is used as a termination point for ATM traffic, and will process AIS/RDI cells. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-toend connections only. End-Seg-Pt Connection Sta- Default: Inactive, tus Active (display only) Has the characteristics of both an end point and a segment point. This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. Connection Fail- None (default) ure Cause A Physical (display only) General connection failure cause. Connection Fail- None (default) ure Cause B Physical (display only) General connection failure cause. If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-60): Primary, Statistics, Backup, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-20 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-115 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-60. Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Window (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons on the Primary page have the following functions: Button Statistics Page Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection youconfigured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-61). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-116 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-61. Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Window (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. Release 7.0 8-117 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The fields on this window are described in Table 8-21: Table 8-21. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC/SPVC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Description Interface A Statistics Cells Encoded (display only) Cells Decoded (display only) Encoded Odometer (display only) Number of cells encoded going into interface side Aor B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Number of cells decoded going out of interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going into interface side A since this counter was reset. On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going into interface side B since this counter was reset. Decoded Odometer (display only) On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since this counter was reset. On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side B since this counter was reset. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. (display only) Cells Received (display only) Cells Transmited (display only) In Odometer (display only) Out Odometer Number of cells encoded going into interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Number of cells decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since the connection statistics were reset. (display only) Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since the connection statistics were reset. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. (display only) Note: The Clear button on the statistics page resets only the odometer fields (labelled as Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-118 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-21. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC/SPVC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Description AIS Received Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received. (display only) AIS Transmitted Number of AIS cells transmitted. (display only) RDI Received Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received. (display only) RDI Transmitted Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells transmitted. (display only) Interface B Statistics Cells Dropped Number of cells dropped. (display only) Cells Tagged Number of cells tagged. (display only) Backup Page The Backup page displays the information used to create a backup connection (see Figure 8-62). Creating a backup connection is optional. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-119 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-62. Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Window (Backup Page) Backup Page Buttons The buttons on the Backup page have the following functions: Button • Create Backup PVC Function Establishes the backup PVC connection you configured. Note: You cannot create a backup PVC connection without selecting an ATM interface type in the Backup ATM Interface panel. Therefore, this button is active when the Slot, Port, and Channel fields correspond to an ATM interface type in the Interface field. Otherwise, the button will be ghosted. • Close Field Descriptions 7 Select the values from the fields as described in Table 8-22. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-120 Closes this window. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-22. Field Descriptions for the Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Slot (display only for VBR Interface) Port (display only for VBR Interface) Channel Values Description Listed as available from the PSAX device Select the slot containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Determined by the number of ports available on the module selected in the Slot field Select the port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. (display only for VBR Interface) Determined by the Select the channel number of the port on the number of channels module for which you are creating a connection. available on the port selected in the Port field Interface AtmUni3_0 (display only) AtmUni3_1 AtmUni4_0 The interface type that is configured on the slot, port, and channel (selected in the Slot, Port, and Channel fields). IispUser IispNetwork CircuitEmulation DbCirEm FrameRelayUni FrameRelayNni Pri_Isdn_Network Pri_Isdn_User HldcPassThrough AtmPnni1-0 OperStatus (display only) InService Indicates that the interface is operational. OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational. AdminStatus InService Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. VPI Default: 0 Range: 0–255 The virtual path identifier assigned to this interface. VCI Default: 32 Range: 32–4000 The virtual channel identifier assigned to this interface. VI Default: 0 Virtual interface, which provides bandwidth allocation restrictions. Currently available only on the OC-3c APS and STM-1 MSP modules. (display only) Range: 0-255 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-121 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-22. Field Descriptions for the Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Backup Page Field Name Automatic Switchback Values Description Yes (default) CPU monitors primary connection. If primary connection becomes available, backup will switch back connection to primary. No Not currently supported. Once active, the backup connection will not switch back to primary connection automatically if primary becomes available. Current Active PVC Utilization Page None Indicates that the connection is inactive. Primary Indicates that the primary connection is active (carrying user traffic). Backup Indicates that the backup connection is active (carrying user traffic). The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-63). Figure 8-63. Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Window (Utilization Page) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-122 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-123 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 8 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 9 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 10 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 11 To refresh this window, click Clear. 12 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 13 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding a VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Creating a VBR-toVBR VCC Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a VBR-to-VBR VCC connection. Creating a VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-64). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-124 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-64. Create Connection Window 3 Select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for a module that is configured with one of the following interfaces on the Side A panel: ~ HDLC Passthrough interface ~ Terminal Emulation The interface name appears at the bottom. 4 Select the appropriate slot, port, and channel on the Side B panel. Note: For a VBR-to-VBR connection, the same interface type must be used for both sides of the connection. 5 Once the desired connection type appears in the Connection Type field, click Create to begin creating the connection. The Create VBR-to-VBR Connection window appears (see Figure 8-65). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-125 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-65. Create VBR-to-VBR Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Field Descriptions Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to a range of interfaces. 6 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values in Table 8-23. Table 8-23. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface SideA: HDLC_ PASSTHRU Side A of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface SideB: HDLC_ PASSTHRU Side B of the connection that will send and receive signals. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-126 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-23. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Slot The slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. (display only) Port The port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. (display only) Channel 1 The channel number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Default: 1 Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. (display only) Peak Cell Rate (cps) Description When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. Sustained Cell Rate (cps) Default: 1 Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. Max Burst Size (cells) 1 (default) Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-127 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-23. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. (displayed on the Traffic Parameters B to A panel only) Note: See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucketnotag-0plus10plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucketnotag-0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buck0plus1 ets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Traffic Flow Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells during congestion, and then attempt to send all cells in a "best effort" fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. Duplex (default) SimplexA2B Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. Note: When you select SimplexA2B, the fields in the Traffic Parameters B to A panel do not display. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-128 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Table 8-23. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR PVC Connection Window Field Names Service Type Values Ubr (default) Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Connection Status (display only) Inactive, Active Description Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the section, “Quality of Service Classes for ATM Traffic,” in the appendix. This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-66): Primary, Statistics, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-23 for field descriptions. Figure 8-66. Display Connection: VBR-to-VBR PVC (Primary Page) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-129 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Primary Page Buttons The buttons on the Primary page have the following functions: Button Statistics Page Function • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection youconfigured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. The Statistics page (see Figure 8-67) displays the statistics for this connection. Figure 8-67. Display Connection: VBR-to-VBR PVC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-130 Function Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button Function Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. • Poll Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. Field Descriptions • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. View the values for the fields as described in Table 8-24. Table 8-24. Field Values for the VBR-to-VBR VCC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Cells Encoded Description Number of cells encoded going in interface side A or B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created). (display only) Cells Decoded Number of cells decoded going out interface side A or B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (i.e., since the circuit was created). (display only) Encoded Odometer (display only) Decoded Odometer Total number of cells encoded going in interface side A or B since the connection was created. (display only) Total number of cells decoded going out interface side A or B since the connection was created. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. (display only) Time Since Reset (display only) Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. Note: The Clear button on the statistics page resets only the odometer fields (labelled as Encoded or Decoded Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. Utilization Page The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-68). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-131 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Figure 8-68. Display Connection: VBR-to-VBR PVC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-132 Resets all statistics to zero. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning PVC Connections Button • Poll Function Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-133 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Provisioning SVC Connections Viewing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connections The SVC connections that display on the ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Table window change dynamically as they are created and then torn down. Use the following steps to display SVC connections, starting at the Connection Configuration Menu window. In the Connection Configuration Menu window, select ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC and press Enter. The ATM-to-ATM VCC/VPC SVC/SVP Table window is displayed (see Figure 8-69). Figure 8-69. ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Table Window PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-134 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Commands The commands on this window have the following functions: Command • Find Function To find a particular connection, enter values in the Slot, Port, Chnl, VPI, and VCI fields If the connection exists, it is displayed on the first line of the table. • Go Back to Connection Redisplays the Connection Configuration Menu window. Menu→ To refresh the display of SVCs, select the Go Back to Connection Menu command, and then select the ATM-to-ATM VCC option again. Enabling SVC Connections You cannot create SVC connections in the same manner as creating PVC and SPVC connections in the AQueView EMS. However, you can view SVC connections in the Listing page of the Connections tab. The SVC connections that display in the Listing page change dynamically as they are created and then torn down. To display SVC connections in the Listing page, they must be enabled by configuring IISP or PNNI links on the PSAX system. To enable SVC connections, you must first set up a PNNI link or an IISP link. Setting Up a PNNI Link To set up a PNNI link, do the following: 1. Configure a PNNI node and bring it into service. Be sure that Up is displayed in the Admin Status field. For instructions on PNNI node configuration, see the appropriate AQueView® Element Management System User Guide. 2. Configure a channel on an I/O module with the ATM PNNI interface, and bring the interface into service. For instructions on ATM PNNI interface configuration, see the appropriate PacketStar® Module User Guide. After enabling this PNNI link, ATM-to-ATM SVC connections can be dynamically created by the PSAX system. If you enable a PNNI link and a IISP link, the PSAX system will use the PNNI link first to create a SVC. If the PNNI link goes down, the IISP link will be used to sustain the SVC. Setting Up an IISP Link To set up a IISP link, do the following: 1. Configure a channel on an I/O module with the ATM IISP User or ATM IISP Network interface, and bring the interface into service. For instructions on ATM IISP interface configuration, see the appropriate PacketStar® Module User Guide. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-135 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections 2. Add an entry to the IISP VBR routing table or the IISP CBR routing table. For instructions on adding IISP VBR and IISP CBR routing entries, see the appropriate PacketStar® Module User Guide, or the appropriate AQueView® Element Management System User Guide. After enabling this IISP link, ATM-to-ATM SVC connections can be dynamically created by the PSAX system. If you enable a PNNI link and a IISP link, the PSAX system will use the PNNI link first to create a SVC. If the PNNI link goes down, the IISP link will be used to sustain the SVC. Editing ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connection Entries Perform the steps in the following procedure to view or edit an ATM-to-ATM SVC connection. Viewing or Editing an Viewing or Editing an ATM-to-ATM VCC SVC Connection ATM-to-ATM SVC Begin Connection 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears (see Figure 8-70). Figure 8-70. Listing Page (ATM-to-ATM SVC Connections Selected) 2 Select an SVC entry in the Listing page and click the right mouse button. 3 Click Display in the menu that appears (see Figure 8-71). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-136 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 8-71. Listing Page (Menu Displayed) The Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-72): Primary, Statistics, and Utilization. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection (see Figure 8-72). Figure 8-72. Display Connection:ATM-to-ATM SVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The button on the Primary page has the following function: Button • Close PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Function Closes this window. Release 7.0 8-137 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Field Descriptions The values for the fields in this window are described in Table 8-25. Table 8-25. Field Values for the Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_SVC Window Field Names Values Description Slot Varies depending on chassis type Select the slot number containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Select slot numbers for both sides of the connection. Port Range: 1–30 The port number on the modules for which this connection was created. Range: 1–32 The channel number of the port on the module for which this connection was created. 0 (default) Virtual path identifier. Enter a value for both sides of the connection. (display only) Channel (display only) VPI Range: 0–4095 Service Type Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Gfr-1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2, Cbr1, Gfr-2 Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the appendix in the appropriate PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide for a detailed description of the values for this field. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-138 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Table 8-25. Field Values for the Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_SVC Window Field Names Values Cnfrm Type Description The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control, determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Note: See the section, “ATM Traffic Descriptors,” in the Reference Appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. Default: Best-effort This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. One-bucket-notag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tag0plus1 ging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). Two-bucket-notag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no 0plus1-0plus1 tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-notag- This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no 0plus1 tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. Two-bucket-tag0plus1 This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and tagging for CLP=0 cells (high priority) in bucket 2. Best-effort-tag This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to always change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. SAR Type Aal5 (default) The segmentation and reassembly (SAR) type should correAal3/4, Aal2, Aal1, spond to the SAR type of the incoming data stream. Null Forward Error Correction Default: None Eighth Rate, Quarter Rate, Half Rate, Auto Hi Q, Auto, Auto Lo Q The values Eighth Rate, Quarter Rate, and Half Rate are a Reed-Solomon encoding rate with a specific error-correction capability. The values Auto Hi Q, Auto, and Auto Lo Q are dynamically changing rate options. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-139 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Table 8-25. Field Values for the Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_SVC Window Field Names Peak Rate(0+1) (cps) Values Default: 1 Description Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (measured in cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. Sustained Cell Rate(0) (cps) Default: 1 Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells, measured in cells per second. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than or equal to the Peak Rate(0+1) (cps) field. Max Burst Size Default: 1 (cells) Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value for peak rate to 0. Traffic Flow (display only) Duplex (default), SimplexA2B, Point-to-Multipoint A2B Note: When you select SimplexA2B, the fields in the Traffic Parameters B to A section are not displayed. Direction of the flow of data traffic in this connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-140 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Table 8-25. Field Values for the Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_SVC Window Field Names OAM Status Values Description Default: Unsupp OAM is not in use. End-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a termination point for ATM. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. Seg-Pt Not supported. End-Seg-Pt Not supported. Intermediate-Pt The Multiservice Media Gateway is used as a network node and an intermediate ATM device that does not terminate the ATM connection. Use this value to enable trunk conditioning. For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning Application Note for PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways. Note: The OAM loopback test is supported for end-to-end connections only. Connection Status Inactive, Active This field displays the current status of the connection. The value indicates whether the connection is passing traffic. (display only) Statistics Page 4 Click the Statistics tab. The Statistics page appears (Figure 8-73). The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-141 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 8-73. Display Connection:ATM-to-ATM SVC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. Field Descriptions • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The fields on this window are described in Table 8-26. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-142 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Table 8-26. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC /VPC SVC/SVP Statistics Window Field Names Values Description Interface A Statistics The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface B Statistics The ATM interface side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Cells Received 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of OAM cells received on Interface A or B. Cells Transmitted 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of OAM cells transmitted on Interface A or B. Received Odometer 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells received on Interface A or B since odometer was last reset. Transmitted Odome- 6.5000 e1 ter (default) Total number of ATM cells transmitted on Interface A or B since odometer was last reset. Time Elapsed (Format is days, Total time elapsed for OAM statistics collection. HH:MM:SS) Time Since Reset Format is days, HH:MM:SS) Total time elapsed for OAM statistics collection since the last odometer reset. 5 To update the statistics displayed on this window, click Update. 6 Press Poll+ and the polling begins. Press Poll- to terminate polling. 7 To refresh this window, press Clear. Utilization Page The Utilization page (see Figure 8-74) measures the amount of traffic running through this connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-143 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 8-74. Display Connection:ATM-to-ATM SVC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-144 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Button • Show Cells/Sec Function Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 8 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 9 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 10 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 11 To refresh this window, click Clear. 12 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 13 To save this connection in the PSAX system configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-145 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Configuring IISP Routing Data This section describes how to add, modify, and delete routing information for IISP VBR and CBR data. The procedures for these processes begin in the IISP Routing page (see Figure 8-75). Figure 8-75. IISP Routing Page Buttons The buttons on this page have the following functions: Button • Find Searches the table and displays a matching text string entered in the Show table entries containing: field. • Reset Removes text entered in the Show table entries containing: field and de-selects any selected entries. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-146 Function Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections When you click the IISP Routing tab, the IISP Routing page opens, containing the IISP VBR and IISP CBR Routing Table panels. Options can be obtained by clicking the right mouse button within either of these panels. Menu Options When you click the right mouse button in either of the panels, a menu appears (see Figure 8-76 and Figure 8-77) with options as described in Table 8-27. Figure 8-76. IISP CBR Routing Table (Displaying Menu) Figure 8-77. IISP VBR Routing Table (Displaying Menu) Table 8-27. IISP Routing Page Menu Option Descriptions Menu Option Display PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Description Displays the selected routing entry in the VBR or CBR routing table. Release 7.0 8-147 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Table 8-27. IISP Routing Page Menu Option Descriptions Creating a VBR or CBR Routing Table Entry Create Creates a new VBR or CBR routing entry in the VBR or CBR routing table. Delete Deletes the selected routing entry from the VBR or CBR routing table. Refresh Refreshes the selected routing entry in the VBR or CBR routing table. Adding a VBR or CBR Routing Data Begin Before you can set up IISP routing, you must configure the port from which you want to route traffic with the ATM UNI or ATM IISP interface. Use the following procedure to add a VBR or CBR routing entry. 1 From the Front Panel, open the Port and Channel Configuration window for the port you want to route. 2 Select an ATM UNI or ATM IISP interface type. 3 Click Apply to Selected. 4 In the Channel Configuration window, double-click the channel that you want to configure. 5 On the Interface Configuration window, select Enabled in the ATM Signaling field (see Figure 8-78). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-148 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Signaling is Enabled Figure 8-78. ATM UNI 3.1 Interface Configuration Page (Displaying ATM Signaling as Enabled) 6 In the Interface Configuration window, click Apply > Bring Into Service > Close. 7 Click the IISP Routing tab in the Provisioning window. The IISP Routing page appears (see Figure 8-75). 8 To create an IISP VBR routing entry, click the right mouse button within the IISP VBR Routing Table panel. To create an IISP CBR routing entry, click the right mouse button within the IISP CBR Routing Table panel. 9 Click Create in the menu that appears. Either the IISP VBR Routing Entry window or the IISP CBR Routing Entry window appears (see Figure 8-79 and Figure 8-80). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-149 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 8-79. VBR IISP Routing Entry Window Figure 8-80. CBR IISP Routing Entry Window Buttons The buttons in these windows have the following functions: Button Function • Add Saves the entry into the system. • Delete Deletes the entry from the table. (appears only after the routing entry has been created) • Close PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-150 Closes the window. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Field Descriptions 10 Select the values for the fields in either window as described in Table 8-28. Table 8-28. Field Values for the IISP VBR and IISP CBR Routing Entry Windows Field Name Values NSAP Address (Hex) Number of Bits 0 (default) Range: 1–152 Virtual UNI ID Description Type a network service access point (NSAP) address up to 20 bytes (160 bits) long (10 groups of 4 characters each) containing the digits 0 through 9 or the letters a through f. 0 (default) Enter the value of the mask that is applied to the NSAP address. Enter the number that represents the virtual UNI interface identifier. Slot Select the slot of the module on which you configured the ATM interface and enabled ATM signaling. Port Select the port on the module on which you configured the ATM interface and enabled ATM signaling. Channel Select the channel on the port of the module on which you configured the ATM interface and enabled ATM signaling. Interface Unconfigured The interface for this channel is not configured. (display only) AtmUni3-0, AtmUni3-1, IispUser, IispNetwork, DbCirEm, Circuit Emulation, DbCirEm, ATMPnni-0, FrameRelay Uni, Hldc PassThrough, Pri-isdnnetwork, FrameRelay Nni, Pri-isdn-user Indicates that the channel is configured for the displayed interface. Unconfigured Indicates that this channel is not operational because the interface is not configured. InService Indicates that this channel is capable of receiving and sending signals. OutOfService This channel is not capable of receiving and sending signals. Oper Status (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Note: An ATM interface type must be displayed in this field to create an IISP route. Release 7.0 8-151 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Table 8-28. Field Values for the IISP VBR and IISP CBR Routing Entry Windows Field Name Admin Status (display only) Values Description Unconfigured Indicates that this channel is not operational because the interface is not configured. InService Indicates that the no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational. OutOfService Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface. 11 Click Add > Close. Note: If you wish to modify this route, you must delete it and create a new route entry. 12 In the Provisioning Menu Bar, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration. End Deleting a Routing Table Entry Use the following procedure to delete a VBR or CBR IISP Routing table entry. Deleting a Routing Entry Begin 1 Click the IISP Routing tab in the Provisioning window. The IISP Routing page appears (see Figure 8-75). 2 In the IISP Routing table, do one of the following (a or b): a. Select the entry that you want to delete in the routing table. Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Delete. A confirmation window appears (see Figure 8-81 and Figure 8-82). The entry is removed from the routing table. Proceed to Step 4. Figure 8-81. IISP VBR Delete Confirmation Window (Using the Right-Click Menu) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-152 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SVC Connections Figure 8-82. IISP CBR Delete Confirmation Window (Using the Right-Click Menu) b. Do one of the following: ~ Double-click the entry you want to delete. ~ Click the entry you want to delete, and select Display from the right mouse menu. The VBR IISP Routing Entry window or CBR IISP Routing Entry window appears (see Figure 8-79 and Figure 8-80). Click Delete. A confirmation window appears (see Figure 8-83). Figure 8-83. Delete Confirmation Window (Using the Delete Button) 3 Click Yes. The entry is removed from the routing table. 4 On the VBR IISP Routing Entry window or CBR IISP Routing Entry window, click Close. 5 In the Provisioning Menu Bar, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration. (See the section, “Saving Configuration Values.”) End For information on enabling and viewing ATM-to-ATM SVC connections, see the appropriate PacketStar® Module User Guide. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-153 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Provisioning SPVC Connections Adding ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connections Creating an ATM-toATM Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC connection. Steps to Create an ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-84). Figure 8-84. Create Connection Window 3 On the Side A panel, select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for a module that is configured with an ATM interface. The interface name appears in the Interface field. 4 On the Side B panel, select SPVC. 5 Click Create. The Create ATM-to-ATM_SPVC Connection window appears (see Figure 8-85). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-154 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-85. Create ATM-to-ATM_SPVC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. Field Descriptions • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. 6 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-29. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-155 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-29. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface Side A:ATM_UNI30, ATM_UNI31, ATM_UNI40, IISP_USER, IISP_NETWORK or PNNI1_0 Side A (PVC side)of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface Side B:ATM_UNI30, ATM_UNI31, ATM_UNI40, IISP_USER, IISP_NETWORK or PNNI1_0 Side B (SVC side)of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot The range varies Select the slot number containing the module for which depending on you are creating a connection on side A. chassis type. Port Range: 1–28, Select the port number on the module for which you are depending on creating a connection on side A. module selected Channel This is the channel where the call originates. The channel on which you are creating a connection. (display only) For example, on a port of the DS3 IMA module, you can configure more than one channel in a port. VPI Range: 0–4095 Virtual path identifier; an addressing identifier that routes cell traffic. VCI Range: 0–4095 Virtual channel identifier; an addressing identifier that routes cell traffic. Service Type Default: Ubr Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express, Cbr4, Cbr3, Cbr2 Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-156 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-29. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Field Names Peak Cell Rate (cps) Values Default: 1 Description Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. Sustained Cell Rate (cps) Default: 1 Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Cell Rate field. Max Burst Size (cells) Default: 1 Maximum burst size. The maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate. This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than that of the sustained cell rate. If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Flow field, set the value for peak rate to 0. Traffic Flow Default: Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, • Duplex PointToMultipoi Data flows in two directions between the two connecntA2B, Simplex tion points (interface side A and interface side B). B2A • Simplex Data flows in only one direction, from side A to side B, or from side B to side A. • Point-to-multipoint Data flows in only one direction, from one point on side A to several points on side B, or from one point on side B to several points on side A. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-157 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-29. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Default: ActiveSvc The type of connection. ActiveSvc attempts calls. PassiveSvc accepts calls. PassiveSvc Note: Retry Limit (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: 0 Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful call setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. Retry Interval (sec) Default: 12 The number of seconds between retry intervals. Range: 0–3600 Note: Connection Type Remote VPI/VCI Default: (shown when Required ActiveSvc is selected as the connection Any type) VPI Many fields disappear in this mode. A value of 0 will result in a retry with no delay. This field indicates whether the remote VPI/VCI values are to be used at the destination. The destination device uses the values specified at this end. The destination device selects the VPI/VCI values. Virtual path identifier. Range: 0–4095 VCI Virtual channel identifier. Range: 32–65535 Remote NSAP Address (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote ATM interface. Operational Sta- Default: Other tus Establish(displays only mentInProgress On the Display Connected Connection window, not on RetriesExthe Create Con- hausted nection winNoAddressSupdow) plied None of the types specified below. Connection is not operational, but call attempts are ongoing. Connection is currently operational. Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. LowerLayerDown PVC endpoint is out of service. WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingForRetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-158 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-29. Field Values for the ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Last release diagnosis. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. Last Releases Diagnostic (displays only On the Display Connection window, not on the Create Connection window) Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Multiservice Media Gateway will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. Retry Failure Count (displays only On the Display Connection window, not on the Create Connection window) Last Release Cause Default: 0 Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (displays only On the Display Connection window, not on the Create Connection window) If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-86): Primary, Statistics, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-29 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-159 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-86. Display Connection:ATM-to-ATM_SPVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-160 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button Function • Restart Restarts the connection. • Poll Continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Terminates polling. Changes the button label to Poll+. Statistics Page The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-87). Figure 8-87. Display Connection:ATM-to-ATM SPVC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-161 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Field Descriptions Button Function • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The values for the fields on this window are described in Table 8-30. ` Table 8-30. ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Name Description Slot Slot identifier of the ATM interface for either the ATM Interface A panel or the ATM Interface B panel. Port Port identifier of the ATM interface for either the ATM Interface A panel or the ATM Interface B panel. Channel Channel identifier of the ATM interface for either Interface A or Interface B. VPI Virtual path identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. VCI Virtual channel identifier of the ATM side (SVC side) of the connection. Cells Received Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. Cells Transmitted Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. FEC Rate Used Displays the forward error correction (FEC) rate being used by the FEC module in the A2B direction (for ATM Interface A panel), or B2A direction (for ATM Interface B panel). This field is dymanic when auto rates are selected. In other cases it will display the rate set by the user. Received Odometer Number of valid cells received since this counter was reset. Transmitted Odometer Number of valid cells transmitted since this counter was reset. Cells Tagged Number of cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Note: Note: This counter serves as an odometer while the cells Tx/Rx counters track usage for the life of the circuit. This counter serves as an odometer while the cells Tx/Rx counters track usage for the life of the circuit. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-162 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-30. ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Name Description Cells Dropped Number of cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Time Elapsed Time, in hours, minutes, and seconds, since last reset. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. Utilization Page The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-88). Figure 8-88. Display Connection: ATM-to-ATM_SPVC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-163 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Descriptions • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-164 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connections Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a circuit emulation-toATM VCC SPVC connection. Creating a Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-89). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-165 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-89. Create Connection Window 3 On the Side A panel, select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for a module that is configured with an circuit emulation interface. The interface name appears in the Interface Type field. 4 On the Side B panel, select SPVC. 5 Click Create. The Create CE_to_ATM SPVC Connection window appears (see Figure 8-90). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-166 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-90. Create Circuit Emulation_to_ATM SPVC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-167 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Field Descriptions 6 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-31. Table 8-31. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Circuit Emulation Interface Description The circuit emulation side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on chassis type Enter the slot number on side A containing the module for which you are creating a connection. Port Range: 1–28, depending on the module selected Enter the port number on side A for the module for which you are creating a connection. Channel Enter the channel on side A for which you are creating a connection. VPI (display only) Range: 0–4095 Virtual path identifier (ATM side). VCI (display only) Range: Virtual channel identifier (ATM side). 0– 65535 Voice Compres- Default: None sion G726-8k G726-16k, G726-24k, G726-32k, G726-40k If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. Instead, select the desired type and rate of voice compression from the list of choices. Silence Detection If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server Modules, do not use the default value. Default: Disabled Choosing Enabled enables Silence Detection. Echo Cancellation Default: None G165-nearEnd, G168 If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server Modules, do not use the default value. Select G165-nearEnd if you want to enable Echo Cancellation on this connection. Tone Detection Default: Disabled If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server Modules, use Bypass. Bypass The value Bypass indicates that the fax tones are to be recognized and data sent by fax is not to be processed by compression and echo cancellation. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-168 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-31. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Coding Transla- None (default), tion MuLaw2muLa w, ALaw2aLaw, MuLaw2aLaw, ALaw2MuLaw Description If you want data traffic for this connection to be processed through the DSP2x Voice Server modules, do not use the default value. The other values indicate the desired type of pulse code modulation (PCM) translation. You must specify one of these PCM types to enable data traffic processing through the DSP2x Voice Server modules. Traffic Flow Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. (default), SimplexA2B, Simplex B2A, PointToMultipoi ntA2B, PointToMultipoi ntB2A Service Type Default: Cbr-2 Cbr-3, Cbr-4 Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. See the Reference appendix for more information. Connection Type Default: ActiveSvc The type of connection. ActiveSvc attempts calls. PassiveSvc accepts calls. PassiveSvc SAR Type Note: If you are upgrading your CPU software, see Note below table. Retry Limit (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: Aal1 AAL1. Uncompressed CBR. Aal2 Non-multiplexed AAL2. Note: Choose this type to configure an SPVC if using DSP parameters with the connection. Note: If using structured, channelized T1 service, see Note below table). Default: 0 Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful call setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. Retry Interval Default: 12 (sec) (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The waiting period before attempting to establish the SPVC after one call attempt has failed. Remote NSAP Address (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote ATM interface. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-169 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-31. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Provision Passive End-Point Values Automatic (default) Enables automatic end-to-end provisioning (provisioning SPVCs in at two different points). When an active SPVC connection is created using the AQueView® system, selecting Automatic in this field results in the passive end-point being provisioned automatically by the AQueView® system. The information about where to provision the passive end-point is obtained from the NSAP database using the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field for the active SPVC connection. The Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field should exist in the NSAP address database. None Disables automatic end-to-end provisioning. Operational Sta- Default: Other tus Establish(displays only mentInProgress on the Display Connected Connection window, not On Retries the Create Con- Exhausted NoAddress nection window) Supplied Last Releases Diagnostic Description None of the types specified below. Connection is not operational, but call attempts are ongoing. Connection is currently operational. Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. LowerLayer Down PVC endpoint is out of service. WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingFor RetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. Last release diagnostic. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. (displays only on the Display Connection window, not On the Create Connection window) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-170 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-31. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Last Release Cause Values Default: 0 Description Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (displays only on the Display Connection window, not On the Create Connection window) Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Multiservice Media Gateway will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. Retry Failure Count Operational Status (displays only on the Display Connection window, not On the Create Connection window) Note: SAR Type for Using Structured, Channelized T1 Service. You must select non-multiplexed AAL2 (non-mux AAL2) when using structured, channelized T1 service on the following modules: Channelized DS3 (multifunction), 1-port Channelized DS3 CES, 3-port Channelized DS3 CES (Release 7.0 CPU software required), Channelized STS-1e CES, Channelized STS-1e T1, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1 (21 port), and Medium Density DS1 (12-port). Save your SVCs before upgrading your CPU software, or you will have to re-enter their configurations. If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-91): Primary, Statistics, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-31 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-91. Display Connection: Circuit_Emulation-to-ATM SPVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-172 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button Function • Delete Deletes the connection. • Restart Restarts the connection. • Poll Continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Terminates polling. Changes the button label to Poll+. Statistics Page The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-92). Figure 8-92. Display Connection: Circuit_Emulation-to-ATM SPVC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-173 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. Field Descriptions • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The values for the fields on this window are described in Table 8-32. Table 8-32. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Names Cells Encoded (display only) Cells Decoded (display only) Values Description 0.0000 e0 (default) Number of cells encoded going into either interface side during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). 0.0000 e0 (default) Number of cells decoded going out of either interface side during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field (that is, since the circuit was created). Encoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter Total number of cells encoded going into either interface side since the odometer was last reset. (display only) Decoded Odom- 0.0000 e0 eter (default) Total number of cells decoded going out of either interface side since the odometer was last reset. (display only) Time elapsed since the circuit was established. Time Elapsed (display only) Cells Received (display only) 6.5000 e1 (default) Number of valid cells received since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. Cells Transmitted 6.5000 e1 (default) Number of valid cells transmitted since the virtual circuit or virtual path was established. (display only) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-174 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-32. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC SPVC Statistics Window Field Names Received Odometer Values Description 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells received since odometer was last reset. 6.5000 e1 (default) Total number of ATM cells transmitted since odometer was last reset. (display only) Transmitted Odometer (display only) Time Since Reset (display only) Utilization Page Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. This button resets only the odometer fields (labelled as Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-93). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-175 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-93. Display Connection: Circuit_Emulation-to-ATM SPVC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-176 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Descriptions • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-177 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connections Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create a frame relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC connection. Creating a Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-94). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-178 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-94. Create Connection Window 3 Select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for a module that is configured with a frame relay interface interface on the Side A panel. The interface name is displayed in the Interface field. 4 On the Side B panel, select SPVC. 5 Click Create. The Create Frame Relay-to-ATM_SPVC Connection window is displayed (see Figure 8-95). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-179 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-95. Create Frame Relay-to-ATM_SPVC Connection Window 6 Click Create. Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-180 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Field Descriptions 7 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in the following table. Table 8-33. Field Values for the Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Interface Side A:FR_UNI or FR_NNI Slot (display only) Varies depending on chassis type Port The slot number on the module for which you are creating a connection. The port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. (display only) Channel Description Frame relay side (PVC side) of the connection. 1 (display only) The channel number on the module for which you are creating a connection. This is the channel where the call originates. For example, on a port of the Enhanced DS1 module, you can configure more than one channel in a port. DLCI Range: 16–1007 Data link connection identifier. DLCI is used when the remote end point is frame relay. Frame Size(bytes) Default: 4096 Measured in bytes. Committed Burst Size (bits/sec) Default: 0 Use the default value. Excess Burst Size (bits) Default: 45000000 Excess burst size, measured in bits per second. Committed Info Default: 0 Rate Traffic Flow Committed information rate is the rate of traffic (measured in bits per second) for a given connection that the system will attempt to provide guaranteed delivery. Default: Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, • Duplex Simplex B2A Data flows in two directions between the two connection points (interface side A and interface side B). • Simplex Data flows in only one direction, from side A to side B, or from side B to side A. Connection Type Default: ActiveSvc The type of connection. ActiveSvc attempts calls. PassiveSvc accepts calls. PassiveSvc PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-181 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-33. Field Values for the Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Service Type Default: Ubr Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. Interworking Function Default: Frf8-Transl FRF.8 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. Frf8-Pass; Frf5 FRF.5 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking. Note: No matter which value you select in this field, you can set values for the Remote Remote VPI,VCI/DLCI field. Retry Limit (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: 0 Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful call setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. See the ATM UNI Specification, Version 3.1 Cause Code table in the Reference Table appendix of this guide for causes that will prompt a retry as reported by the far end. Retry Interval Default: 12 (sec) (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The waiting period before attempting to establish the SPVC after one call attempt has failed. Remote NSAP Address (Hex) (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote frame relay or ATM interface in hexadecimal notation. Remote VPI,VCI (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: Required This field indicates whether the remote VPI and VCI values are to be used at the destination. The destination device uses the values specified at this end. Any The destination device selects the VPI/VCI values. VPI Range: 0–4095 Virtual path identifier. VCI Range: 32–65535 Virtual channel identifier. Note: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-182 If you want to use DLCI, set VPI to 0. Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-33. Field Values for the Frame Relay-to-ATM SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Operational Sta- Default: Other tus Establish(displayed on mentInProgress the Display Connected Connection window for this RetriesExconnection, not hausted on the Create NoAddressSupConnection plied window) LowerLayer- Description None of the types specified below. Connection is not operational, but call attempts are ongoing. Connection is currently operational. Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. PVC endpoint is out of service. Down WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingForRetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. Last release diagnosis. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. Last Releases Diagnostic (displayed on the Display Connection window for this connection, not on the Create Connection window) Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Multiservice Media Gateway will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. Retry Failure Count (displayed on the Display Connection window for this connection, not on the Create Connection window) Last Release Cause Default: 0 Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.1 specification for more information. (displayed on the Display Connection window for this connection, not on the Create Connection window) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-183 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-96): Primary, Statistics, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. The Display Connection window appears (see Figure 8-96) with tabs that contain details about the SPVC connection: Primary, Statistics and Utilization. Primary Page The Primary tab displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-33 on page 8-181 for field descriptions. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-184 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-96. Display Connection: Frame_Relay-to-ATM SPVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Close PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Closes this window. Release 7.0 8-185 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button Function • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. • Restart Restarts the connection. • Poll Continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Terminates polling. Changes the button label to Poll+. Statistics Page The Statistics tab displays the statistics for this connection. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-186 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-97. Display Connection: Frame_Relay-to-ATM SPVC (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-187 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Field Descriptions Button Function • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. 8 Select the values from the fields as described in Table 8-34. Table 8-34. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Description Cells Encoded Number of cells encoded going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Cells Decoded Number of cells decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Frames Dropped Number of frames dropped for a given DLCI in the A2B direction. This field is only applicable to the input side. Encoded Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into interface side A since the connection was created or statistics were reset. Decoded Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side B since the connection was created or statistics were reset. Time Elapsed Time, in hours, minutes, and seconds, since last reset. Cells Received Number of cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. Cells Transmitted Number of cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field. In Odometer Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since the connection statistics were reset. Out Odometer Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since the connection statistics were reset. Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. The Clear button on the statistics page resets only the odometer fields (labelled as Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. Utilization Page The Utilization tab measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-98). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-188 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-98. Display Connection: Frame_Relay-to-ATM_VCC (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-189 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-190 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 9 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 10 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 11 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 12 To refresh this window, click Clear. 13 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 14 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Adding VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC Connections Creating a VBR-toATM Connection Perform the steps in the following procedure to create an VBR-to-ATM SPVC connection. Creating a VBR-to-ATM SPVC Connection Begin 1 Click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Click the right mouse button and a menu appears. Click Create New. The Create Connection window appears (see Figure 8-99). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-191 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-99. Create Connection Window 3 Select the appropriate slot, port, and channel for a module that is configured with one of the following interfaces for Side A: ~ HDLC Passthrough ~ Terminal Emulation The interface name appears at the bottom. 4 On Side B, select SPVC. 5 Once the desired connection type appears in the Connection Type field, click Create. The Create VBR_to_ATM VCC SPVC Connection window appears (see Figure 8-100). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-192 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-100. Create VBR_to_ATM SPVC Connection Window Buttons The buttons on this window have the following functions: Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. Field Descriptions • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. 6 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in Table 8-35. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-193 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-35. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM _SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Description Interface Side A The VBR side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Interface Side B The ATM side of the connection that will send and receive signals. Slot Variable depending on chassis type The slot number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Port Range: 1–30, depending on the module selected The port number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Channel Range: 1–32, depending on the module selected The channel number on the module for which you are creating a connection. Peak Cell Rate (cps) 1 (default) Peak cell rate (PCR) for all cells with both the CLP=0 bit and the CLP=1 bit. The value you set is the maximum allowed cell transmission rate (cells per second) for all cells both high and low priority, as allowed by your traffic contract. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be greater than the Sustained Cell Rate field. Sustained Cell Rate (cps) (display only) 1 (default) Sustainable cell rate (SCR) with CLP=0 (high priority) cells or the peak cell rate with CLP=0 cells. When setting this value, take into account the line rate for the module and the amount of bandwidth you are setting up for each interface for the module. Refer to the ATM UNI 3.1 specifications for more information. If you select the value SimplexA2B in the Traffic Flow field, set the value of this field to 0. The value in this field should be less than the Peak Cell Rate field. Traffic Flow Default: Duplex Direction of flow of data traffic in this connection. SimplexA2B, Simplex B2A PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-194 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-35. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM _SPVC Connection Window Field Names Service Type Connection Type Values Description Ubr (default), Vbr-nrt2, Vbr-nrt1, Vbr-rt2, Vbr-rt1, Vbr-express Multiservice Media Gateway system-supported quality of service (QoS) class. ActiveSvc (default), The type of connection. ActiveSvc attempts calls. PassiveSvc accepts calls. See the appendix for a detailed description of the values for this field, including representative examples. PassiveSvc Retry Limit (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Default: 0 Retry Interval Default: 12 (sec) (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Provision Passive End-Point Remote NSAP Address (Hex) (shown when ActiveSvc is selected as the connection type) Maximum limit on how many consecutive unsuccessful call setup attempts can be made before stopping the attempts to set up the connection. A value of zero indicates no limits. The waiting period before attempting to establish the SPVC after one call attempt has failed. Automatic (default) Enables automatic end-to-end provisioning (provisioning SPVCs in at two different points). When an active SPVC connection is created using the AQueView® system, selecting Automatic in this field results in the passive end-point being provisioned automatically by the AQueView® system. The information about where to provision the passive endpoint is obtained from the NSAP database using the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field for the active SPVC connection. The Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field should exist in the NSAP address database. None Disables automatic end-to-end provisioning. The ATM NSAP address of the remote end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the remote VBR or ATM interface. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-195 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-35. Field Values for the VBR-to-ATM _SPVC Connection Window Field Names Values Operational Sta- Default: Other tus Establishment (displayed on InProgress the Display Connected Connection window for this Retries connection, not Exhausted on the Create NoAddress Connection Supplied window) LowerLayer Description None of the types specified below. Connection is not operational, but call attempts are ongoing. Connection is currently operational. Retry limit has been reached and call attempts have ceased. No remote address has been configured, so no call attempts are initiated. PVC endpoint is out of service. Down WaitingForCall Passive endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for call from an active side. WaitingFor RetryTimer Active endpoint of a SPVC connection, waiting for the retry timer to expire so that it can retry the call. Last release diagnosis. Explains how the connection was released and reported by the far end of the connection. Last Releases Diagnostic (displayed on the Display Connection window for this connection, not on the Create Connection window) Displays how many times the call retry failed since the last successful call setup. When a call is released, the Access Concentrator will continue to retry up to the retry limit that is specified in the Retry Limit field. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. Retry Failure Count (displayed on the Display Connection window for this connection, not on the Create Connection window) Last Release Cause Default: 0 Last release cause. Release cause for a failed call attempt. See the ATM UNI 3.0 specification for more information. (displayed on the Display Connection window for this connection, not on the Create Connection window) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-196 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections If the parameters are valid, the Connections window appears with the new connection in the Listing page, and the Display Connection window appears with tabs that contain details about the connection (see Figure 8-101): Primary, Statistics, and Utilization. If a parameter is invalid, a Connection Creation Failed message appears, stating the reason for the failure. Primary Page The Primary page displays the information used to create the connection. See Table 8-35 for field descriptions. Figure 8-101. Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM SPVC (Primary Page) Primary Page Buttons The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-197 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button Function • Retrieve Remote If you have previously established an NSAP address NSAP Address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Remote NSAP Address (Hex) field. • Close Closes this window. • Create Establishes the connection you configured. • Copy Copies this configuration information to to a range of interfaces. • Delete Deletes the connection. • Restart Restarts the connection. • Poll Continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Terminates polling. Changes the button label to Poll+. Statistics Page The Statistics page displays the statistics for this connection (see Figure 8-102). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-198 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-102. Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Window (Statistics Page) Statistics Page Buttons The buttons on the Statistics page have the following functions: Button Function • Update Refreshes the statistics manually. • Clear Resets the resetable statistics to zero. • Poll Poll + continuously update the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-199 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Field Descriptions Button Function • Odometer (Only on the ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC and ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC Statistics pages) Restarts counting in the Cells Transmitted and Cells Received fields in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels, and to view the transmitted cells and received cells in the Interface Side A and Interface Side B panels. • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for the connections that were not previously set up. The fields on this window are described in the following table. Table 8-36. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC/SPVC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Description Interface A Statistics Cells Encoded (display only) Cells Decoded (display only) Encoded Odometer (display only) Number of cells encoded going into interface side Aor B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Number of cells decoded going out of interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going into interface side A since this counter was reset. On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells encoded going into interface side B since this counter was reset. Decoded Odometer (display only) On the Interface A Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since this counter was reset. On the Interface B Statistics panel, the number of cells decoded going out of interface side B since this counter was reset. Time Elapsed Time elapsed since the circuit was established. (display only) Cells Received (display only) Cells Transmited (display only) In Odometer (display only) Out Odometer (display only) Number of cells encoded going into interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Number of cells decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field since the circuit was established. Total number of cells encoded going into interface side B since the connection statistics were reset. Total number of cells decoded going out of interface side A since the connection statistics were reset. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-200 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Table 8-36. Field Descriptions for the VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC/SPVC Connection Statistics Page Field Name Description Time Since Reset Time elapsed since the last time the Clear button was used. (display only) Note: The Clear button on the statistics page resets only the odometer fields (labelled as Odometer) and the corresponding clock. Other counters increment for the life of the circuit. AIS Received Number of alarm indication signal (AIS) cells received. (display only) AIS Transmitted Number of AIS cells transmitted. (display only) RDI Received Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells received. (display only) RDI Transmitted Number of remote defect indicator (RDI) cells transmitted. (display only) Interface B Statistics Cells Dropped Number of cells dropped. (display only) Cells Tagged Number of cells tagged. (display only) Utilization Page The Utilization page measures the amount of traffic running through this connection (see Figure 8-103). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-201 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Figure 8-103. Display Connection: VBR-to-ATM_VCC Window (Utilization Page) Utilization Page Buttons The buttons on the Utilization page have the following functions: PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-202 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Provisioning SPVC Connections Button • 60 sec Function Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device. Select a time interval from the pull-down menu: • 5 sec • 10 sec • 20 sec • 30 sec • 60 sec (default) • 90 sec • 2 min • 3 min • 4 min • 5 min • Clear Resets all statistics to zero. • Poll Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll-. Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to Poll+. • Show Cells/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of cells per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Bits/Sec. • Show Bits/Sec Calculates and displays the average number of bits per second for a given PVC or SPVC for a given time interval specified in the pull-down menu (see above). Changes button label to Show Cells/Sec. Utilization Page Description • Close Closes this window. • Restart Restarts connection establishment procedure for this SPVC. The Average Bits/Sec and Average Cells/Sec panels display the percentage of traffic that is passing through the channel. The Time column displays the time in hours, minutes and seconds, when the traffic was polled. The Out A or Decoded A column displays cells or bits transmitted from side B to side A (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface A Statistics panel). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-203 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Deleting Connections The Out B or Decoded B column displays cells or bits transmitted from side A to side B (also displayed on the Statistics page in the Cells Transmitted field on the Interface B Statistics panel). 7 Select a time interval from the pull-down menu. 8 Average bits per second is displayed by default. If you want to display utilization by average cells per second, click Average Cells/Sec. 9 Click Poll+ and the polling begins. Click Poll- to terminate polling. 10 To refresh this window, click Clear. 11 To close the Display Connection window, click Close. 12 To save this connection to the PSAX configuration database, click Device > Save PSAX Configuration in the Provisioning Menu Bar. ! CAUTION: Click Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration. Applied, but unsaved configuration data will not be lost unless the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored on the PSAX system, not in the AQueView EMS. End Deleting Connections Perform the steps in the following procedure to delete a connection. Deleting a Connection Begin 1 In the Provisioning window, click the Connections tab. The Listing page appears. 2 Do one of the following: ~ Double-click the connection to be deleted in the Connections List. The Display Connection window appears. Click Delete. ~ Right-click the entry of the connection you wish to delete. A menu appears. Select Delete. A window appears, prompting you to confirm the deletion (see Figure 8-104). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-204 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Deleting Connections Figure 8-104. Sample Delete Connection Confirmation Window 3 Click Yes to delete the connection. End PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 8-205 Chapter 8 Provisioning Connections Using the AQueView® System Deleting Connections PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 8-206 Release 7.0 255-700-171 A Reference Tables Overview of This Appendix This appendix contains reference tables that are helpful while configuring your PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway system. The following types of information are provided: • ATM Traffic Descriptors • ATM User-Network Interface Specification Cause Codes Table, Version 3.1(for Connection Retry) • DSP Tone Detection Modes Table • DSP2C Module Channel Reduction When Using Fax Relay Mode Table • Industry Compliance Specifications Table • Connection Types by Interfaces Type Table • Interface Types by I/O Module Types Table • Minimum AAL2 Trunk Size Requirements Tables • Module Alarm Status Table • Quality of Service (QoS) Information Tables ATM Traffic Descriptors Purpose of Traffic Descriptors When you create a PVC, you can select one of several traffic descriptors by entering the desired value in the Conformance Type field on the user interface windows for certain connection types. The traffic descriptor specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control. It also determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue, and whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. Connections Supporting Traffic Descriptors The traffic descriptors used in the PacketStar® Multiservice Media Gateway system software are supported for the following types of connections. • ATM-to-ATM VCC PVC connection • ATM-to-ATM VPC PVC connection • Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC connection PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-1 Chapter A Reference Tables ATM Traffic Descriptors • Circuit Emulation-to-ATM VCC PVC connection • Frame Relay-to-ATM VCC PVC connection • In-band ATM PVC connection • VBR-to-ATM VCC PVC connection Traffic Descriptors Supported The available traffic descriptors available are as follows. • Best effort(Best-effort) This traffic descriptor allows the system to attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. The Multiservice Media Gateway might drop some or all cells during congestion. • Best effort with tagging (Best-effort-tag) This traffic descriptor allows the system to tag all CLP=0 (high priority) cells to change them to CLP=1 (low priority) cells, and then attempt to send all cells in a “best effort” fashion, without specifying any other traffic parameters, similar to the AQueMan algorithm. The network might drop some or all cells during congestion. • One bucket, with no tagging for cells with both CLP bit=0 and CLP bit=1 (1B-NT-0+1) This traffic descriptor uses the parameters one bucket, no tagging, cell loss priority (CLP)=0+1 cells (high and low priority). The Multiservice Media Gateway ignores the CLP bit value and drops all cells violating the value set for the peak cell rate (PCR). • Two buckets, with no tagging for cells with both CLP bit=0 and CLP bit=1 (2B-NT-0+1-0+1) This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 2. The Multiservice Media Gateway ignores the CLP bit value for cells passing into bucket 1 and drops all cells violating the value set for the PCR. The remainder of the cells are passed to bucket 2. The Multiservice Media Gateway ignores the CLP bit value for cells passing into bucket 2, and drops all cells violating the value set for the sustainable cell rate (SCR). • Two buckets, with no tagging for cells with both CLP bit=0+1 and CLP bit=0 (2B-NT-0+1-0) This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, no tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. For bucket 1, the Multiservice Media Gateway ignores the CLP bit value for cells passing into bucket 1 and drops all cells violating the value set for the PCR. For bucket 2, the system takes one of the following actions: ~ When the connection is configured for variable bit rate (VBR) traffic, the Multiservice Media Gateway drops all CLP=0 cells violating the value set for the SCR in bucket 2. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables ATM UNI Specification Cause Codes Table for Connection Retry ~ When the connection is configured for constant bit rate (CBR) traffic, the Multiservice Media Gateway drops all CLP=0 cells violating the value set for the PCR in bucket 2. • Two buckets, for cells with CLP bit=0 and CLP bit=0 (2B-NT-0+1-0) This traffic descriptor uses the parameters two buckets, tagging, CLP=0+1 cells (high and low priority) for bucket 1, and CLP=0 cells (high priority) for bucket 2. For bucket 1, the Multiservice Media Gateway ignores the CLP bit value for cells passing into bucket 1 and drops all cells violating the value set for the PCR. For bucket 2, the system takes one of the following actions: ~ When the connection is configured for variable bit rate (VBR) traffic, the Multiservice Media Gateway tags all CLP=0 cells violating the value set for the SCR to CLP=1 in bucket 2. ~ When the connection is configured for constant bit rate (CBR) traffic, the Multiservice Media Gateway tags all CLP=0 cells violating the value set for the PCR to CLP=1 in bucket 2. The network then might drop some or all cells during congestion. ATM UNI Specification Cause Codes Table for Connection Retry Connection Retry Table The indicator X in the column, Prompts a Retry, in Table A-1 means that if this code is reported by the far end, the PSAX system will retry the connection for up to the number of retries specified by the Retry Limit Field on all SPVC Connection Configuration windows. Table A-1. ATM User-Network Interface Specification, Version 3.1, Cause Codes Number Meaning 1 unallocated (unassigned) number 2 no route to specified transit network 3 no route to destination 16 normal call clearing 17 user busy 18 no user responding 21 call rejected 22 number changed 23 user rejects all calls with calling line identification restriction (CLIR) 27 destination out of order PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Prompts a Retry X X X Release 7.0 A-3 Chapter A Reference Tables ATM UNI Specification Cause Codes Table for Connection Retry Table A-1. ATM User-Network Interface Specification, Version 3.1, Cause Codes Number Meaning 28 invalid number format (address incomplete) 30 response to STATUS ENQUIRY 31 normal, unspecified 35 requested VPCI/VCI not available X 36 VPCI/VCI assignment failure X 37 user cell rate not available X 38 network out of order (not used in this implementation agreement) X 41 temporary failure X 43 access information discarded X 45 no VPCI/VCI available X 47 resource unavailable, unspecified X 49 Quality of Service unavailable 57 bearer capability not authorized 58 bearer capability not presently available 63 service or option not available, unspecified 65 bearer capability not implemented 73 unsupported combination of traffic parameters 78 AAL parameters cannot be supported 81 invalid call reference value 82 identified channel does not exist 88 incompatible destination 89 invalid endpoint reference 91 invalid transit network selection 92 too many pending add party requests 96 mandatory information element is missing 97 message type non-existent or not implemented 99 information element non-existent or not implemented 100 invalid information element contents 101 message not compatible with call state X 102 recovery on timer expiry X 104 incorrect message length 111 protocol error, unspecified PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-4 Prompts a Retry X Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables DSP Tone Detection Modes Table DSP Tone Detection Modes Table Table A-2. DSP Tone Detection Modes* and Associated Processing Performed Tone Mode Processing Performed Disabled Ignores fax tones and modem tones Bypass If a fax tone or modem tone is received, the firmware switches to G.711 mode (64 Kbps) and bypasses echo cancellation, if enough bandwidth is available. Fax Relay If a fax tone is received, the firmware switches to a channel configured for FaxRelayMode and performs fax demodulation / remodulation. If a modem tone is received, the firmware ignores it Fax Relay/ Modem Bypass If a fax tone is received, the firmware switches to a channel configured for FaxRelayMode and performs fax demodulation / remodulation. If a modem tone is received, the firmware switches to G.711 mode (64 Kbps) and bypasses echo cancellation, if enough bandwidth is available. * Modes selected on the CE-to-ATM VCC PVC connection window DSP2C Module Channel Reduction When Using Fax Relay Mode Table A-3. Channel Reduction Availability Caused by Fax Relay Connections vs. Voice Processing Connections on a DSP2C Module Number of DSPs for Fax Relay Total Connections Assigned for Fax Relay Percent of All DSP Connections Assigned for Fax Relay Remaining Voice Processing Available Channels* 1 4 3% 124 2 8 6% 120 3 12 9% 116 4 16 13% 112 5 20 16% 108 6 24 19% 104 7 28 22% 100 8 32 25% † 96 9 36 28% 92 10 40 31% 88 11 44 34% 84 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-5 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-3. Channel Reduction Availability Caused by Fax Relay Connections vs. Voice Processing Connections on a DSP2C Module Number of DSPs for Fax Relay Total Connections Assigned for Fax Relay Percent of All DSP Connections Assigned for Fax Relay Remaining Voice Processing Available Channels* 12 48 38% 80 13 52 41% 76 14 56 44% 72 15 60 47% 68 16 64 50% 64 * For every fax transmission call, both the originally assigned DSP resource, plus the fax relay DSP resource, are consumed for the duration of the call. Thus, the total remaining DSP connections is reduced by twice the number of connections using fax mode service. † Utilization of DSP resources for fax relay above 25% is not considered realistic for most service provider environments. If this value exceeds 25%, then the number of available DSP connections for pure voice mode calls is reduced to less than 50% of connections available on the DSP2C module. Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4 contains compliance specifications for the Multiservice Media Gateway systems, and the I/O and server modules. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Integrated Local Management Interface (ILMI) ILMI over PNNI Specification Title Notes af-ilmi-0065.000 Integrated Local Management Interface (ILMI) Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 IMA, DS3 ATM, E3 ATM, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1, High Speed, Medium-Density DS1, MultiSerial, OC-3c SingleMode/Multi-Mode/APS, STM-1 Single-Mode/Multi-Mode/MSP, OC-12c/STM-4c, and Quadserial modules DS1 IMA and DS3 IMA modules af-phy-0016.000 DS1 Physical Layer Specification Channelized DS3 module af-phy-0054.000 DS3 Physical Interface Specification E1 IMA module af-phy-0064.000 E1 Physical Layer Specification DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, and E1 IMA modules af-phy-0086.000 DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, and E1 IMA modules af-phy-0086.001 Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA), Version 1.0 Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA), Version 1.1 Obsoletes af-phy-0086.000 but PSAX is compatible with both versions Channelized DS3, Channelized af-pnni-0026.000 STS-1e, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 Interim Inter-Switch Signaling IMA, DS3 ATM, E3 ATM, Protocol (IISP) Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1,High-Density E1, High Speed, Medium-Density DS1, OC-3c Single-Mode/MultiMode/APS, STM-1 SingleMode/Multi-Mode/MSP, OC12c/STM-4c, and Quadserial modules PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-7 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name ATM Maintenance Mode ATM PNNI 1.0 interface ETSI ISDN Support Specification Title Notes af-pnni-0055.000 SPVCsPrivate Network-Network Inter- Annex C: Soft PVC Procedures for circuit emulation, frame face (PNNI) relay, and terminal emulation In-band Management SVC Soft Permanent Virtual Circuits (SPVCs) Annex G, mandatory requirements SPVC Support for CES with DSP2 Modules Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 IMA, DS3 ATM, E3 ATM, DSP2A/B/C/D Voice Server, Enhanced DS1, High-Density E1, Medium-Density DS1, OC3c Single-Mode/MultiMode/APS, STM-1 SingleMode/Multi-Mode/MSP, OC12c/STM-4c, and Quadserial modules ATM Maintenance Mode af-pnni-0066000 In-band Management SVC Private Network-Network Interface (PNNI) Addendum (Soft PVC) Channelized DS3, Channelized af-sig-0061.000 STS-1e, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 User-Network Interface (UNI) IMA, DS3 ATM, E3 ATM, 4.0 Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1, High Speed, Medium-Density DS1, MultiSerial, OC-3c SingleMode/Multi-Mode/APS, STM-1 Single-Mode/Multi-Mode/MSP, OC-12c/STM-4c, and Quadserial modules Traffic Management (UPC Support) af-tm-0121.000 Traffic Management, Usage Parameter Control PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-8 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title Notes Channelized DS3, Channelized af-uni-0010.001 STS-1e, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 User-Network Interface (UNI) IMA, DS3 ATM, E3 ATM, 3.0 Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1,High-Density E1, High Speed, Medium-Density DS1, Multi-Serial, OC-3c SingleMode/Multi-Mode/APS, STM-1 Single-Mode/Multi-Mode/MSP, OC-12c/STM-4c, and Quadserial modules Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 IMA, DS3 ATM, E3 ATM, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1, High Speed, Medium-Density DS1, MultiSerial, OC-3c SingleMode/Multi-Mode/APS, STM-1 Single-Mode/Multi-Mode/MSP, OC-12c/STM-4c, and Quadserial modules af-uni-0010.002 GR-303 DLC Services af-vmoa-0145.000 VTOA AAL2 Trunking Narrowband Services Voice and Multimedia Over ATM–Loop Emulation Service Using AAL2 Carrier Group AIS Alarm af-vtoa-0078.000 I.610 OAM F4/F5 Processing (remote defect indication [RDI] and alarm indication signal [AIS]) Circuit Emulation Service 2.0 User-Network Interface (UNI) 3.1 44.736 Mbps Ds3 Layer Includes 56 (DS1), Nx64 (DS1, E1) Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, Channelized DS3/STS1e CES, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 IMA, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1, MediumDensity DS1, Multi-Serial, Quadserial and Unstructured DS3/E3 CES modules PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-9 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, and Enhanced DS1 modules Specification Title Notes af-vtoa-0085.000 (DBCES) Dynamic Bandwith Utilization in 64 Kbps Time Slot Trunking Over ATM—Using Circuit Emulation Service (CES) • AAL1 Trunking CCS (Q.931) • AAL1 Trunking CCS (Q.931/QSIG), AAL1 Trunking CAS AAL2 Trunking af-vtoa-0089.000 ATM Trunking Using AAL1 for Narrow Band Services V1.0 I.610 OAM F4/F5 Processing (remote defect indication [RDI] and alarm indication signal [AIS]) af-vtoa-0098.000 Quadserial af-vtoa-0113.000 VTOA AAL1 Trunking Services ATM Trunking Using AAL2 af-vtoa-0119.000 Low Speed Circuit Emulation Service Stratum 3–4 module synchroni- ANSI T1.101 Does not include the (ITU-G. zation Telecommunications - Synchro- 703 -compliant Stratum 3–4 modnization Interface Standard ule, COMCODE 407850601) Unstructured DS3/E3 CES mod- ANSI T1.102 ule DS3 Electrical Interface Characteristics CSU/DSU loopback ANSI T1.105 Enhanced DS1, DS3 ATM, OC3c Single-Mode/MultiMode/APS modules Synchronous Optical NetworkBasic Description DS1 IMA and E1 IMA modules ANSI T1.107 T1.107a–DS1 and DS3 Format Specifications DS1 IMA, DSP2C Voice Server, and E1 IMA modules ANSI T1.231 DS1/DS3 Performance Monitoring Characteristics PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-10 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name GR-303 DLC Services Specification Title Notes ANSI T1.401 Interface Between Carriers and Customer Installations- Analog Voice Grade Switched Access Lines Using Loops-start and Ground-start Signaling CSU/DSU loopback ANSI T1.403 Facsimile Demodulation/ Remodulation Network-to-Customer Installation-DS1 Metallic Interface VTOA AAL2 Trunking Narrowband Services DS1 IMA, E1 IMA, Enhanced DS1, DS3 ATM, DSP2C Voice Server, and OC-3c Single-Mode or Multi-Mode modules CSU/DSU loopback ANSI T1.404 Enhanced DS1, DS3 ATM, OC3c Single-Mode or Multi-Mode modules Network-to-Customer Installation-DS3 Metallic Interface GR-303 DLC Services ANSI T1.405 Network-to-customer Installation Interfaces- Direct-inward Dialing Analog Voice Grade Switched Access Using Loopreverse Battery Signaling GR-303 DLC Services ANSI T1.409 Network-to-Customer Installation Interfaces- Analog Voice Grade Special Access Lines Using E&M Signaling GR-303 DLC Services ANSI T1.602 VTOA AAL2 Trunking Narrowband Services Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)- Data-link Layer Signaling Specification for Application at the User-Network Interface GR-303 DLC Services ANSI T1.607; T1.607a VTOA AAL2 Trunking Narrowband Services T1.607a is for GR-303 DLC SerDigital Subscriber Signaling Sys- vices tem Number 1 (DSS1)-Layer 3 Signaling Specification for Circuit-switched Bearer Services PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-11 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name DS3 Frame Relay module Specification Title Notes CCITT G.703 Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical DIgital Interfaces DS3 Frame Relay module CCITT G.704 Synchronous Frame Structures Used at Primary and Secondary Hierarchical Levels DSL Forum TR 017 ATM over ADSL Recommendations Multi-serial and Quadserial module EIA-232 High Speed, Multi-serial, and Quadserial modules EIA-449 GR-303 DLC Services EIA-464-B VTOA AAL2 Trunking Narrowband Services Requirements for Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment High Speed, Multi-serial module, and Quadserial modules EIA-530 Electrical, mechanical, and functional standards for communication between computers, terminals and modems Faster version of RS-232-C; capable of longer cable runs Defines mechanical/electrical interfaces between DTEs and DCEs that transmit serial binary data ETSI 300 012-1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN); Basic User-Network Interface; Layer 1 Specification and Test Principles ETSI ISDN Support ETSI 300 125 PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-12 Annex C: Soft PVC Procedures Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title Notes ETSI 300 324-1 ITU-T G. 964 and G.965 are V5.1 Interface for the Support of functionally equivalent to ETSI EN 300 324-1 and ETSI EN 300 Access Network (AN) Part 1: 347-1 respectively. In cases V5.1 Interface Specification where detail differences exist between the ITU-T and ETSI versions of the specifications, the ETSI versions of the specifications should apply. ETSI 300 347-1 ITU-T G. 964 and G.965 are V5.2 Interface for the Support of functionally equivalent to ETSI EN 300 324-1 and ETSI EN 300 Access Network (AN) Part 1: 347-1 respectively. In cases V5.2 Interface Specification where detail differences exist between the ITU-T and ETSI versions of the specifications, the ETSI versions of the specifications should apply. ETSI 300 402-1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), Digital Subscriber Signaling System No. 1 (DSS1) Protocol; Data Link Layer, Part 1: General Aspects ETSI 300 402-2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN); Digital Subscriber System No. 1 (DSS1) protocol; Data Link Layer, Part 2: General Protocol Specification Channelized DS3, Channelized FRF.1.1 STS-1e, DS3 Frame Relay, User-to-Network (UNI) ImpleEnhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, mentation Agreement High-Density E1, Medium-Density DS1, Multi-Serial and Quadserial modules PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-13 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, DS3 Frame Relay, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1, Medium-Density DS1, Multi-Serial and Quadserial modules link management interface (LMI) services between two network-network interface (NNI) services Specification Title Notes FRF.2.1 Frame Relay Network-to-Network (NNI) Implementation Agreement LMI services between two NNI services Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, DS3 Frame Relay, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1, Medium-Density DS1, Quadserial, and Route Server modules FRF.5 In-band Management FRF.8 Frame Relay ATM/PVC Network Internetworking Implementation Agreement Channelized DS3, Channelized Frame Relay ATM/PVC Service STS-1e, DS3 Frame Relay, Internetworking ImplementaEnhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, tion Agreement High-Density E1, Medium-Density DS1, Multi-Serial, Quadserial, and Route Server modules AC 60, PSAX 20, PSAX 1250, PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 GR-63-CORE Tones and Announcements Server module GR-246-CORE Channelized STS-1e, Channelized DS3/STS-1e CES OC-3c APS, OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP MMSM modules GR-253-CORE GR-303 DLC Services GR-303-CORE Channelized DS3/STS1-e CES module Integrated Digital Loop Carrier System Generic Requirements, Objectives, and Interface D4 Support Stratum DS1 BITS Interfaces GR-436-CORE Stratum 3–4 modules Network Equipment Building Standards (NEBS): Physical Protection SONET Transport Systems Revision 1, Dec 1997: Common Generic Criteria Digital Network Synchronization Plan PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-14 for test capability Does not include the (ANSI T1.101-compliant Stratum 3–4 module, COMCODE 108484890) Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name OC-3c APS modules Specification Title Notes GR-474-CORE Section 8.3.1, Trouble NotificaAlarm and Control for Network tions for Protection Switches Elements OC-3c APS and OC-12c/STM-4c GR-499-CORE 1+1 APS/MSP MM/SM modules Common Requirements D4 Support Stratum DS1 BITS Interfaces Stratum 3–4 modules GR-518-CORE LSSGR: Synchronization, Section 18 Does not include the (ANSI T1.101-compliant Stratum 3–4 module, COMCODE 108484890) GR-820-CORE OTGR Section 5.1 Generic Transmission Surveillance Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, Enhanced DS1, Medium Density DS1, and Tones and Announcements Server modules GR-822-CORE For milliwatt test refer to Section 5.2.1.2 T1.207a For type 105 termination test, refer to Section 5.2.5 T1.207a and Section 6.1.2.3 For type 108 termination test, refer to Section 5.3.1 T1.207a and Section 6.1.2.4 AC 60, PSAX 20, PSAX 1250, PSAX 2300, PSAX 4500 GR-1089-CORE (NEBS) D4 Support Stratum DS1 BITS Interfaces GR-1244-CORE Stratum 3–4 modules I.610 OAM F4/F5 Processing (remote defect indication [RDI] and alarm indication signal [AIS]) OC-3c APS modules I.610 OAM F4/F5 Processing (remote defect indication [RDI] and alarm indication signal [AIS]) Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety—Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment Clocks for Synchronized Networks: Common Generic Criteria Does not include the (ANSI T1.101-compliant Stratum 3–4 module, COMCODE 108484890) GR-1248-CORE For OAM, refer to Table 4-1 Generic Requirements for oper- OAM Type/Function ations of ATM Network EleFor OC-3c APS modules, refer ments to Section 6.3 ATM APS Protection Switching GR-2980-CORE General Criteria for ATM Layer Protection Switching Mechanism Coordination protocol cell is used for automatic protection switching (APS) OC-3c APS modules PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-15 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title I.610 OAM F4/F5 Processing (remote defect indication [RDI] and alarm indication signal [AIS]) TR-NWT-00170 Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802.1D Ethernet module Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges Ethernet module IEEE 802.3 Notes Bellcore Digital Cross-Connect System Generic Requirements and Objectives Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Route Server module IETF RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol Route Server module IETF RFC 1058 Routing Information Protocol IETF RFC 1157 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Version 1.0 DS1 IMA, E1 IMA, Enhanced IETF RFC 1406 DS1, and Enhanced E1 modules Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1 and E1 Interface Types DS3 IMA, DS3 ATM, and E3 ATM modules IETF RFC 1407 Ethernet Bridging IETF RFC 1483 In-band Management Multi-Protocol Encapsulation and Layer 2 Bridging Service Ethernet and Route Server modules Route Server module Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS3 and E3 Interface Types Inverse ARP not supported IETF RFC 1490 Multiprotocol Interconnect over Frame Relay IETF RFC 1595 Definitions of Managed Objects for the SONET/SDH Interface Types PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-16 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title Notes IETF RFC 1661 Point-to-Point Protocol IETF RFC 1662 PPP in HDLC-like Framing IETF RFC 1700 Assigned Numbers Route Server module IETF RFC 1783 Trivial File Transfer Protocol Blocksize Option Route Server module Section 3.1 (authentication) and 3.5 (multicasting)only IETF RFC 1972 A Method for the Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks IETF RFC 2364 PPP Over AAL5 Route Server module IETF RFC 2427 Obsoletes RFC 1490 Multiprotocol Interconnect over Frame Relay Route Server module IETF RFC 2464 Obsoletes RFC 1972 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks Ethernet Bridging IETF RFC 2684 Obsoletes RFC 1483 Ethernet and Route Server modules Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 2685 (VPN identification) not supported ITU-T E.164 Overall Network Operation, telephone service, service operation, and human factors: Operation, numbering, routing and mobile services International operation- Numbering plan of the international telephone service DSP2C/D Voice Server modules ITU-T G.164 Fax/modem detection Transmission Systems and Media Apparatus Associated with Long-Distances Telephone Circuits and Other Terminal Equipment: Echo Suppressors PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-17 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name DSP2A, B, C, D Voice Server modules Echo cancellation (general) Specification Title Notes ITU-T G.165 General Characteristics of International Telephone Connections and International Telephone Circuits: Echo Cancellers ITU-T G.702 General Aspects of Digital Transmission Systems— Terminal Equipment: Digital Hierarchy Bit Rates ITU-T G.703 Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces 1.544 Mbps, 2.048 Mbps, 44.736 Mbps; includes channelassociated signaling (CAS) ABCD in-band signaling ITU-T G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8488 and 44 736 Kbps hierarchical levels ITU-T G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CGC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704 ITU-T G.707 Transmission Systems and Media—Digital transmission systems— Terminal equipment— General: Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) DSP2A, B, C, D Voice Server modules 64 Kbps fax encoding ITU-T G.711 General Aspects of Digital Transmission Systems Terminal Equipment: Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of Voice Frequencies PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-18 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name DSP2A, B, C, D Voice Server modules Voice compression (16, 24, 32, 40 Kbps) and tandem encoding Specification Title Notes ITU-T G.726 General Aspects of Digital Transmission Systems Terminal Equipment: 40, 32, 24, 16 Kbps Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) Annex A: Voice compression (8 ITU-T G.729 Kbps) General Aspects of Digital TransAnnex B: Silence suppression mission Systems: Coding of Speech at 8 Kbps Using Conjugate-Structure Algebraic-CodeExcited Linear-Prediction (CSACELP) ITU-T G.732 General Aspects of Digital Transmission Systems Terminal Equipments: Characteristics of Primary PCM Multiplex Equipment Operating at 2048 Kbit/s ITU-T G.736 General Aspects of Digital Transmission: Characteristics of a Synchronous Digital Multiplex Equipment Operating at 2048 kbits/sec ITU-T G.751 Digital multiplex equipments operating at the third order bit rate of 34 368 kbit/s and the fourth order bit rate of 139 264 Kbps and using positive justification OC-3c APS modules ITU-T G.783 Transmission Systems and Media, Digital Systems and Networks— Digital Transmission Systems—Terminal Equipment—Principal Characteristics of Multiplexing Equipment for the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy: Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Equipment Functional Blocks PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-19 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name DS3 ATM, Enhanced DS1, and Enhanced E1 modules Specification Title Notes ITU-T G.804 ATM cell mapping into Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) ITU-T G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 Kbps hierarchy Includes Multiplex Section Pro- ITU-T G.832 tection (MSP) Transmission Systems and Media, Digital Systems and Networks— Digital transmission systems—Digital networks— Network capabilities and functions: Transport of SDH Elements on PDH Networks—Frame and Multiplexing Structures STM-4c module ITU-T G.837 STM-4c module ITU-T G.841, Annex A Types and Characteristics of SDH Network Protection Architecture Issue 10/98 Intra-office and short haul ITU-T G.957 Long haul not supported Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy ITU-T G.964 ITU-T G. 964 and G.965 are V-Interfaces at the Digital Local functionally equivalent to ETSI EN 300 324-1 and ETSI EN 300 Exchange (LE)- V5.1 Interface 347-1 respectively. In cases (based on 2048 Kbps) for the Support of Access Network (AN) where detail differences exist between the ITU-T and ETSI versions of the specifications, the ETSI versions of the specifications should apply. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-20 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title ITU-T G.965 V-Interfaces at the Digital Local Exchange (LE) - V5.1 Interface (based on 2048 Kbps) for the Support Of Access Network (AN) Notes ITU-T G. 964 and G.965 are functionally equivalent to ETSI EN 300 324-1 and ETSI EN 300 347-1 respectively. In cases where detail differences exist between the ITU-T and ETSI versions of the specifications, the ETSI versions of the specifications should apply. ITU-T G.991.2 Draft: Single-pair high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) transceivers ITU-T G.992.1 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) transceivers ITU-T G.992.2 Splitterless Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) transceivers ITU-T I.121 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) General Structure and Service Capabilities: Broadband Aspects of ISDN ITU-T I.150 B-ISDN ATM Functional characteristics Enhanced DS1 and Enhanced E1 modules ITU-T I.233 Frame Mode Bearer Services ITU-T I.321 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Overall Network Aspects and Functions, ISDN User-Network Interfaces: BISDN Protocol Reference Model and its Application ITU-T I.356 ABR not supported B-ISDN ATM layer cell transfer performance PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-21 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name I.610 OAM F4/F5 Processing (remote defect indication [RDI] and alarm indication signal [AIS]) Specification Title Notes ITU-T I.361 B-ISDN ATM Layer Specification ITU-T I.363 B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer specification Only AAL1, AAL2, and AAL5 are supported ITU-T I.363.1 B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer specification: Type 1 AAL Multiplexing support ITU-T I.363.2 B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer specification: Type 2 AAL ITU-T I.363.5 B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer specification: Type 5 AAL VTOA AAL2 Trunking Narrowband Services ITU-T I.366.1 Facsimile Demodulation/ Remodulation ITU-T I.366.2 VTOA AAL2 Trunking Narrowband Services Segmentation and Reassembly Service Specific Convergence Sublayer for the AAL type 2 Annex M AAL Type 2 Specification on Convergence Sublayer for Narrow-band Services. DSP2C and DSP2D Voice Server modules Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, DS3 Frame Relay, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1,Medium-Density DS1, Multi-Serial, and Quadserial modules ITU-T I.370 Congestion Management for ISDN Frame Relay Bearing Service Channelized DS3, Channelized ITU-T I.371 STS-1e, DS3 Frame Relay, High- Traffic control and congestion Density E1, Medium-Density control in B-ISDN DS1, Multi-Serial and Quadserial modules PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-22 ABR not supported Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title Notes ITU-T I.372 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Overall Network Aspects and Functions: Frame Relaying Bearer Service Network-to-Network Interface Requirements ITU-T I.413 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) User-Network Interfaces: B-ISDN User-Network Interface ITU-T I.430 Basic User-Network Interface Layer 1 Specification Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, Channelized DS3/STS1e CES, DS3 Frame Relay, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, High-Density E1, Medium-Density DS1, Multi-Serial, and Quadserial modules ITU-T I.431 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) User-Network Interfaces: Primary Rate UserNetwork Interface—Layer 1 Specification Scrambling, header error conITU-T I.432 trol (HEC) processing, cell delin- B-ISDN User-Network Intereation face—Physical layer Specification ITU-T I.432.1 B-ISDN User-Network Interface: Physical Layer SpecificationGeneral Characteristics ITU-T I.432.2 B-ISDN User-Network- Physical Layer Specification: 155 520 Kbps and 622 080 Kbps operation ITU-T I.432.3 B-ISDN User-Network Interface: Physical Layer Specification for 1.544 Mbps and 2.048 Mbps PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-23 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title Notes ITU-T I.432.4 B-ISDN User-Network- Physical Layer Specification: 51 840 Kbps Operation Carrier Group AIS Alarm ITU-T I.610 Dual-homed PVCs B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions I.610 OAM F4/F5 Processing (remote defect indication [RDI] and alarm indication signal [AIS]) Channelized DS3, Channelized STS-1e, Channelized DS3/STS1e CES, DS3 ATM, E3 ATM, DS1 IMA, DS3 IMA, E1 IMA, Enhanced DS1, Enhanced E1, DSP2A/B/C/D Voice Server, High-Density E1, High Speed, Medium-Density DS1, MultiSerial, Quadserial OC-3c Single-Mode/Multi-Mode/APS, STM-1 Single-Mode/MultiMode/MSP, OC-12c/STM-4c modules and Unstructured DS3/E3 CES modules ITU-T Q.922 Annex A Digital Subscriber Signaling System No.1 (DSS 1) Data Link Layer: ISDN Data Link Layer Specification for Frame Mode Bearer Services ITU-T Q.921 Digital Subscriber Signaling system No. 1, ISDN User-Network interface- Data Link Layer Specification • AAL1 Trunking CCS (Q.931) ITU-T Q.931 • AAL1 Trunking CCS (Q.931/QSIG), AAL1 Trunking CAS Switching and Signaling - Digital subscriber Signalling System No. 1 - Network layer: Digital Subscriber Signaling System No. 1 (DSS 1) - ISDN User-Network Interface Layer 3 Specification for Basic Call Control • AAL2 Trunking CCS (Q.931) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-24 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title Notes ITU-T Q.933 Annex A Digital Subscriber Signaling System No. 1—Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Digital Subscriber Signaling System No. 1 (DSS 1)—Signaling Specifications for Frame Mode Switched and Permanent Virtual Connection Control and Status Monitoring ATM UNI interfaces (3.0, 3.1, 4.0) ITU-T Q.2110 ATM UNI interfaces (3.0, 3.1, 4.0) ITU-T Q.2130 B-ISDN SAAL Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol (SSCOP) B-ISDN SAAL Service Specific Coordination Function (SSCF) for Support of Signaling at the User-Network Interface ITU-T Q.2931 B-ISDN Application protocols for access signalling—Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network (B-ISDN)— Digital Subscriber Signalling System No. 2 (DSS 2)—User Network Interface (UNI) Layer 3 Specification For Basic Call/Connection Control ITU-T Q.2941.2 Draft: Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network (BISDN)- Digital Subscriber Signaling System No. 2 (DSS2): Generic identifier transport ( ITU-T Q.2971 B-ISDN—DSS 2—User-network interface layer 3 specification for point-to-multipoint call/connection control PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-25 Chapter A Reference Tables Industry Compliance Specifications Table Table A-4. Industry Compliance Specifications Feature Name/ Product Name Specification Title Notes ITU-T V.8 Procedures For Starting Sessions of Data Transmission Over the General Switched Telephone Network ITU-T V.25 Automatic Answering Equipment and General Procedures for Automatic Calling Equipment on the General Switched Telephone Network Including Procedures for Disabling of Echo Control Devices for Both Manually and Automatically Established Calls Enhanced DS1 and Enhanced E1 modules TR-TSU-001369 Multi-Serial module V.35 Generic Requirement for Frame Relay PVC Exchange Services Defines signaling for data rates greater than 19.2 Kbps for a trunk interface between network access device and a packet network Multi-Serial module X.21 bis CCITT Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment for Synchronous Operation of Public Data Networks, Recommendation X.21 Interface between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment for synchronous operation on public data networks X.144 User information transfer performance parameters for data networks providing international frame relay PVC service PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-26 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Interface Type by Connection Type Table Interface Type by Connection Type Table Terminal Emulation Virtual Interface APS/MSP Only: HDLC Pass-through GR-303 Frame Relay (UNI, NNI) CAS TrunkLine Bridge Circuit Emulation Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Connection ATM UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0 Interface ATM IISP (Network/User) ATM PNNI Table A-5. Interface Type by Connection Type Table AAL2 Trunking X X X X ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) PVC X X X X ATM-to-ATM virtual path connection (VPC) PVC X X X Bridge-to-ATM VCC PVC X X X Bridge-to-bridge PVC Circuit emulationto ATM VCC PVC X X X X X Circuit emulationto circuit emulation PVC Frame relay-toATM VCC PVC X X X Frame relay-toframe relay PVC X X X X X X X X In-band management ATM PVC X X X Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-ATM VCC PVC X X X VBR-to-VBR PVC X X ATM-to-ATM IISP constant bit rate (CBR) SVC X X X ATM-to-ATM IISP VBR SVC X X X ATM-to-ATM VCC SPVC X X X PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 X X X X Release 7.0 A-27 Chapter A Reference Tables Interface Type by I/O Module Type Table Circuit emulationto-ATM VCC SPVC X X X Frame relay-ATM VCC SPVC X X X VBR-to-ATM VCC SPVC X X X X Terminal Emulation Virtual Interface APS/MSP Only: HDLC Pass-through GR-303 Frame Relay (UNI, NNI) CAS TrunkLine Bridge Circuit Emulation Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Connection ATM UNI 3.0/3.1/4.0 Interface ATM IISP (Network/User) ATM PNNI Table A-5. Interface Type by Connection Type Table X X X X X X * Indicators in this column apply only to the OC-3c APS 1+1 MM/SM modules and the STM-1 MSP 1+1 MM/SM modules Interface Type by I/O Module Type Table Table A-6 shows the available interface types for each PacketStar PSAX I/O module used in the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway systems. This table does not include other PSAX modules that are not I/O modules, which include: the Alarm module, the DSP2x Voice Server modules, the Route Server module, and the Tones and Announcements Server module. HDLC Pass-through PRI ISDN (Network/User) X X X X Terminal Emulation GR-303 X Routing Frame Relay (UNI, NNI) X Module Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Emulation 6-Port Enhanced DS1/T1 Multiservice (DS1/T1 ENH) Circuit Emulation X CAS TrunkLine X Bridge ATM PNNI 1.0 X ATM UNI 3.0/3.1 ATM IMA 6-Port DS1 IMA (IMA DS1) Interface ATM UNI 4.0 ATM IISP (Network/User) Table A-6. Interface Types by I/O Module Types DS1/T1 Interface Modules X X PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-28 X X X X Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Interface Type by I/O Module Type Table X X X Terminal Emulation X Routing PRI ISDN (Network/User) X HDLC Pass-through X GR-303 12-Port MediumDensity DS1 Multiservice (MD DS1) Frame Relay (UNI, NNI) Module Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Emulation X Circuit Emulation ATM UNI 3.0/3.1 X CAS TrunkLine ATM UNI 4.0 X Bridge ATM PNNI 1.0 ATM IMA Interface ATM IISP (Network/User) Table A-6. Interface Types by I/O Module Types E1 Interface Modules 6-Port E1 IMA (IMA E1) X 6-Port Enhanced E1 Multiservice (E1 ENH) 21-Port High-Density E1 Multiservice (HD E1) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DS3 and E3 Interface Modules 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice (CH DS3) X 1-Port DS3 IMA (DS3 IMA) X X X X X X X X X 1-Port Unchannelized DS3 Frame Relay (DS3 FR) 2-Port DS3 ATM (DS3 X X X X X X X X ATM) 2-Port E3 ATM (E3 X X ATM) 3-Port Channelized DS3/STS-1e CES (CH DS3/STS-1E) X 3-Port Unstructured DS3/E3 CES (UNSTR DS3/E3 CES) X STS-1e Interface Modules PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-29 Chapter A Reference Tables Interface Type by I/O Module Type Table X X X X X Terminal Emulation X Routing PRI ISDN (Network/User) X HDLC Pass-through X GR-303 1-Port Channelized STS-1e, T1 Format (CH STS-1E T1) Frame Relay (UNI, NNI) Module Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Emulation Circuit Emulation CAS TrunkLine Bridge ATM UNI 3.0/3.1 ATM UNI 4.0 ATM PNNI 1.0 ATM IMA Interface ATM IISP (Network/User) Table A-6. Interface Types by I/O Module Types OC-3c Interface Modules 1-Port OC-3c Multimode with AQueMan (OC-3C (MM AQ)) X X X X 1-Port OC-3c Single-Mode with AQueMan (OC-3C (SM AQ)) X X X X 1-Port OC-3c Multimode with Traffic Shaping (OC-3C (MM TS)) X X X X 1-Port OC-3c Single-Mode with Traffic Shaping (OC-3C (SM TS)) X X X X 1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS Multimode (OC-3C MM APS) X X X X 1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS Single-Mode (OC-3C SM APS) X X X X 1-Port STM-1 Multimode with AQueMan (STM-1 (MM AQ)) X X STM-1 Interface Modules X PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-30 X Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Interface Type by I/O Module Type Table X X X X 1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP Multimode (STM-1 MM MSP) X X X X 1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP Single-Mode (STM-1 SM MSP) X X X X Terminal Emulation 1-Port STM-1 Single-Mode with Traffic Shaping (STM-1 (SM TS)) Routing X PRI ISDN (Network/User) X HDLC Pass-through X GR-303 X Frame Relay (UNI, NNI) 1-Port STM-1 Multimode with Traffic Shaping (STM-1 (MM TS)) Module Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Emulation X Circuit Emulation X CAS TrunkLine ATM UNI 3.0/3.1 X Bridge ATM UNI 4.0 X ATM IMA 1-Port STM-1 Single-Mode with AQueMan (STM-1 (SM AQ)) Interface ATM IISP (Network/User) ATM PNNI 1.0 Table A-6. Interface Types by I/O Module Types OC-12c/STM-4c Interface Modules 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP Multimode (OC-12C/STM-4C MM) X X X X 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP Single-Mode (OC-12C/STM-4C SM) X X X X Voice 2-Wire Interface Modules 4-Port Voice 2-Wire Office (VOICE 2WO) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 X Release 7.0 A-31 Chapter A Reference Tables Minimum AAL2 Trunk Size Requirements Tables Terminal Emulation Routing PRI ISDN (Network/User) GR-303 Frame Relay (UNI, NNI) HDLC Pass-through Module Dynamic Bandwidth Circuit Emulation Circuit Emulation CAS TrunkLine Bridge ATM UNI 3.0/3.1 ATM UNI 4.0 ATM PNNI 1.0 ATM IMA Interface ATM IISP (Network/User) Table A-6. Interface Types by I/O Module Types X 8-Port Voice 2-Wire Station (VOICE 2WS) Serial Interface Modules 2-Port High Speed (HIGH SPEED) X Quadserial (QUAD X X X X X* X X X X X X X X SERIAL) 6-Port Multiserial (SERIAL) X Ethernet Interface Module Ethernet (ENET) X X * Port 2 only. Minimum AAL2 Trunk Size Requirements Tables Setting up channels with multiplex structure helps reduce delay of traffic. If a trunk is configured to have at least one active channel, one cell must be sent out every 20 ms; thus, the minimum trunk size is 50 cps. At 8 Kbps, Lucent recommends two channels with multiplex structure. On the DSP2C module, you can configure up to 64 AAL2 trunk groups, so that if you want to use all 128 channels (or 224 for echo cancel mode), you must set up the multiplex structure. Table A-7 summarizes bandwidth savings at different compression rates. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-32 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Minimum AAL2 Trunk Size Requirements Tables Table A-7. Standard AAL2 Bandwidth Calculation* Compression Rate (in Kbps) Data Bytes /sec Data + Overhead Calculation Data + Overhead /sec Cells/sec calculation Cells /sec Average Expected cells/sec with silence enabled 64 8000 8000/40*43 8600 8600/47 183 92 40 5000 5000/25*28 5600 5600/47 120 60 32 4000 4000/20*23 4600 4600/47 98 49 24 3000 3000/15*18 3600 3600/47 77 39 16 2000 2000/10*13 2600 2600/47 56 28 8 1000 1000/5/2*13 1300 1300/47 28 14 * If a trunk has at least one active channel, a cell must be sent out every 20 msec; therefore, the minimum AAL2 trunk size is 50 cps. Example Using Table A-7 Data for 32 Kbps At 32 Kbps compression rate (from Table A-7): For sending 4,000 voice samples (bytes) per second, including the AAL2 header in cells per second (cps) in the calculation: 4,000 samples / 20 samples received from DSP x 23 bytes to be packed into an AAL2 cell, where 23 bytes = 20 bytes of data in the cps packet and 3 bytes for the cps-header. With 47 data bytes in the AAL2 cell, the cell rate = 4600/47 ~= 98 The expected cell rate with silence is: 98/2 = 49. The cell rates for Lucent nonmultiplexed AAL2 remain unchanged, as shown in Table A-8. Table A-8. AAL2 Non-Mutiplexed Transmission Rates Compression Rate (in Kbps) Cell/sec 64 200 40 200 32 100 24 100 16 50 8 25 Table A-9 shows the Standard AAL2 Bandwidth Calculation for ATM Forum Profile 6. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-33 Chapter A Reference Tables Module Alarm Status Table Table A-9. Standard AAL2 Bandwidth Calculation for ATM Forum Profile 6* Compression Rate (in Kbps) Data Bytes /sec Data + Overhead Calculation Data + Overhead /sec Cells/sec calculation Cells /sec Average Expected cells/sec with silence enabled 32 4000 4000/40*43 4300 4300/47 92 46 64† 8000 8000/40*43 8600 8600/47 183 92 * If a trunk has at least one active channel, a cell must be sent out every 20 msec; therefore, the minimum AAL2 trunk size is 50 cps. † This rate is the same as the ITU Standard. Fax Relay Using AAL2 Requirements Table A-10 shows the cell rate for fax relay modulation/demodulation. Changing rates of 8 Kbps to 14.4 Kbps fax requires an additional 14 cells/sec. Changing rates of 8 Kbps to 12.0 Kbps fax requires an additional 8 cells/sec. Changing rates of 8 Kbps to 9.6 Kbps fax requires an additional 1 cell/sec. Fax relay mode contains 20 msec of data for every CPS packet, so the cell rate is more efficient than for voice codec. The change in bandwidth is controlled by the DSP host code. If insufficient bandwidth is available on the AAL2 trunk, the fax will be forced to a lower rate. DSP resources must be available or the fax will fail. In addition, fax modem bypass or fax relay/modem bypass is supported if enough bandwidth is available on the AAL2 trunk. Table A-10. Standard AAL2 Bandwidth Calculation for Fax Relay Mode on the DSP2C Module Compression Rate (in Kbps) Data Bytes /sec Data + Overhead Calculation Data + Overhead /sec Cells/sec calculation Cells /sec Average Expected cells/sec with silence enabled 14.4 1800 1800/(36*39) 1950 1950/47 42 N/A 12.0 1500 1500/(30*33) 1650 1850/47 36 N/A 9.6 1200 1200/(24*27) 1350 1350 29 N/A Module Alarm Status Table The Alarm Status field on the Equipment Configuration window displays the current status of all PacketStar I/O, server, and common equipment modules PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-34 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Module Alarm Status Table in the PSAX system. The alarm status descriptions are provided in Table A-11. Table A-11. Alarm Status Descriptions for PSAX Modules Number Alarm Status Description 1 NoAlarm/CardPresent I/O No module is inserted in the chassis. 2 WrongCardType I/O One type of module was configured in this slot in the chassis, but a different module now occupies this slot. 3 LineFailed All The line has failed. 4 CardRemoved All A module has been configured and then removed. 5 ReferenceClock- Stratum Failed The timing reference clock has failed. 6 CompositeClock- Stratum Failed The timing composite clock has failed. 7 Overload Power Supply The Power Supply is operating under an overload condition. 8 Plus5vFailed Power Supply The 5 V Power Supply has failed. 9 Plus120vFailed Power Supply The 120 V ac Power Supply has failed. 10 Minus48vFailed Power Supply The -48 V dc Power Supply has failed. 11 UnknownAlarm I/O The reason for failure is not known. 12 CompleteClockFailed Stratum The timing complete clock has failed. 13 BackplaneCircuitryFailed All The chassis backplane circuit board is not operating. 14 PowerFailed Power Supply Power failed PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Module Type Affected Release 7.0 A-35 Chapter A Reference Tables Quality of Service (QoS) Table Quality of Service (QoS) Table Table A-12 details the PSAX system support of defined ATM quality of service (QoS) classes. Table A-12. PSAX System-Supported Service Classes ATM Service Class Description Constant Bit Rate (CBR) This service operates on a connection basis and offers consistent delay predictability. CBR is used for applications such as circuit emulation, voice, and video. Variable Bit Rate—Real Time (VBR-RT) This service operates on a connection basis and offers very low delay variance but requires access to a variable amount of network bandwidth. VBR-RT is used for such applications as packet video and voice. Variable Bit Rate—Nonreal Time (VBR-NRT) This service operates on both a connection and connectionless basis and allows delay variance between the delivery of cells. VBR-NRT is used for data applications that have potentially bursty traffic characteristics, including LAN interconnections, CAD/CAM, and multimedia. This class can be used to support switched multimegabit data service (SMDS). Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) This service operates on a connection basis and allows for raw cell or best-effort transport by the network. In UBR service, cells are transported by the network whenever bandwidth is available and traffic is presented by the user. Data using UBR service is more apt to be discarded during peak traffic times in deference to data using other classes of service. Table A-13 illustrates the attributes of the classes of service supported by the Multiservice Media Gateway system software. Table A-13. Class of Service Descriptions Constant Bit Rate (CBR) QoS Class Class 1 Class 2 Classes 3, 4 Applications Voice and video Packet video and voice Data Bit Rate Variable Constant PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-36 Variable Bit Rate Real Variable Bit Time Rate Non-real Unspecified Bit (VBR-RT) Time (VBR-NRT) Rate (UBR) Class 5 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Chapter A Reference Tables Quality of Service (QoS) Table Table A-13. Class of Service Descriptions Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Timing Required at Source or Destination Variable Bit Rate Real Variable Bit Time Rate Non-real Unspecified Bit (VBR-RT) Time (VBR-NRT) Rate (UBR) Required Not required Service Examples Private line Compressed voice Frame relay, switched multimedia data service Raw cell, Ethernet AAL 1 2 3/4 and 5 3/4 and 5 The following two tables illustrate how ATM classes of service correspond to internal priority levels as the AQueMan algorithm functions. Table A-14 identifies the cell loss and cell delay tolerance of each service class, with internal priorities. Table A-15 lists the class-of-service choices available when configuring PVC connections on a Multiservice Media Gateway system and shows service examples for each PVC connection type. The examples are intended simply as illustrations and will need fine-tuning based on the network applications supported by the Multiservice Media Gateway system. The flexibility of the Multiservice Media Gateway system allows you to tailor the system based on the required service applications by selecting the appropriate priority levels. Table A-14. Cell Loss and Cell Delay Characteristics of ATM Service Classes QoS Classes ATM Classes of Supported by Service PSAX Systems Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Cell Loss Tolerance Cell Delay Tolerance Internal Priority Class 1 High Very Low CBR-1 Class 1 High Very Low CBR-2 Class 1 High Low CBR-3 Class 1 High Low CBR-4 Class 2 Very Low Very Low VBR-1 Class 2 Variable Bit Class 2 Rate, Real Time (VBR-RT) Low Low VBR-2 Low Low VBR-3 Variable Bit Rate, Non-real Time Classes 3, 4 Low Medium VBR-4 Classes 3, 4 Low High VBR-5 Very High Very High VBR-6 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) (VBR-NRT) Unspecified Bit Class 5 Rate (UBR) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 A-37 Chapter A Reference Tables Quality of Service (QoS) Table Table A-15. Mapping ATM Service Classes to Multiservice Media Gateway System Priority Levels ATM Classes of Service Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Internal Priority PVC Connection Configuration Selections Service Examples CBR-1 CBR1 911 calls CBR-2 CBR2 Preferred customers CBR-3 CBR3 Standard CBR-4 CBR4 Cellular Variable Bit Rate VBR-1 (VBR) VBR-express Network management Variable Bit Rate VBR-2 VBR-RT1 Real-time videos Real Time (VBR-RT) VBR-RT2 MPEG 1-2/JPEG Variable Bit Rate VBR-4 VBR-NRT1 Frame relay data Nonreal Time VBR-5 VBR-NRT2 FTP/e-mail transfer VBR-6 UBR Internet Protocol data VBR-3 (VBR-NRT) Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 A-38 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary Numeric 1+1 APS (automatic protection switching) In a North American SONET, 1+1 protection switching is commonly referred to as automatic protection switching (APS). See APS for additional information. 1+1 MSP (multiplex section protection) In a European synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) network, 1+1 protection switching is commonly referred to as multiplex section protection (MSP). See MSP for additional information. 100Base-T This IEEE standard specifies the transmission of data at 100 Mbps on Ethernet networks. 10Base-T This IEEE standard (802.3) specifies the transmission of data at 10 Mbps on Ethernet networks with twisted-pair cabling and a wiring hub, referred to as a 10Base-T hub. 10-nibble header space In a protocol data unit (PDU), the 40 bits of protocol control information located at the beginning of the PDU. 5ESS switch A digital central office electronic switching system made by Lucent, typically used at an end office, which serves local subscribers. A AAL ATM adaptation layer. The protocol layer that allows multiple applications to have data converted to and from the ATM cell. AAL also refers to a protocol that is used to translate higher layer services into the size and format of an ATM cell. AAL1 ATM adaptation layer type 1. This layer supports Class A traffic (uncompressed, digitized voice and video). AAL2 ATM adaptation layer type 2. This layer supports Class B traffic (variable bit rate compressed voice and video). AAL2 trunking A communication line established between two switching systems that supports Class B traffic (AAL2). AAL3/4 ATM adaption layer 3/4. This layer supports Class C and D traffic (variable bit rate compressed voice and video). AAL5 ATM adaptation layer type 5. This layer supports Class C traffic (connection-oriented variable bit rate [VBR] data traffic and signaling messages, used predominantly for classical IP [CLIP] over ATM and LAN Emulation [LANE] traffic) ABCD signaling bits Bits robbed from bytes in each DS0 or T1 channel in particular subframes, which are then used to carry in-band all status information. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 Glossary-1 Glossary ABR available bit rate. ABR changes after a connection is established, and allows the receiving device to accept data from a variety of transmitting devices which are operating at different speeds, without the need to set up data rates in advance. ACELP algebraic code excited linear prediction. This voice-coding algorithm standardized by the ITU-T in G.729 provides voice compression. ACELP is specified by the Frame Relay Forum as one of the minimum voice compression algorithms required for network-to-network interoperability. active/standby mode Alternate terms for working/protection. See Automatic protection switching. adaption service permanent virtual circuit See AS-PVC. adaptive differential pulse code mod- See ADPCM. ulation address A data structure or logical convention used to identify a device on a network. address mask A bit combination used to describe which portion of an address refers to the network or subnet, and which portion refers to the host. address resolution protocol See ARP. administrative weight See AW. administrator A user who has full read-write capabilities on all PSAX devices managed by the AQueView® Element Management System. ADPCM adaptive differential pulse code modulation. This type of audio encoding is a reduced bit rate variant of PCM audio encoding, which uses fewer bits by determining the difference between consecutive speech samples. advertising In the context of packet switching, a reference to routing or service updates that are sent at specified intervals. This method allows other routers on the network to maintain lists of usable routes. aggregation A reference to an instance when the border nodes at the ends of an outside link assign a token number to the outside link, and the same number is associated with all uplinks associated with the outside link (an aggregation token). In the parent and all higher-level peer groups, all uplinks with the same aggregation token are aggregated. AIS alarm indication signal. This signal is used in-band maintenance to ensure that a line is working properly. alarm An message that warns an administrator about a network problem. alarm indication signal See AIS. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-2 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary A-Law This ITU-T companding standard used in PCM systems for conversion between analog and digital signals. The A-Law standard is primarily used in European telephone networks. algebraic code excited linear prediction See ACELP. alterable mark inversion See AMI. alternating current See AC. American National Standards Institute See ANSI. American Standard Code for Information Exchange See ASCII. AMI alterable mark inversion. The signaling format used for T1 lines. This format allows the “one” pulses to have an alternating priority. analog Voice vibrations converted to electrical signals which have frequencies with varying amplitudes. An analog signal implies continuous operation, in contrast to a digital signal, which is broken up into individual bits of data. ANSI American National Standards Institute. This organization is a U.S. standards body that accredits standards for programming languages, communications, and networking. It is also the U.S. representative to the International Organization for Standardization. API application program (or programming) interface. A software routine which uses a specialized language and message format to communicate between an application program and another program, or operating system, that provides services to it. Standard software interrupts, calls, and data formats are used to initiate contact with network services, mainframe communications programs, telephone equipment, or program-to-program applications. application program interface (also application programming interface) See API. APS automatic protection switching. This feature provides network resiliency by automatically switching to a secondary line when the primary line fails or is operating on an unacceptably high error rate. SONET allows either 1+1 or 1:N architecture. The 1+1 architecture has permanent electrical bridging at both ends of the serviced equipment. At the transmit end, identical signals are transmitted over primary and secondary circuits and then tested at the receive end. The 1:N protection switch architecture is one in which any of the “N” (any number of) service channels (primary circuits) can be bridged to a single optical protection channel (secondary circuit). PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 Glossary-3 Glossary AQueMan algorithm A traffic management system that also supports ATM Forum classes of service. This adaptive algorithm allocates bandwidth by statistically multiplexing traffic within two sets of queues according to weighted priorities. One set of queues addresses the avoidance of cell loss, which is normally a concern for data traffic, while the other manages cell transfer delay, which is critical to voice and some video traffic. Within each set of queues, the AQueMan algorithm assigns internal priorities even more specialized than the ATM Forum class definitions. Generally, the lower the assigned priority number, the greater the access to bandwidth and the less likelihood of loss. AQueView® Element Management System This PacketStar software product is a graphical user interface (GUI)-based element management tool that is used to provision the PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway systems. The AQueView system enables a network of PSAX products to be managed and provisioned with easy-to-use windows from a single location. architecture The design of the hardware and software components of a system that controls how all the various components interoperate with each other and with other devices or systems. ARP address resolution protocol. This low-level protocol maps IP addresses, or other non-ATM addresses to the target ATM device. Once the ATM device has been identified, an ARP server can send it data, as long as the session is maintained. ASCII American Standard Code for Information Exchange. This coding standard specifies the representation of characters in a binary format. AS-PVC adaption service permanent virtual circuit. This type of circuit allows ATM adaptation services to be connected by ATM switched virtual circuits. AS-PVC specifies parameters (such as circuit emulation) for the sending device, specifying the receiving device. asynchronous transfer mode See ATM. ATM asynchronous transfer mode. This cell-switching technology converts multiple incoming streams of information into fixedlength cells of 53 bytes, that are composed of a 48-byte information field and a five-byte address header. ATM enables high-speed transmission of data, voice, and video over the same lines, at speeds up to 13.22 Gbps. ATM adaptation layer See AAL. ATM addressing This addressing scheme enables an operating system to find a specific piece of ATM information in the application memory. Every memory location has an address. ATM addressing provides user-specific virtual path identifier/virtual channel identifier (VPI/VCI) coding, bandwidth allocation, and quality of service (Qos) information. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-4 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary ATM edge switch A device that resides at the edge of a carrier network and provides access from the end user to a carrier's ATM network backbone. ATM Forum This organization is a consortium of corporations who develop hardware and software products using ATM to facilitate the development, deployment, and standardization of ATM protocols and specifications. ATM Forum Implementation Agree- The formal documents use for the implementation of the ments standards for ATM specifications agreed on by the ATM Forum. ATM interface management entities ATM terminal emulation interface See IME. Terminal emulation is an application that follows an intelligent computing device to mimic the operation of a nonprogrammable terminal for communication with a mainframe computer or a minicomputer. This communication is made possible by inserting special printed circuit boards into the systemboard of the emulating device, and/or special software. The PacketStar PSAX 6-Port Multiserial module supports this interface. ATM traffic policing This software feature provides basic data on the amount and type of ATM traffic handled by the network. ATM UNI ATM user-network interface. The interface between a user's equipment and an ATM public network service or into an ATM switch on a private enterprise network. ATM virtual channel This type of channel provides a virtual connection that uses all the addressing bits of the cell header to move traffic from one link to another. authentication A procedure that establishes the legitimacy of users and defines the parameters of the sessions they establish. Authentication can be thought of as a security measure that controls and defines network access. It is always the first task performed when a session is started. The range of authentication parameters that can be set depend upon the specific authentication system employed. automatic protection switching See APS. automatic switchback An automatic return from the backup CPU module to the primary CPU module is performed by the system, after a fault line has been cleared. available bit rate See ABR. AW administrative weight. This parameter allows network architects to indicate relative link preference when deciding between alternate routes. B B channel A channel that carries 56-Kbps or 64-Kbps of user data on a line using ISDN D-channel signaling. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 Glossary-5 Glossary B8ZS bipolar 8-zero substitution. This encoding scheme is used for transmitting data bits over T1 transmission systems. This scheme is “smarter” than the B7ZS scheme, because it transparently adds a one-bit as needed to ensure that no more than seven zero-bits are ever transmitted in a row. However, unlike the B7ZS scheme, the B8ZS scheme provides a “clear channel” capability, which allows each of the 24 channels to carry 64 Kbps of data. backbone The portion of a communications network that carries the heaviest traffic and employs high-speed transmission pathways. In a wide area network (WAN), the backbone is that portion that links all the individual local area networks (LANs) together. backhauling A technique in which data traffic is transmitted beyond where it is needed and back. In fiber-optic data transmission, backhauling is a traffic management technique used to diminish the cost of multiplexing and demultiplexing. backplane A circuit board in a chassis in which various modules or components are connected to the central processing unit. Typically, a backplane runs at a very high capacity bandwidth, and carries a high number of connections, addressing information, and signaling. A backplane is also sometimes called the backplane bus. backward direction rate This rate is the rate of speed data transmissions take as they move toward the head-end of a broadband LAN. bandwidth The amount of data a channel can transmit in a given period of time. Bandwidth is measured in bits (not bytes) per second on digital networks, while on analog networks, it is measured in Hertz (cycles per second). bandwidth classification The types of bandwidth are narrowband, wideband, and broadband, and are used to describe the capacity of a communications channel. Narrowband generally refers to some number of 64 Kbps channels (Nx64) and provides aggregate bandwidth less than 1.544 Mbps (24x64 Kbps, or T1 rate). Wideband is 1.544 Mbps to 45 Mbps (T1 to T3 rate), while broadband operates at 45 Mbps (T3 rate) or higher. basic rate interface See BRI. Bc committed burst size. This parameter is used in frame relay, and is the maximum number of bits transferred during time interval “T.” Time interval “T” is the time interval over which the number of bits used to average the number of bits transmitted is averaged. The formula to calculate “T” is:Bc/CIR = T. Be excess burst size. This parameter is used in frame relay, and is the maximum number of uncommitted bits transferred during time interval “T”. The formula to calculate “T” is: Bc/CIR = T. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-6 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary bearer channel This basic communication channel has no enhanced or valueadded services other than bandwidth transmission capability. Bellcore (this organization is now known as Telcordia Technologies) The research and development arm formed by the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs). Bellcore, now Telcordia Technologies, focused on developing standards and procedures for the RBOCs. A prime example is the Bellcore standard NEBS, Network Equipment Building Standards. Network carriers who interoperate with RBOCs typically are required to obtain Level 3 NEBS compliance on their telecommunications equipment. BER bit error rate. This parameter is the ratio of error bits to the total number of bits transmitted, usually expressed as a number to the power of 10. binaries Software programs written in binary, machine-readable code that has been compiled or assembled. bipolar 8 Zero substitution See B8ZS. B-ISDN Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network. This type of communications channel has the capability to integrate any type of communications signals (voice, data, image, or multimedia) and carry them over a single broadband channel at 150 Mbps, and higher. bit The term indicating a binary digit, which represents the value high or low, or yes or no. A bit is written as either the value zero or the value 1. bit error rate See BER. bit stuffing The technique of inserting a zero-bit into a string of one-bits to prevent the receiver from interpreting the series of one-bits as something else, such as a flag control character. The sender inserts the zero-bit automatically, and the receiver automatically deletes it. BITS building integrated timing supply. A single-building master timing that provides and distributes timing to a wireline network’s lower levels. bits per second See bps. block-error correction scheme This scheme provides a method for accomplishing forward error correction (FEC) to compensate for error bursts created in data transmission. This method is done by specifying a polynominal that plots, or statistically samples, a large number of points in a data block. bps bits per second. This unit of measure indicates the number of bits transmitted every second during data transmission. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 Glossary-7 Glossary BRI basic rate interface. This interface is composed of two B-channels (bearer channels) at 64 Kbps and a data D-channel (data channel) at 16 Kbps. The bearer B-channels are designed for PCM voice, slow-scan video conferencing, Group 4 facsimile data, or other types of data that can fit into a full-duplex 64,000 bps channel. The D-channel used to receive information about incoming calls and to transmit information about outgoing calls. It is also used for accessing slow-speed data networks, such as packet-switched networks. bridge A link that connects several LANs, but provides no routing. Each bit of information is transferred to all other bridges on the LANs, which creates the potential for a bridge to clog a network. Routers have generally replaced bridges. bridging A link across a circuit that is made by placing one test lead from a test set or a conductor from another circuit and placing it on one conductor of another circuit, and then doing the same thing to the second conductor. broadband In a WAN environment, a description of a transmission capability greater than 45 Mbps (T3 rate), that frequently operates on a fiber- optic transmission line. Broadband Integrated Services Digi- See B-ISDN. tal Network bucket A discrete sample of data. building integrated timing supply See BITS. burst errors Transmission errors that occur when data is transmitted in short spurts. bursty A reference to data that is transmitted in short spurts. Traffic over a local area network is usually bursty. bus 1. An electrical connection allowing two or more wires or lines to be connected together. Common in electrical and computer use. 2. Broadcast and Unknown Server (an ATM term), working in conjunction with a LAN emulation server, the bus automatically registers and resolves differences between LAN MAC addresses and ATM addresses by labeling each device transmission with both addresses. byte A series of consecutive binary digits operated upon as a unit. C CAC connection admission control. The set of actions a network takes during a call setup or renegotiation phase that determine whether to accept or reject a connection request. CAD/CAM Computer Aid Design/ Computer Aided Manufacturing. A computer and its related software and terminals that is used to design and manufacture things. CAD terminals are often run over LANs and/or WANs. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-8 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary call control A term used by the telephone companies to describe the setting up, monitoring, and tearing down of telephone calls. First Person Call Control is done by a person or a computer via a desktop telephone, or a computer attached to that telephone, or the computer attached to the desktop phone line. Third-party call control controls the call through a connection directly to the switch (PBX). call controller A device that sets up, monitors, and tears down telephone calls. call establishing procedure See CEP. call multiplexing When a Multiservice Media Gateway switches back and forth between a number of instruction sequences so rapidly it seems like several tasks are being executed simultaneously. This rapid switching means that no one transaction can overload the Multiservice Media Gateway while other transactions have their service requests neglected. call states A condition that exists on both the user side and the network side of the transaction. They define which messages can be accepted by the user or the network entity, and how they are expected to react to those messages. As the user or network entity moves from call state to call state, the call switching process is accomplished. caller ID A service, offered by local telephone companies, that displays the calling party's number on a special display device. CAPs Competitive Access Providers. Businesses that compete with the local telephone networks. carrier-grade The classification for a device that has passed safety and environmental compliance certifications and has "4-9s" or "5-9s" reliability (i.e., 99.99% online during 1 year, or 99.999% online during 1 year). Reliability is obtained by having redundant power supplies, clocks, CPUs, etc., as well as protected trunk lines. For example, if a fiber gets cut by a backhoe, the traffic automatically switches to a different fiber. CAS channel-associated signaling. Signaling in which the signals necessary to switch a given circuit are transmitted via the circuit itself, or via a signaling channel permanently associated with it. CBR constant bit rate. An ATM service that supports a constant or guaranteed rate to transport services such as video or voice, as well as circuit emulation. CBR requires rigorous timing control and performance parameters. CCITT Consultive Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy, formerly known as the United National International Telecommunications Union, or ITU. This organization establishes technical recommendations for telephone and data transmission. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 255-700-171 Release 7.0 Glossary-9 Glossary CCS common-channel signaling. A high-speed, packet-switched communications network, distinctive from public packet switched and message networks. CCS is used to carry addressed signaling messages for individual trunk circuits and/or database-related services between signaling points in the CCS network. CD-ROM Compact Disk, Read-Only Memory. A disk on which large amounts of digitized read-only data can be stored. CE 1. circuit emulation. A connection over a virtual channelbased network which provides service that is indistinguishable from a real, point-to-point, fixed bandwidth circuit. 2. Communities European. See EC for additional information. 3. connection end point. An ATM term. cell The fixed-length packet used to carry data across an ATM network. A cell consists of 53 bytes, five of which carry header information. cell delineation An instance when an idle cell with header error correction is transmitted when there are no real cells to send. Indicator bits 14 or 15 are used to indicate Loss of Cell Delineation to a Central Office. The receiver will then drop both idle and unassigned cells. cell encoding Based on a user-selected encoding rate for the connection, cell encoding occurs when source-data cell payloads are divided into six blocks and fed into a Reed Solomon encoder. The encoded cells are then executed by the CPU module on the cell payload data destined for noisy interfaces. cell extraction The removal of a cell from a data stream. cell header A cell header precedes payload data (user information) in an ATM cell. The header contains various control data specific to the cell switching protocol. cell loss margin See CLM. cell loss priority See CLP. cell payload A cell data field, block, or stream being processed or transported. Also, sometimes a reference to the part of a cell that represents information useful to the user, as opposed to system overhead information. A cell payload includes user information and may include such additional information as userrequested network management and accounting information. cell scrambling A function that moves the first three bytes of the cell header (GFC, VPI, and VCI fields) into the payload and spreads them out to protect against burst errors. This action increases the burst error tolerance of the header from 5 bits to 54 bits with no cell loss. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-10 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary cell-aging A capability that prevents the lowest-priority data (for example, IP data) from being buffered in the PSAX system indefinitely. The AQueMan algorithm keeps track of how long each cell stays in the buffer. The lower the priority of the traffic, the longer its cell-aging timer; that is, UBR traffic has a longer cell-aging period than VBR-RT traffic. This capability allows the PSAX system to periodically send low-priority cells through the network, which prevents retransmission of IP data traffic while increasing the time-out window for the TCP/IP sessions. The cell-aging mechanism allows for orderly decongestion of the network without resorting to traffic rerouting and other complicated protocols and procedures. cell-bearing Cell information moved over a communications channel. central office See CO. Central Processing Unit See CPU. CEP call establishing procedure. A procedure that defines how the bits of a PCM carrier system of the 32 channel European type T1/E1 will be used, and in what sequence. In order to correctly receive the transmitted information, the receiving end equipment must know exactly what each bit is used for. CES circuit mmulation service. An ATM Forum interoperability specification which supports CBR (constant bit rate) over ATM networks and complies with other ATM specifications. This specification also supports the emulation of existing time division multiplexing (TDM) circuits over ATM networks. channel A voice-grade transmission facility with defined frequency response, gain, and bandwidth (i.e., a DSPx voice processing module hardware chip). channel-associated signaling See CAS. channel service unit See CSU. channel suppression The inhibition of a portion of a line’s bandwidth. channel tunneling A way of overcoming protocol restrictions on a network by encapsulating channels that use one protocol inside channels that use a protocol supported by the network. channelization A process that subdivides the bandwidth of a circuit into smaller increments called channels. Typically, each channel would carry a single transmission, such as voice only or data only. Channelization requires either a frequency division multiplexer or a time division multiplexer. channelized circuit emulation service A virtual DS1 port that is subdivided into 24 DS0 channels that provides a connection over a virtual channel-based network, providing service to the end use that is indistinguishable from a real, point-to-point, fixed bandwidth circuit. channelized digital signals Subdivided digital signals. characters per second See cps. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-11 Glossary chassis A reference to the physical hardware, frame, and motherboard into which are inserted the power supply, stratum, CPU, and I/O modules. The supporting legs and brackets are not considered to be part of the chassis. checksum The sum of a group of data items used for checking errors. chip Short for microchip, an very complex, yet tiny module that stores computer memory or provide logic circuitry for microprocessors. A chip is manufactured from a silicon (or, in some special cases, a sapphire) wafer, which is first cut to size and then etched with circuits and electronic devices. A chip is also sometimes called an IC or integrated circuit. chipset A group of microchips designed to work and be sold as a unit that performs one or more related functions. CIR committed information rate. The speed at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information under normal conditions, averaged over a minimal increment of time. CIR is measured in bits per second. circuit emulation See CE. circuit emulation service See CES. circuit mode data Data that travels across a fixed bandwidth circuit established from point-to-point through a network, and is held for the duration of a telephone call. circuit-switched network A network that sets up and maintains a connection for the exclusive use of two or more communicating parties for the duration of their call. The familiar, voice telephone network is circuit-switched. clear channel A digital circuit where no framing or control bits are required, thus making the full bandwidth available for communications. CLEC Competitive Local Exchange Carrier. A type of business permitted by the Telecommunications Act of 1996. CLECs offer local exchange service, long distance, internal, Internet access and such entertainment as video on demand. These carriers include cellular/PCS providers, ISPs, IXCs, CATV providers, CAPs, LMDS operators, and power utilities. They compete with ILECs. CLI command line interface. The visual appearance and command input conventions that enable system administrators and system operators to configure, monitor, and manage the connected nodes in a data network. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-12 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary client server A computer (that could be another workstation, a minicomputer, or a microcomputer with attached storage devices) on a local area network that can provide information or applications and link all other uses in the LAN. Typically, workstations are linked to one or more servers on a LAN. CLM cell-loss margin. A negotiated Quality of Service parameter in an ATM network. This parameter indicates the margin of error of lost cells to total transmitted cells. CLP cell loss priority. A bit in the ATM cell header set to 0 or 1. CLP=1 cells may be discarded in congested transmission to preserve the cell loss ratio of CLP=0 cells. Some service categories generate traffic flows with cell loss priority markings, CLP=0 (higher priority) and CLP=1 (lower priority). The network may follow models which treat this marking as transparent or significant. If the marker is significant, the network may selectively discard cells marked with low priority to protect the QoS of cells with high priority CO Central Office. The building that houses the switching equipment to which circuits of business and residence phones are connected. coding translation A means of transmitting the same data to a variety of different end-user devices. For example, voice messages that can be relayed on a telephone, or on a PC. colocation Typically, equipment housed at the same site. comfort noise A very low-level synthesized white noise deliberately added to a digital line to give a comforting "hiss" to the connection, which assures the consumer the connection is active. command line interface See CLI. committed burst size See Bc. committed information rate See CIR. common-channel signaling See CCS. community name The name given to an SNMP community for identification purposes. A member has associated access rights (read-only or read/write). competitive access providers See CAPS. competitive local exchange carrier See CLEC. composite clock A timing reference for multiplexer output that includes all data from multiplexed channels that is based on an oscillatorgenerated signal. compressed voice The act of reducing a voice signal to use less bandwidth during transmission. This is done when a voice analog signal is sampled through the use of an algorithm, and converted to a digital signal. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-13 Glossary compression The act of reformatting information so fewer bits are necessary to represent it. configurator A user that has read-write capabilities on PSAX devices when using the AQueMan system, but the capabilities are subordinate to the Administrator. conformance type The type of traffic control option used for ATM cells. A traffic descriptor combination that specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control; determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue; and determines whether high-priority cells are tagged as low-priority cells when traffic exceeds the traffic parameter thresholds. congestion The point where devices in a network operate at the highest utilization. congestion control parameters Techniques used in a network to prevent and react to temporary excessive demands for resources. congestion management The ability of a network to effectively deal with heavy traffic volumes. Conjugated Structure- Algebraic See CS-ACLEP. Code Excited Linear Predictive Voice Coding connection admission control See CAC. connection gateway Software that allows an external device to interconnect to the PacketStar Multiservice Media Gateway systems and act as an adjunct processor to handle IDSN, SS7 signaling, and other call control. connectivity The degree to which any given computer or application can cooperate with other network components in a sharedresource network environment. connector A device connecting wires or fibers in cable either to equipment or to other wires or fibers. connector pin The contacts protruding from a male connector. constant bit rate See CBR. Consultive Committee for International Telephony and Telegraphy See CCITT. continuity check A test to determine whether electrical current flows continuously throughout the length of a single wire which is grouped with other individual wires in a cable. continuity check tone A single frequency of 2000 Hz which is transmitted by the sending exchange, and looped back by the receiving exchange. The reception of the returned signal indicates the channel is working. control outputs Devices that route the input control signal to the selected output. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-14 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary core events Specific data received (events) on any of the core switches. core switch A Broadband Switching System (BSS) which is located in the core of the network. Conceptually equivalent to a Tandem Office in the voice world, a core switch serves to interconnect "edge switches," which provide user access to the broadband network much as Central Offices do in the circuit switched voice world. core switch trap The notification of a problem within a core switch. CPE Customer Premises Equipment. In Lucent’s line, the PSAX 15 through the PSAX 600, versus the PSAX 1250 and 2300 which are designed for central office use (although customers could use them in home offices). cps characters per second. Note: Formerly, this was the abbreviation for cycles per second, the unit used to express frequency. However, hertz is the proper unit for frequency. CPU Central Processing Unit. The computing part of a computer which manipulates data and processes instructions coming from software or a user. crankback A mechanism which partially releases an ATM connection setup in progress, but has encountered a failure. The use of this mechanism allows PNNI to perform alternate routing. CRC cyclic redundancy check. A method of error detection using cyclic redundancy code. Based on the contents of the message transmitted, a CRC value is generated at the transmitting terminal. An identical CRC generation is performed at the receiving terminal, and any mismatch indicates the message was received incorrectly. CRC error A condition that occurs when the CRC in a frame does not agree with the CRC frame received from a network. CRC-MF cyclic redundancy check-multifrequency. A process used to check the integrity of a block of data. crosstalk This phenomena is occuring when you hear someone you did not call talking on your telephone line to another person you did not call. It can be the result of faulty wire placement, shielding, or transmission techniques. CS-ACELP conjugated structure - algebraic code excited linear predictive voice coding, (ITU-T G.7290). A voice compression standard that uses algebraic expressions instead of numbers for each set of voice samples. This technique results in better than 2:1 compression at 8 Kbps. It is used on packet switched data networks. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-15 Glossary CSU channel service unit. Along with a Data Service Unit (DSU), a CSU is a component of Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE). A CSU connects a digital telephone line to a customer’s network-access equipment. It can be built into the network interface of the network-access equipment, or it can be a separate device. The CSU terminates the connection at the user’s end and processes digital signals. It also prevents a faulty DSU from interfering with data transmissions on the digital line. CTR current transfer ratio. The ratio of output collector current to the forward LED input current, times 100. current transfer ratio See CTR. customer premises equipment See CPE. cyclic redundancy check See CRC. Cyclic redundancy check-multifrequency See CRC-MF. D D Channel In an ISDN interface, the D channel is the data channel that carries control signals and customer call data in a packet switched mode. The B Channel is used for voice. D4 framing A common framing format in the T-1 environment. The name stems from the way framing is performed in the D-series of channel banks from AT&T. There are 12 separate 193-bit frames in a super-frame. A D-4 framing bit is used to identify both the channel and the signaling frame. In D-4 framing, signaling for voice channels is carried in-band by every channel, along with the encoded voice. data bits In asynchronous transmission, the bits that contain the data being sent (also known as payload). data communications equipment See DCE. data link Any serial data communications transmission path, without any intermediate nodes, that is generally between two nodes or devices. data link connection identifier See DLCI. data link control A standard method for sending data over a single communications link. data service unit See DSU. data service unit/channel service unit See DSU/CSU. data terminal equipment See DTE. datagram A logical grouping of information which is sent as a network layer unit over a transmission medium prior to establishing a virtual circuit. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-16 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary DB-25 The standard 25-pin connector used for RS-232 serial data communications. This connector has 13 pins in one row, and 12 in the next. DBCES dynamic bandwidth circuit emulation service. This feature is used with voice PVC connections to best utilize the available network bandwidth. Based on ABCD signaling-bit information, it allows channels to be dynamically allocated as needed. The implementation of DBCES is Lucent proprietary. The firmware supports 1x56 kbps time-slot trunking with channel-associated signaling (CAS) detection used, based on ATM Forum Specification af-vtoa-0085.000. It should be noted this feature is not fully compliant with the specification and does not interoperate with other devices that are fully compliant. DBS Direct Broadcast Satellite. A satellite that sends relatively powerful signals to small (generally 18-inch) dishes installed at homes. DC Direct Current. A flow of electricity always in the same direction. DCE Data Communications Equipment. An interface standard between computers and printers. DCE works like data terminal equipment, except pins 2 and 3 are reversed. debouncing Bouncing is the tendency of any two metal contacts in an electronic device to generate multiple signals as the contacts close or open; debouncing is any kind of hardware device or software that ensures that only a single signal will be acted upon for a single opening or closing of a contact. demodulate To recover a signal from a modulated carrier that has essentially the same characteristics as the original modulating signal. designated transit lists See DTL. destination address The address portion of the packet that identifies the destination node. device tree The left pane in the main AQueView® window, which allows a user to access configuration and provisioning menus for all open PSAX devices. DHPVC Dual-Homed Permanent Virtual Circuit. A virtual circuit that is connected to the network through two independent access points. digital loop carrier See DLC. digital loop carrier system A system that concentrates analog local loop lines, digitized, and multiplexed calls for transmission to the central office. digital service interface An interface that enables the implementation of digital service circuits with the network interface. It is defined at a point where the signal has not yet been reshaped into a standard digital signal. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-17 Glossary digital signal processor See DSP. digital signal, level 1 See DS1. digital signal, level 3 See DS3. digital signal, level zero See DS0. digital subscriber line access multiplexer See DSLAM. digital subscriber lines See DSL. DIP switch Dual In-line Position switch. A small switch used to select the operating mode of a device. direct broadcast satellite See DBS. direct current See DC. direct serial connection A direct connection through a serial port to another computer. DLC Digital Loop Carrier. Network transmission equipment used to provide pair gain on a local loop, by deriving multiple channels, typically 64 Kb, from a single 4-wire distribution cable running from the central office to a remote site. DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier. A frame relay term which defines a 10-bit field within the address field that includes committed information rate, committed burst size, committed rate measurement interval, and excess burst size. DMA interface Direct Memory Access Interface. A fast method of moving RAM which in turn, speeds processing. downstream node A reference to the relative position of two nodes in a LAN topology. A node is downstream if it receives data signals after the previous node. DS0 digital signal, level zero. The North American Digital Hierarchy signaling standard for transmission at 64,000 bits per second. DS0 is the basic building block of the DS hierarchy, equal to one voice conversation digitized over PCM. There are 24 DS0 channels in a DS1. DS1 digital signal, level 1. The North American Digital Hierarchy signaling standard for transmission at 1.544 million bits per second. Based on an old Bell System standard, DS1 is the equivalent of T1, which supports 24 voice conversations, each encoded at 64 Kbps, or 1.544 million. Outside the US, E1 designations are used which start at 2.048 million bits per second. DS1 circuit-emulation service A configuration that interfaces with TDM channelized DS1 circuits by converting the channelized digital signals (usually voice data) to ATM virtual channels. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-18 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary DS3 digital Signal, level 3. The North American Digital Hierarchy signaling standard transmission at 44.736 Mbps that is used by a T3 carrier. DS3 supports 28 DS1s plus overhead. In a channel application, it supports 672 channels, each at 64 kbps. DSL Digital Subscriber Lines. A family of evolving services local telephone companies provide their local subscribers. DSL is also synonymous with a ISDN BRI channel which offers up to 8 million bits per second downstream to the customer, and somewhat slower service from the customer back to the telephone company. DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer. Technology installed in the telephone company's central office that links through the line to a box in the customer's home or office. When a PC and telephone are plugged into the box, the DSLAM provides both telephone service and high-speed Internet service. DSP Digital Signal Processor. A specialized digital microprocessor that performs calculations on digitized signals that were originally analog (for example, voice) and then sends the results on. DSPs are used extensively in telecommunications for tasks such as echo cancellation, call process monitoring, voice processing and for the compression of voice and video signals. DSU Data (or digital) Service Unit. A device designed to connect data terminal equipment to a digital phone line, thus allowing fully digital communications. DSU/CSU Data Service Unit/Channel Service Unit. Devices that are used to access digital data channels. DTE Data Terminal Equipment. Equipment to which DCE (Data Communications Equipment) is connected, such as personal computers or data terminals. As defined in the RS-232 specification, DTE refers to application equipment, such as a videoconference terminal or LAN bridge or router, while DCE refers to equipment such as network access equipment. DTL Designated Transit List. A list of nodes and optional link IDs that completely specify a path across a single PNNI peer group. DTMF dual-tone multi-frequency. Also known as “touchtone”, a specification for the double audio signals generated through touch-tone telephones and auto-dial modems. dual in-line position switch See DIP switch. dual-bus A pair of parallel buses arranged so the direction of data flow in one bus is opposite to the direction of data flow in the other bus. dual-homed permanent virtual circuit See DHPVC. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-19 Glossary dual-tone multi-frequency See DTMF. duplex Simultaneous two-way transmission in both directions. dynamic bandwidth circuit emulation service See DBCES. E E1 The European equivalent of the North American 1,544 Mbps T1, except that E1 carries information at the rate of 2.048 Mbps. This rate is used by the European Conference of European Postal and Telecommunication Administrations (CEPT) carriers to transmit 3064 Kbps digital signals for voice or data calls, plus a 64 Kbps channel for signaling, and a 64 Kbps channel for framing and maintenance. E3 A CEPT signal which carries 16 CEPT E1 circuits and overhead at an effective data rate of 34,368 Mbps or 512 simultaneous voice conversations. E4 A signal which carries four E3 channels, or 139,264 million bits per second, or 1920 simultaneous voice conversations. EC European Community, also known as the Common Market. Member nations are Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Portugal, Spain, Sweden and the United Kingdom. echo cancellation A method of controlling speaker echo on long haul digital trunks. An echo cancellation system monitors the transmitted signal, digitally predicts the echo, then cancels it by subtracting the prediction from the received signal. echo canceller Equipment that removes the echo introduced into a voice call by telephone handsets and is further handicapped by network delay. EDGE enhanced data rates for global evolution. A final stage in the devolution of data communications within the existing GSM standards, supporting data transmission rates up to 384 Kbps. EDGE is also anticipated to be used with IS-136 TDMA networks in the US. edge node The closest node to the perimeter of the customer’s network, but still inside the customer’s network. After a transmission leaves this node, it is in the ATM cloud and has to make its own way through switches and nodes not under the control of the originating network. edge switch A Broadband Switching System located at the edge of the network; the first point of user access and the final point of exit. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-20 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary EEPS End-to-End Provisioning Server. A server that provides service-level provisioning, and allows a network management system to issue commands that will set up connections to go throughout the network without needing to set up connections on each individual switching device. egress The direction of traffic leaving a device (for example, sent out of the line card). electromagnetic interference See EMI. electrostatic discharge See ESD. Element Management System See EMS. embedded operations channel See EOC. EMI electromagnetic interference. Any electrical or electromagnetic phenomenon, synthetic or natural, that results in unintentional and undesirable responses from, or performance degradation or malfunction of,electronic equipment. EMS Element Management System. A system that manages, or controls, a network element. EMS is in the layer below NMS. encapsulation The process of wrapping information into another protocol for transport across a network. end point A network element at the end of the network. end-to-end provisioning Service-level provisioning that allows a network management systems (NMS) to issue commands that will set up connections to go throughout the network, without setting up connections on each individual switching device. end-to-end provisioning server See EEPS. enhanced data rates for global evolu- See EDGE. tion enterprise provider A business that provides network services such as colocation, high speed Internet access and network management services. EOC Embedded Operations Channel, a dedicated communications channel, similar to TMC, which allows remote OAM control. The EOC is frequently found in timeslot 12 of the first and second DS1 circuits (for redundancy). error rate The ratio between the number of bits received incorrectly and the total number of bits in the transmission. errored The state of having a value or condition that is inconsistent with the true, specified, or expected value or condition. errored path A faulty link between two nodes in a network. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-21 Glossary error-tolerant addressing scheme A way to protect the cell header by establishing multiple virtual circuits to the same destination. The addresses for the circuits are within the error space of the principal address used for actual transmission. Thus, the most probable error patterns occurring in the address field simply changes the address to another valid one. ESD electrostatic discharge. The release of a built-up electrical charge from an electronic component such as a printed circuit board. ESF extended superframe format. A T1 framing standard used in wide area networks grouping 24 (rather than 12) frames together. Ethernet A local area network that connects computers, printers, terminals, workstations, and servers within the same building or campus. Operating over twisted wire or coaxial cable, it is capable of carrying over ten million Bps. Ethernet address A 48-bit number physical address. Each Ethernet address is unique to a specific network module or PC on a LAN which forms the basis of a network-addressing scheme. Ethernet bridge A device that controls data packets within a subnet in an attempt to cut down the amount of traffic. A bridge is usually placed between two separate groups of computers that talk within themselves, and occasionally to computers in another group. ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute. Equivalent to ANSI. ETSI is creating a single European telecommunications system as part of the single European market program. European Telecommunications Stan- See ETSI. dards Institute events browser The events browser is a view of the received events contained in AQueView’s ® $OV_LOG/trapd.log and $OV_LOG/trapd.log.old. events log The HP OpenView Events Log is a central repository for all incoming events received by the NNM ovtapd background process. excess burst size See Be. extended superframe format See ESF. F facility interface code A numerical code designating a facility interface. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-22 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary fault monitoring In network management, the set of functions that (a) detect, isolate, and correct malfunctions in a telecommunications network, (b) compensate for environmental changes, and (c) include maintaining and examining error logs, accepting and acting on error detection notifications, tracing and identifying faults, carrying out sequences of diagnostics tests, correcting faults, reporting error conditions, and localizing and tracing faults by examining and manipulating database information. fax demodulation/remodulation A technique for taking a Group III fax signal and converting it from, or back to, its original 9.6 Kbps. For example, when a sheet of paper is inserted into a fax machine, the fax machine scans that paper into digital bits -- a stream of 9600 bps. Then, for transmission over phone lines, that 9.6 Kbps is converted into an analog signal. But if you wish to transmit the fax signal over a digital line, then it makes sense to convert it back to it's original 9.6 Kbps. In essence, this mean you can put several fax transmissions on one 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps line -the capacity you'd normally need if you transmitted one voice conversation, or one analog fax transmission. FEC forward error correction. A combination of functions designed to protect data transmission in a noisy communications environment, such as traffic transmitted across satellite and line-of-sight radio-frequency circuits. Most of these types of circuits transmit at the rate of 2.048 Mbps or slower. The three stages of FEC are multiple redundancy addressing, cell encoding, and cell scrambling. fiber optic cable Fiber made of extremely pure glass. To date, the best option for voice/data/video communications, being faster and less resistant than metal. FIFO First In, First Out. A buffering scheme in which the first byte of data that enters the buffer is also the first byte received by the CPU. file transfer protocol See FTP. firmware Software which is kept in semipermanent memory, and is usually stored in PROMS (programmable read-only memory) or EPROMS (electrical PROMS). Firmware is used in conjunction with hardware and software and shares the characteristics of both. It contains software which is so constantly called upon by a computer or phone system that it is written into a chip electrically, at higher-than-usual voltage, causing the bits to retain the pattern as it is "burned in." fixed-rate connection A connection whose QoS is determined by a consistent monthly rate. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-23 Glossary flash A type of nonvolatile memory. Flash memory is functionally similar to EPROM memory, but it must be erased in blocks, whereas EPROM can be erased one byte at a time. Because of its block-oriented nature, flash memory is commonly used as a supplement to, or a replacement fork in, hard disks in personal computers. flash hook The button which is depressed when you put the telephone receiver back in the cradle. Also called a switch hook, it releases the line to receive another call. flash signaling Signaling transitions from off-hook to on-hook, where the on-hook state lasts between 300 msec and 1000 msec. flash-capable trunk A means of switching between one phone line and another by depressing a telephone’s flash button. flow control The buffering that turns a device on and off in order to stop or reduce data loss during transmission. flow-through provisioning This method is similar to end-to-end provisioning, except that the commands originate at a higher-level order management system, which sends commands, or orders, to flow through the network. To use flow-through provisioning, an interface such as an API must be present below the NMS. foreign exchange office See FXO. foreign exchange service See FX. foreign exchange station See FXS. forward direction The direction of data away from the head-end of a broadband LAN. forward error correction See FEC. FR frame relay. A form of packet switching, which uses smaller packets and less error checking than traditional forms of packet switching (such as X.25). This international standard is used for efficiently transmitting high-speed, bursty data over wide area networks (WANs). frame relay See FR. Frame Relay Forum Based in Foster City, CA, this organization of frame-relay equipment vendors, carriers, and users was formed in 1991 to speed the development and deployment of frame relay products and interfaces with other broadband technologies such as ATM. Frame Relay Implementation Agree- See FRF. ment frame relay policing The prevention of frame relay traffic congestion through the discard of packets that exceed specified traffic parameters. Frame Relay/ATM Network InterSee FRF.5. working Implementation Agreement PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-24 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary Frame Relay/ATM PVC Service Interworking Implementation Agreement See FRF.8. framing The data-formatting conventions that allow a receiver to synchronize with the transmitting end of a circuit. For example, T-1 frames contain an 8-bit sample from each of the 24 channels on the interface (192 bits total) plus a framing bit (for a total of 193 bits). Each framing bit marks the end of a timed sample the input at the transmission end. framing-bit A bit used for frame synchronization purposes. A bit at a specific interval in a bit stream is used to determine the beginning or end of a frame. Framing bits are non-informationcarrying bits used to make possible the separation of characters in a bit stream into lines, paragraphs, pages, channels, etc. The framing in a digital signal is usually repetitive. frequency shift keying See FSK. FRF.x A reference to a voice over Frame Relay Implementation Agreement, which specifies how frames are relayed. FRF.1.1 User-to-network (UNI) Implementation Agreement. The interoperability standard adopted by the ATM Forum to define connections between users or end stations and a local switch. FRF.2.1 Network-to-network (NNI) Implementation Agreement. The interoperability standard adopted by the ATM Forum which describes the transfer of C-Plane and U-Plane information between two network nodes belonging to two different frame relay networks. FRF.5 Frame Relay/ATM Network Interworking Implementation Agreement. The interoperability standard adopted by the ATM Forum which defines a standard way to carry out frame relay traffic across an ATM backbone. This specification is dependent on the encapsulation of frames carried by the frame relay network. FRF.8 Frame Relay/ATM PVC Service Interworking Implementation Agreement. The interoperability standard adopted by the ATM Forum which defines a standard way for a frame relay site to communicate with an ATM site; it depends on conversion of the frames into ATM cells. FSK frequency shift keying. A modulation technique for translating 1’s and 0’s into something that can be carried over telephone lines, such as sounds. FTP file transfer protocol. A program that allows users to quickly transfer text and binary files to and from a distant or local PC, list directories, delete and rename files on the foreign host, and perform wildcard transfers between hosts. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-25 Glossary FX foreign exchange service. A service that provides local telephone service from a central office which outside (foreign to) the subscriber’s exchange area. FXO foreign exchange office. A service provided by the local telephone company from a central office outside the subscriber's exchange area, that is provided by a foreign exchange (FX) trunk line. FXS foreign exchange station. The connection configuration between an FXO and a POTS. G gateway A shared connection between a LAN and a larger system, or a large packet-switched network whose communication protocols differ. Gb gigabit, 109 bits GB gigabyte, a unit of physical data storage equal to 1,073,741,824 bytes. Gbps gigabits per second GBR guaranteed bit rate GCAC generic connection admission control. A process that determines if a link has enough resources to support a connection. generic connection admission control See GCAC. generic flow control See GFC. GFC generic flow control. A field in the ATM header which can be used to provide local functions (e.g., flow control). It has local significance only and the value encoded in the field is not carried end-to-end. GFR guaranteed frame rate. A service that provides minimum cell rate guarantees and fair access to excess bandwidth left over from higher-priority services. GMT Greenwich Mean Time. The former name for mean solar time at the original site of the Royal Observatory in Greenwich, England, which is located on the prime meridian. GMT is now called Coordinated Universal Time. GR-303 graphical user interface The Telcordia Technologies General Requirements 303 (GR-303) standard provides for both an open interface network architecture and a digital loop carrier system that operates on T1 circuits. This standard allows a remote terminal such as a central office PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway to interface with a central office voice switch, such as the Lucent Technologies 5ESS switch. See GUI. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-26 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary Greenwich Mean Time See GMT. guaranteed bit rate See GBR. guaranteed frame rate See GFR. GUI graphical user interface. This type of user interface uses graphics such as windows, icons, pull-down menus, and a pointer icon; for example, the Windows, Macintosh, and UNIX operating systems use this interface. GX 550 A member of the Lucent Multiservice WAN switch family that offers a wide array of core and access capabilities such as native frame relay, IP and MPLS multi-protocol label switching (MPLS). H handshake An exchange of predetermined control signals for establishing a session between a computer and a modem. HDLC high-level data link control. An ITU-TSS link layer protocol standard for point-to-point and multipoint communication. In HDLC, the control information is always placed in the same position, and it uses specified bit patterns dramatically different from the data, thus reducing the likelihood of confusion. header The initial part of a data block, packet, or frame, which provides basic information about how to handle the rest of the block, packet, or frame. header error correction See HEC. heartbeat An Ethernet-defined signal quality error (SQE) signal quality test function, as defined in IEEE 802.3. Heartbeat is created by a circuit (normally part of the transceiver) that generates a collision signal at the end of a transmission. This signal is used by the controller interface for self-testing. HEC header error control (or correction). A code located in the last byte of an ATM header. It is used to check the integrity of the cell header at the various cell switches. HELLO A routing protocol that allows trusting packet switches to discover minimal delay routes. hertz See Hz. hexadecimal A numbering system using any of the following 16 characters: 0 to 9 and A to F. high-level data link control See HDLC. horizontal link A link between two logical ATM nodes belonging to the same peer group. hot-swappable A feature that allows the user to install, or remove I/O and server modules in the PSAX system without interrupting its operations. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-27 Glossary HP OpenView A Hewlett-Packard application often referred to in Release Notes with the AQueView® system. hub A wiring device that has multiple connections of network and internetworking modules. Active hubs amplify or repeat signals to extend a LAN’s distance, while passive hubs split up the transmission signal, allowing the administrator to add users to a LAN. hybrid connection configuration A configuration that connects the “main router” Multiservice Media Gateway system directly to the “end system” Multiservice Media Gateway systems through ATM connections. These ATM connections can be tunneled through a number of switches to reach the “end system” Multiservice Media Gateway system. The “main router” of the Multiservice Media Gateway system is connected to the NMS machine through an Ethernet connection. Hz Hertz. A unit of measure of frequency in cycles per second. I I/O input/output. The interrelated tasks computers do (in addition to processing) that provide information to the computer, perhaps by keyboard (input) and get the results of processing to the user, perhaps by a printer (output). IBM SNA equipment International Business Machines Systems Network Architecture. Computer network architecture equipment created by IBM. IC integrated circuit. A chip that contains electrical components -- such as transistors, resistors, and capacitors -- connected by wiring, to form a circuit designed to perform a specific task (or tasks). ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol, the IP portion of the TCP that provides the functions used for network layer management and control. ICP - IMA communication (control) protocol A rule or format for the transfer of cells within inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) groups. IDT Inter-machine Digital Trunk. A high-speed circuit between switches. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A worldwide engineering publishing and standards-making body for the electronics industry. IETF Internet Engineering Task Force. The organization that coordinates the standards and specification development for Transmission Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) networking. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-28 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary IISP Interim Inter-Switch Signaling Protocol. An ATM Forum defined protocol employing UNI-based signaling for switchto-switch communication in private networks. Unlike PNNI, IISP relies on static routing tables and makes support for QoS an alternate routing option. ILEC Incumbent Local Exchange Carrier. One of the Baby Bell companies, for example. ILMI Integrated Local (or Link) Management Interface. A specification for network-management functions for the link between a public network and a private network, or between a user and a network. IMA Inverse Multiplexing over ATM. An access specification of the ATM Forum, used to link several low-speed transmission links, allowing a high-speed data stream to pass through the system. IMA Communication protocol See ICP. IME Interface Management Entity, two entities; either an end user and a public or private network, or a public network and a private network. in-band management A network management application that configures and manages an interface based on simple network management protocol (SNMP). in-band signaling Signals made of tones that pass through the voice frequency band and are carried by the same circuit as the talk path. These include requests for service, dialing, and disconnecting information. incumbent local exchange carrier See ILEC. ingress The incoming direction. input/output See I/O. Input/output (I/O) module A circuit pack which provides the electrical/optical ports into which incoming/outgoing facilities are connected; the network interface module. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers See IEEE. integrated circuit See IC. integrated local management interface See ILMI. integrated services digital network See ISDN. Integrated services digital network with primary rate interface service See PRI ISDN. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-29 Glossary interface 1. Hardware microprocessor (chip) on a DSPx voice processing module. Also see channel. 2. An end-to-end connection protocol that governs the transmission parameters of a configured port or channel interface. Examples: ATM UNI 4.0, PNNI, IISP. Interface management entity See IME. intergrated services digital network user part See ISUP. interim inter-switch protocol See IISP. inter-machine digital trunk See IDT. intermediary node Any device connected to a network that data must pass through in order to go from one end to another. International Standards Organization See ISO. International Telecommunication Union See ITU. Internet Originally developed by the U.S. Defense Department, the Internet has become the world’s largest computer network. It is a packet-switched network, running on the TCP/IP protocol. internet control message protocol See ICMP. Internet Engineering Task Force See IETF. Internet Protocol See IP. Internet service provider See ISP. intervening switch If the call has to go through multiple switches to get to a destination, each of these switches is referred to as an intervening switch. interworking The ability to communicate between devices supporting dissimilar protocols, (such as between frame relay and ATM), by using translation between protocols rather than encapsulation. Many carriers are planning to add the equipment and conversion algorithms so networks can transparently convert frame relay to ATM and vice versa. interworking function See IWF. intranet A private network that uses Internet software and Internet standards. Inverse multiplexing over ATM See IMA. IP internet protocol. The most significant protocol on which the Internet is based. This software operates at the network level (Layer 3) of the OSI model and keeps track of the Internet's addresses for different nodes, routes outgoing messages, and recognizes incoming messages. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-30 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary IP Address A unique numerical identifier that is assigned by a system administrator to any station or other device that uses IP. Each address is a 32-bit string expressed in four octets in decimal notation, such as 323.34.45.67, with one portion for the network number and another the host address. The administrator sets the subnet mask to identify how much of the address applies to the network and how much applies to the host. IP Mask A range of IP addresses defined so that only machines with IP addresses within the range are allowed access to an Internet service. IPO - internet PRI offload The Lucent Softswitch Internet Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Offload (IPO) solution relieves traditional switch port congestion by offloading calls onto ATM networks. It serves as an intelligent bridge between network elements that speak different signaling protocols, and simplifyies the interworking between circuit-switched and data networks. With seamless connectivity and migration, the Lucent Softswitch IPO provides CLECs and ISPs with a true, carrier-class, high-availability platform with the scalability and performance of traditional circuit switches. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. A network that offers either a basic rate interface (BRI) at 144,000 bits per second, or a primary rate interface (PRI) at 1,544,000 bits per second. ISDN provides standard digital service capability that features one or more circuit-switched communication channels that are capable of carrying digital voice, data, or image signals over copper loop. ISO International Standards Organization. A group based in Switzerland that defines and/or adopts protocols widely used in the computer and telecommunications industries. ISP Internet Service Provider. A vendor who gives individuals and companies access to the Internet and the World Wide Web. ISUP Integrated Services digital Network User Part. The call control part of the SS7 protocol. It determines the procedures for setting up, coordinating, and taking down trunk calls on the SS7 network. ITU International TelecommunicationsUnion, the principal international telecommunications standards organization, a United Nations agency based in Geneva, Switzerland. ITU-T The Telecommunications Standardization Sector of the ITU. IWF InterWorking Function. A mechanism that mask differences in physical, link, and network technologies by converting (or mapping) states and protocols into consistent network and user services. K Kb A kilobit, as defined as 1024 bits. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-31 Glossary KB A kilobyte, defined as 1024 bytes. Kbps Kilobits per second, the amount of data transferred in a second between two end points. For example, 1 Kbps is 1024 bits per second. keep alive/heartbeat timer A polling method a PSAX chassis uses to ensure connections are up; if not, it generates a system error message. kilobit See Kb. kilobyte See KB. L LAN Local Area Network. A geographically localized network that includes both hardware and software and typically links personal computers, printers, file servers, and other peripherals. LANET Limitless ATM Network Protocol. The LANET protocol, couples with a simple error-tolerant addressing scheme, addresses the fundamental problem of noise in adapting ATM to low-speed environments. LANET permits applicationdependent payload protection, that allows selective implementation of bandwidth-costly, forward-error-correction techniques. It is designed to identify and extract ATM cells at bit error rates as high as 10-2. LAPD Link Access Procedure-D. A link level protocol devised for ISDN connections. latency The time it takes to get information through a network. layer 2 bridging service A way of moving LAN traffic at near wire speed through the use of an ATM which uses MAC addresses between the LAN segments on each side. leaf The receiving end of a connection. LED Light-Emitting Diode. A small solid-state light that shows hardware or firmware status. LGN logical group node. A peer group leader that represents and summarizes topology information needed to reach lowerlevel switches in a PNNI hierarchy. light-emitting diode See LED. limitless ATM network protocol See LANET. line coding The data format that lets either end of a communications channel correctly interpret messages from the other. Line coding systems specify the voltage levels and patterns that represent binary digits (1s and 0s), based on the requirements of the transmission network, line loop When the received signal is sent through the receiver and the line driver, and then back out to the originating point. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-32 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary link Another name for a communications channel or circuit. The ATM Forum defines a link as an entity that defines a topological relationship (including available transport capacity) between two nodes in different subnetworks. Synonymous with logical link. link access procedure-D See LAPD. local exchange carrier See LEC. link jitter A type of distortion found on analog communication lines, that results in data transmission errors. Also, a variation in the time it takes for a voice packet to traverse the link between the sending and receiving end points. link management interface See LMI. link out of delay synchronization See LODS. LMI Link Management Interface. A synchronous polling scheme used for the link management of a frame relay channel. It provides the user with dynamic notification of the addition and deletion of PVCs, and monitors each network connection through a periodic heartbeat keepalive polling process. load balancing The practice of splitting communication into two (or more) routes. By balancing traffic on each route, communication is faster and more reliable. load sharing The technique of using two computers to balance the processing normally assigned to one of them. In local area networking, load sharing is performed by token ring routers when connecting remote LANs. It allows a combination of Ethernet and Token Ring traffic over a common WAN link such as a T1 or 56 Kbps circuit. Load sharing eliminates the need for duplicate WAN links (and bridges or routers), each serving a different type of LAN. local area network See LAN. local loop A telephone line that runs from the local telephone company to the end user's premises; it can be fiber, copper, or wireless media. Also known as a subscriber line. local node A network’s local server. LODS Link Out of Delay Synchronization. A link event that indicates a link is not synchronized with the other links within the IMA group. logical group node See LGN. logical link See link. logical port A configured circuit that defines protocol interaction between a Frame Relay or ATM switch and user equipment, a switch, or a network. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-33 Glossary loop emulation This service uses the ATM AAL-2 network to essentially create an extension cord between voice ports on the CPE and the corresponding voice ports on the class 5 switch, that terminates on the GR-303-based voice gateway. The interface between the CPE and the first ATM-based edge switch or DSLAM may be T1 or xDSL. In either case, the use of AAL-2 allows multiple voice circuits to be carried simultaneously. loop start interface A type of interface in which the CPE signals an off-hook condition by closing a relay at the CO. loopback A test pattern sent and returned to the sending device to diagnose problems. LOS loss of signal. A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal which is transmitted in the physical overhead and indicates the receiving equipment has lost the received signal. LOS is used to monitor the performance of the physical layer. loss of signal See LOS. M MAC media-specific access control. A protocol that determines how devices will share resources on a local area network MAC address The built-in hardware address of a device connected to shared media. management information base See MIB. mask A field comprised of letters or numbers and wildcard characters, used to filter data. For example, a mask 800xxxxxxx may be applied to the dialed digits field of a call record to identify toll-free calls. max PD parameter Located on the remote end peer, the Max PD parameter is the maximum number of protocol data units transmitted since the last PSAX chassis polling of the peer. maximum burst size See MBS. maximum input buffer The maximum amount of bytes that should be retrieved. maximum transmission unit See MTU. Mb A megabit, defined as 1,048,576 bits. MB A megabyte, defined as 1,048,576 bytes. Mbps Megabits per second, a unit for measuring data rates. MBS maximum burst size. In an ATM transmission, MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be received at the peak cell rate (PCR). If the burst is larger than anticipated, the additional cells are either tagged or dropped. MBS applies only to variable bit rate (VBR) traffic. It does not apply to constant bit rate (CBR) or unspecified bit rate (UBR) traffic. media access control (MAC) layer See MAC. megabit See Mb. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-34 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary megabits per second See Mbps megabyte See MB. megaohm A resistance of 1,000,000 ohms. MIB Management Information Base. A database of network performance information. millisecond See msec. mixed circuit emulation Mixed voice/data traffic on a single private access line. MMAQ A Multi-Mode module which uses the AQueMan algorithm MMTS A Multi-Mode module which uses traffic shaping for flow control. modulate To merge information an signal containing voice, data, or images with an electrical carrier wave in order to transmit the information over a network monitor A user that has read-only capabilities on PSAX devices when using the AQueView® system. Moving Pictures Experts Group See MPEG. MPEG Moving Pictures Experts Group. A joint committee of the International Standards Organization and the Electrotechnical Commission. A series of hardware and software standards designed to reduce the storage requirements of digital video, especially a compression scheme for full-motion video. Its compression is greater than the comparable JPEG. msec Millisecond, one-thousandth of a second. MSP multiplex section protection. In a European synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) network, the 1+1 protection switching is commonly referred to as multiplex section protection. See APS for additional information. MTU maximum transmission unit. The largest number of bytes of "payload" data a frame can carry, not counting the frame's header and trailer. Mu-Law The companding standard for conversion between analog and digital signals in PCM systems in Japan and North America. multicast Broadcasting messages simultaneously to a selected group of workstations on a LAN, a WAN, or on the Internet. multimedia Communication through various forms of media simultaneously, such as voice (voice encoding, speech recognition, speaker verification, and text-to-speech), audio processing (music synthesis, CD-ROMs), data communications, image processing, and telecommunications. multimode fiber By having a much larger core than single-mode fiber, this broadband fiber allows many modes of light to propagate down the fiber-optic path. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-35 Glossary multiple redundancy addressing The act of establishing multiple virtual circuits to the same destination. The addresses for the circuits are within the error space of the principle one used for actual transmission. Thus, the most probable error patterns that occur in the address field cause the address to be changed to another valid one. multiple repeaters A series of opto-electronic devices inserted at intervals along a circuit to boost and amplify an analog signal being transmitted. Repeaters are needed because the quality and strength of a signal decays over distance. multiplex section protection See MSP. multiplexer A device that merges several lower-speed transmission channels into one high-speed channel at one end of the link. A demultiplexer reverses this process at the opposite end. multiplexing The process of transmitting several signals over a single communications channel. multi-protocol encapsulation As defined in IETF RFC 1483, multi-protocol encapsulation allows multiple higher-layer protocols, such as IP to be routed over a single ATM VCC using the MAC header. Multiservice Media Gateway A Lucent Technologies ATM access concentrator/switch that efficiently forwards data, handling incoming calls for a network point of presence (POP). In general, a Multiservice Media Gateway system supports dial-in modem calls, ISDN connections, nailed-up links, frame relay traffic, and multiprotocol routing. Formerly this product was named the PSAX Access Concentrator system. Multiservice Media Gateway systems Refers to the whole "box" functioning as an entity, including or MMG systems the chassis, modules, and CPU loaded with system software. N narrowband In communications technology, digital communication at the rate of 64,000 bits per second or lower. NavisCore An application that operates in conjunction with HP OpenView to provide multiservice IP, frame relay, asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) switched multimegabit data service (SMDS) configuration, and management of Lucent core switches from a single platform. NE Network Elements. 1. Any basic part of the network, such as a modem, a multiplexer, a switch. 2. Processor-controlled parts of the telecommunications network that primarily provides switching and transporting functions and contains network operating functions. In SONET, the five network elements are: add/drop multiplexer, broadband digital crossconnect, wideband digital cross-connect, digital loop carrier, and switch interface. near-end echo cancellation The isolation and filtering of unwanted signals caused by echoes from the main transmitted signal at the originating end of a trunk circuit or connecting path. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-36 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary NEBS Network Equipment Building Standard. A standard that defines a rigid, extensive set of performance, quality, environmental, and safety standards. They range from fire spreading and extinguishability tests to earthquake tests, thermal shock measures, cyclic temperature, mechanical shock, and electrostatic discharge standards. neighbor peer The relationship a node in the PSAX system has with a neighboring node within the same peer group. network A network consists of one or more management stations and network elements, which are individual nodes on the network that can communicate with one another. These nodes are individual machines on the network and can be PSAX systems, routers, computers, or other communications equipment. network elements See NE. network equipment building standard See NEBS. network interface card See NIC. network management system See NMS. network mask A 32-bit number that distinguishes the portion of an IP address referring to the network or subnet from the portion referring to the host. network service access point See NSAP. network-network interface See NNI. network-to-network (NNI) Implementation Agreement See FRF2.1 nibble Four bits. Usually described as one hexadecimal digit. NIC Network Interface Card. The device that connects a computer or other device to a LAN. NMS Network Management System. A comprehensive set of equipment used in monitoring, controlling, and managing a data communications network. Typically, it includes testing devices, CRT displays and printers, patch panels, and circuitry for diagnosing and reconfiguring channels, generally all housed in the same central console. NNI network to network interface. A Frame Relay Forum/ATM Forum protocol governing how ATM switches establish connections and how ATM signals get routed. node An abstract representation of a peer group or a switching system as a single point. node index An index that identifies a logical PNNI entity in the PSAX system. non-native ATM networking protocols Communications protocols such as ISDN, SS7, and CAS. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-37 Glossary nonscrambled An undistorted or scrambled voice or data communication type. non-switched mode The setting fused to establish a point-to-point line. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory NSAP network service access point. The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) generic standard for a network address consisting of 20 octets. O OAM Operations, Administration, and Maintenance. These cells typically provide network fault indications, performance information, and data diagnosis functions. OC-3 Optical carrier 3. A SONET channel equal to three DS3s, which is equal to 155.52 million bits per second. (Three times OC-1.) OC-3c Optical carrier 3, concatenated payload. OC-12 Optical carrier 12. A SONET channel that transmits at 622 Mbps. octet A term for eight bits that is sometimes used interchangeably with byte. off-hook, on-hook queuing In off-hook queuing, the dialer has to hold the receiver to his ear and continually dial until he gets an open line. In offhook queuing, he dials and on getting a busy number, the switch informs him and automatically redials, informing him when a connection is ready. offset time The length of time it takes in a generic filter, for the number of bytes from the start of a frame to the data, to be tested against the filter. Ohm The resistance that allows one ampere of current to pass at the electrical potential of one volt. Amperes are volts divided by Ohms; Volts are the product of Amperes and Ohms; Ohms are Volts divided by Amperes. online Available through the computer, either on the hard disk (online documentation, online help) or, by using a modem, from another computer. open systems interconnection See OSI. operations, administration, and maintenance See OAM. originating node The first point of connection into a network. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-38 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary OSI open systems interconnection. The only internationally accepted framework of standards for communicating between different systems made by different vendors, developed by the International Standards Organization. The OSI model organizes the communication process into seven different categories and places these categories in a layered sequence based on their relation to the user. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end to end communications between the message source and the message destination, while layers 3 through 1 deal with network access. out of frame A T1 error condition where two or three framing bits of any consecutive frames are in error. out-of-service The condition, or state, of an interface that is operating but not ready to accept or place calls. outside link A link to an outside node. P PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange, see PBX. packet Also referred to as a Level 3 Protocol Data Unit (L3-PDU). A packet is a group of bits that is transmitted as a unit through a network. It usually includes data and control information such as addressing, identification, and error control fields. packet internet groper See ping. packet video When a video camera feeds the signal into a coder/decoder, which then converts the native analog signal into a digital format, and segments the data into data packets. The packets are sent across a packet network as a packet stream for reassembly by a coder/decoder on the receiving end of the transmission before presentation on the monitor. PacketStar® PSAX family of products The Lucent Technologies PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways are a product line of scalable, flexible multiservice ATM access devices offered to service providers’ central offices, and small to large enterprises. pass-through Gaining access to one network through another element. payload The portion of a frame that contains the actual data. payload length The length of a data field, block or stream being processed or transported. The payload includes user information and may include such additional information such as user-requested network management and accounting information. payload loop When a received signal is sent through the framing chip on the module, but not the SAR circuitry, and then back out to the originating point. payload protection A process that identifies and extracts ATM cells at bit error rates as high as 10-2. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-39 Glossary payload scrambling The removal of long strings of 1s and 0s that could be mistaken as error conditions. payload type indicator See PTI. PBX private branch exchange. Originally a switch inside a private business, part of a manual device that requires an operator to complete the call. Now those calls are automatic (at one time there was the need to differentiate the manual private automatic branch exchange [PABX] from the automatic PBX). PCM pulse code modulation. The most common method of encoding an analog voice signal into a digital bit stream. The most common PCM method samples a voice conversation at 8,000 times a second, twice the highest frequency in a voice line, 4,000 Hz. PCM coding translation There are two different PCM coding schemes in G.711, A-law and µ-law. In the US and Canada, µ-law is used. In many other parts of the world, A-law is used. When calls are placed between countries that use different coding laws, a code translation is performed in the network. PCR peak cell rate. An ATM term for cell-rate-per-second limit the transmitting source can never exceed. PDU protocol data unit. A packet created at any one of the OSI layers. It contains control information and a payload, and passes through the interfaces between one protocol layer and another. peak cell rate See PCR. peer In data networking, a router that operates on the same protocol layer as another router. peer group A set of logical nodes, grouped to create a routing hierarchy. All members of the group exchange PNNI topology state elements (PTSEs). peer group identifier A string of bits that unambiguously identifies a peer group. peer group leader See PGL. permanent virtual circuit See PVC. PGL peer group leader. In networks that use a PNNI hierarchy, the switches at each level elect one switch that concurrently belongs to its own level, and the next highest level. This switch is referred to as the peer group leader. physical layer convergence control See PLCP. physical media access layer This handles functions specific to each physical interface, and connects each user port to other users, or network elements. pin configuration The physical arrangement of prongs on a connector. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-40 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary PING packet internet groper. A utility program, originally used in the Internet, to test whether a destination can be reached by sending it an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request and waiting for a reply; it also tests for delay. PING server A utility serving PINGs; a signal also called the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Special Request Packet, to a specific address to test the connection. If the PING does not return a response, the address is either down or unreachable. If only a portion of the PING returns, it indicates trouble with the connection and warns that communications may be slow or unreliable. pinout A description or diagram of the pins of a chip or connector. plain old telephone service See POTS. PLAR private line, automatic ringdown. A leased voice circuit connecting two telephones. When either handset is lifted, the other telephone rings automatically. PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol. Part of the physical layer that adapts the transmission facility to handle Distributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB) functions, used for DC-3 transmission of ATM. ATM cells are encapsulated in a 125microsecond frame defined by the PLCP, which is defined within the DS3 M-frame. PNNI Private Network-to-Network Interface. A routing information protocol that enables extremely scalable, full function, dynamic multivendor ATM switches to be integrated in the same network. PNNI topology state packets See PTSP. point-to-multipoint A circuit by which a single signal goes from one origination point to many destination points. point-to-point protocol A protocol that connects two nodes (for example, router-torouter and host-to-network) over both synchronous and asynchronous circuits. PPP replaces Serial Line Interface Protocol (SLIP), an older protocol. polling An access control method in which one master device, such as a NMS, queries other network devices, and requests they transmit one at a time. POTS Plain Old Telephone Service. The basic service supplying standard, single-line telephones (with no features like call waiting or call forwarding). PRI Primary Rate Interface. The ISDN equivalent of a T1 circuit. Delivered to the customer's premises, it delivers 23 B+D at 1.544 Mbps. PRI enables IP connectivity to the PSTN. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-41 Glossary PRI ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network with Primary Rate Interface service. A network with 24 B (bearer) channels, each of which is a full 64,000 bits per second. One of these channels is typically used to carry signaling information for other 23 channels. In Europe, PRI ISDN is 30 bearer channels of 64 Kbps and two signaling channels, each of 64 Kbps. primary rate interface See PRI. private automatic branch exchange See PBX. private branch exchange See PBX. private line automatic ring-down service See PLAR. private network-to-network interface See PNNI. programable read-only memory See PROM. PROM Programable Read-Only Memory. A programmable semiconductor device whose contents are not intended to be altered during normal operations. An autoboot PROM on a LAN network board can allow network servers to boot up workstations, which works particularly well with diskless workstations. protocol A set of rules governing communication between two entities or systems to provide interoperability between services and vendors. protocol data unit See PDU. protocol stack A collection of software modules that combine to produce the software that enables the protocol to work, i.e., allowing communications between dissimilar computer devices. It is called a stack because the software modules are piled on top of each other. The process of communicating typically starts at the bottom of the pile and works its way up. Each software module typically (not always) needs the one below it. A protocol stack is also called a protocol family or protocol suite. provisioning In National Security and Emergency Preparedness (NS/EP) telecommunication services, provisioning is synonymous with initiation, and also includes altering the state of an existing priority service or capability. Lucent has two additions used specifically in AQueView®. End-to-end provisioning means controlling the entire building's telecommunications by software at a central location. Flow-through provisioning is a step up from that, that allows a central location to control a network across several locations, such as a college campus. PTI payload type indicator. This field value distinguishes the various management cells and user cells. Example: Resource Management cells has PTI=110, end-to-end OAM F5 Flow cell has PTI=101. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-42 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary PTSP PNNI Topology State Packet. The PNNI routing packet used to exchange reachability and resource information between ATM switches. It is also designed to ensure that a connection request is routed on a path with high probability of meeting quality of service standards. Typical, PTSP includes bidirectional information about the transit behavior of particular nodes (based on entry and exit ports) and current internal states. pulse code modulation See PCM. PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit. A virtual circuit that provides the equivalent of a dedicated private line service over a packet switching network between two DTEs. Virtual circuits and SDNs are other types of virtual networks. Q QoS quality of service. An ATM Forum Protocol that is defined in terms of an end-to-end ATM connection under ITU-T Recommendation 1.350. QoS measures cell error ratio, severely errored cell block ratio, cell loss ratio and cell misinsertion rate, cell transfer delay, mean cell transfer delay, and cell delay variability. Quadserial A Lucent module, superseding multiserial and high-speed modules. quality of service See QoS. queuing Stacking or holding calls to be handled by a trunk, or trunk group, when there are insufficient trunks to handle the amount of traffic. R R1 ITU name for a particular North American digital trunk protocol that uses multi-frequency (MF) pulsing. R2 A series of ITU-T specs for European analog and digital trunk signaling, which uses compelled handshaking on every MF (multi-frequency) signaling digit. radio frequency A group of electromagnetic energy whose wavelengths are between the audio and the light range. The electromagnetic waves transmitted usually are between 500 KHz and 300 GHz. RAI remote alarm indication. This alarm indicates that a device on the T1 line, DS3 line, or DS2 stream is detecting framing-error conditions in the signal it receives. An RAI is also called a yellow alarm signal. RAS remote access service. A network unit that enables branch offices, telecommuters, and traveling computer users to gain access to the corporate LAN backbone over dedicated or dialed, digital, or analog lines. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-43 Glossary rate shaping The transmission of ATM cells onto the ATM network at a peak cell rate, based on an algorithm. For frame relay traffic, the PSAX system software automatically calculates egress peak cell rate based on frame relay traffic parameters. For Ethernet traffic, the user must configure the egress peak cell rate. Connections employing the rate shaping feature have BRnrt and UBR connections. RDI remote defect indication. An alert to a failure at the far end of an ATM network. Unlike FERF (far-end remote failure), the RDI alarm doesn't indicate the specific circuit with failure. ready to receive See RR. ready to send See RTS. recommended standard See RS. redundancy The duplication of hardware or software within a network to endure fault-tolerant or back-up operation. Reed Solomon (RS) coding An algorithm that performs forward error correction (FEC) in order to compensate for error bursts in data transmission. remote access service See RAS. remote alarm indication See RAI. remote defect indication See RDI. remote dial-access server See RAS. remote input status A reference to how a user defines the external alarm condition (input) at their site, such as a temperature sensor, that results in an action (output) such as a fan. When the STATUS/CONTROL connectors on the Alarm module are connected to an external device that is triggered remotely, a signal is sent, indicating a fault condition, which is displayed by either Closed or Open on the Remote Input Status field. repeater A device that receives data on one communication link and transmits it, bit by bit, on another link as fast as it is received without buffering. RFC request for comment. Draft RFCs on particular topics are circulated through the Internet community to gain feedback from engineers and programmers on proposed TCP/IP standards about the Internet. The Internet Engineering Task Force meets three times a year and either adopts what becomes a standard RFC, or discards it. right mouse button The right button on a computer mouse. Clicking the right mouse button on many computer screens brings up a menu different from the drop-down options, or is more comfortable for some users. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-44 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary RIP routing information protocol. A set of rules based on distance-vector algorithms that measure the shortest path between points on a network. Each router maintains a routing table or database with this information and periodically broadcasts it to neighboring routers. RJ-11, registered jacks. An RJ-11 is a six-conductor modular jack typically wired for four conductors, the most common telephone jack in the world. The male connects a telephone, modem, or fax machine to a female RJ-11 jack in the wall or floor. The RJ-45 is an eight-pin connector used for transmitting data from a data PBX, a modem, a printer, or a print buffer over telephone wire. RJ-45 robbed-bit signaling A popular signaling mechanism used in T1 connections. Robbed-bit signaling typically uses bits known as A and B bits. These bits are sent by each side of a T1 termination and are buried in the voice data of each voice channel in the T1 circuit, hence the term "robbed bit" as the bits are stolen from the voice data. rounding error A cumulative calculation error caused by omission of preselected values. The omitted values can be the ones, tens, and/or hundreds decimal places. A typical rounding algorithm increases the value to the left by one if the value to the right is over 5. The value to the right is then dropped. The more aggressive the algorithm used, the greater the rounding error. router A physical device, connected to two or more networks, that receives Internet Protocol (IP) packets through one network interface and forwards them out another interface, based on network layer information. routing The process of directing data from a source node to the correct interface. routing entry The NSAP address on a routing table. routing information protocol See RIP. routing protocol Rules that determine a path between two nodes, that often occurs in an environment in which two nodes in different networks interwork with routers and bridges. routing table A database that contains entries, each of which includes a destination address and a pointer to the destination. RR ready to receive PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-45 Glossary RSRS-232RS-449RS-530 recommended standard. Standards often set by the EIA (Electronic Industries Association), the TIA (Telecommunications Industry Association), or both (EIA/TIA). RS-232 is a set of standards specifying three sets of interfaces (electrical, functional, and mechanical) for communicating between computers, terminals, and modems. Once only available on a 25-pin connector, they now come in a variety of configurations that aren't always compatible to other devices without add-ons. The RS-449 is essentially a faster version of RS-232, and typically has 37 pins. Each RS-449 pin has its own signal return instead the common ground available on the RS-449 pin. RS-530 supersedes RS-449 and complements RS-232. Based on a 25-pin connection, it works in conjunction with either electrical interface RS-422 (balanced electrical circuits) or RS423 (unbalanced electrical circuits). RTS request to send S SAM Service Access Multiplexer. A device that determines how to map ATM cells into SONET rings. SAP Service Access Point. The point at which the services of an OSI layer are made available to the next highest layer. A SAP is used for the following purposes: 1. When the application initiates an outgoing call to a remote ATM device, a destination_SAP specifies the ATM address of the remote device, and also specifies further addressing that identifies the target software entity within the remote device. 2. When the application prepares to respond to incoming calls from remote ATM devices, a local_SAP specifies the ATM address of the device housing the application, and also specifies further addressing that identifies the application within the local device. Sapphire Another term for Connection Gateway API.. SAR segmentation and reassembly. A process of segmenting relatively large data packets into smaller packets compatible with SAR. It often works in conjunction with ATM, SMDS, and X.25 networks. scope number Similar to an IP subnet mask, the scope number specifies how much of the 13-byte network part is common to the switch addresses at a particular level in the hierarchy. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-46 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary SCR sustained cell rate. A parameter defined by the ATM forum for ATM traffic management. The SCR is an upper bound on the conforming average rate of an ATM connection over time scales which are long enough relative to those for which the peak cell rate (PCR) is defined. The enforcement of this boundary by the UPC can allow the network to allocate sufficient resources, but less than those based on the PCR, while at the same time, ensuring that the network’s performance objectives can still be achieved. SCSI Small Computer System Interface. A standard high-speed parallel interface defined by ANSI. A SCSI interface is used to connect CPUs to SCSI peripheral devices. SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy, a set of fiber-optics-based standards planned for use with SONET and ATM in Europe, standardized by the ITU-T. Some of the SDH and SONET standards are identical. SDRAM Synchronized Dynamic Random Access Memory. An emerging replacement for DRAM because SDRAM's memory access cycles are synchronized with the CPU clock, thus eliminating the wait time associated with memory fetches between RAM and the CPU. segment A single ATM link, or group of interconnected links, of an ATM connection. segmentation and reassembly See SAR. SEL selector. A subfield in the SETUP message part of an ATM endpoint address domain specific part (DSP), defined by ISO 10589. This is not used for ATM network routing, but by ATM end systems only. semipermanent virtual circuit See SPVC. serial A transmission method that sends each data bit sequentially on a single channel. server Any system that maintains and administers files that are used by independent, client applications. service access multiplexer See SAM. service access point See SAP. service level interworking See FRF.8 service protocol translation A process that performs segmentation and reassembly (SAR) to adapt non-native ATM services to ATM-based services and back again. It ensures that the data stream is mapped to standard ATM Adaption Layer (AAL) protocols. service provider A company that offers voice, video, or data access to a network or to another service; for example, to the Internet. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-47 Glossary service types A category of data transmission provided by a public data network in which the data signaling rate, the terminal operating mode, and the code structure, are standardized. Note: Class of service (service types) are defined in CCITT Recommendation X.1. service-specific connection-oriented protocol See SSCOP. service-specific convergence sublayer See SSCS. SF superframe. A DS1 framing format is which 24 DSO timeslots plus a coded framing bit are organized into a frame. This frame is then repeated 12 times to form the superframe. SG signaling gateway. A devise that initiates and manages call setup and release, and then executes call routing in a Signaling System 7 (SS7) configuration. A signaling gateway uses an Access SS7 Gateway Control Protocol-Q.931+ (ASGCPQ.931+) license, and Internet Protocol Device Control (IPDC) license, or a Q.931+ license. It uses a TCP/IP protocol to carry control messages back and forth between a Multiservice Media Gateway. Signaling System 7 See SS7. signaling The control of information a network uses to set up and maintain connections. On-hook and off-hook are, for instance, the familiar voice-telephone signals that tell the central office that you have picked up the telephone handset or hung up at the end of a call. In-channel signaling reserves part of the available data-communication bandwidth for control information. Out-of-channel signaling schemes use a separate channel for signals, so data transmissions can use all available bandwidth. signaling gateway See SG. silence detection The identification of unwanted periods of silence caused by corrupt sound data or certain system failures. silence suppression The removal of pauses in speech before transporting voice traffic over a network. SIMM Single In-line Memory Module. A form of chip packaging found in PCs and Macs where the pins are arranged in a single row protruding from the chip. It can be inserted into a slot like an expansion adapter. simple mail transfer protocol See SMTP. simple network management proto- See SNMP. col PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-48 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary simplex The operation of a channel in only one direction with no ability to operate in the other direction. single in-line memory module See SIMM. single-mode See SM. single-mode fiber A fiber that allows only a single mode of light to propagate. SM single mode. A reference to the single mode fiber which is used in Lucent’s optical modules. small computer system interface See SCSI. SMDS Switched Multimegabit Data Service. A connectionless, highspeed data transmission service intended for applications in a metropolitan area network (MAN) environment, primarily for LAN-to-LAN connections. SMDS converts data into cells before presenting it to the network. Frame relay and ATM overshadow this service. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. An application-level protocol which runs over TCP/IP, supporting text-oriented email between devices supporting Message Handling Service. SMTS A single-mode module which uses traffic shaping for flow control. SNA Systems Network Architecture. A successful computer network architecture from IBM. A mainframe host computer controls the network, with boundaries including the host computer, front-end processors, cluster controllers, and terminals (the network's domain) establishes logical paths between network nodes, and uses routing information contained in a protocol which uses 7 layers. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. A standard way for computers to share networking information. In SNMP, two types of communicating devices exist: agents and managers. An agent provides networking information to a manager application running on another computer. The agents and managers share a database of information, called the Management Information Base (MIB). An agent can use a message called a traps-PDU to send unsolicited information to the manager. SNMP agent The interface that enables a device to communicate with other SNMP devices. The agent for a PSAX system can be configured to send SNMP messages to a management station without a specific request. These messages are called traps. To retrieve and modify MIB information through an agent, the software loaded on the CPU of the PSAX system itself must be directly accessed, either through the console user interface or an SNMP-based manager, such as the AQueView® element Management System. soft permanent virtual circuit See SPVC. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-49 Glossary software release distribution See SRD. SONET Synchronous Optical Network. An optical multiplexing interface for wideband, high-speed transmission (up to 13.22 Gbps), used mainly in carrier and telecommunications networks. source routing See SR. SPVC SemiPermanent Virtual Circuit. A PVC-type connection in which SVCs are used for call setup and (automatic) rerouting. Once either a PVC connection or a permanent virtual path connection has been configured, an SPVC can be established between the two network interfaces serving the PVC connection through the use of signaling procedures. Consequently, this type of connection has attributes of both a switched virtual connection and a permanent virtual connection. SR source routing. A bridging method whereby the source at a data exchange determines the route subsequent frames use. SRAM Static Random Access Memory. A form of RAM that retains its data without constantly refreshing, as DRAM must. SRAM is commonly used to cache data traveling between the CPU and a RAM subsystem populated with DRAM. SRD software release distribution. The way by which a user upgrades the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway system software. SS7 Signaling System 7. A signaling method, separate from voice or data channel, that allows intelligent network elements exchange information among themselves. SSCOP Service-Specific Connection-Oriented Protocol. This protocol provides mechanisms for establishing, releasing, and monitoring signaling information exchanged between peer signaling entities. SSCS Service Specific Convergence Sublayer. The portion of the convergence sublayer that is dependent upon the type of traffic that is being converted. standalone A monolithic application for AQueView®that binds the client and the server into a single process, without HP OpenView or NNM. static random access memory See SRAM. static route A route that is manually entered into a routing table. Static routes take precedence over routes chosen by all dynamic routing protocols. STM-1 synchronous transport. A SHD standard for transmitting over an OC-3 optical fiber at 155.52 Mbps. An STM-1 module is equivalent to a SONET STS-3c module. STM-4c The “c” stands for concatentated, which means the whole STM-4 is seen as one link. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-50 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary Stratum3–4 timing, Stratum 3–4 module These terms refer to the stratum level, the clock that lets a digital network transmission know where it begins and ends. These levels were established by ANSI/TI.101.1987, “Synchronization Interface Standards for Digital Networks.” Level one is best, and is usually based on atomic clock or reference oscillator. Stratum 2 tracks on input and in an emergency, holds to the last, best estimate of that input reference frequency. Level 3 also tracks an input but over a wider range. Stratum 4 also tracks an input, but has a wider adjustment and drift range. It has no holdover capability, and runs freely within the adjustment range limits if the external reference fails. Therefore, it is typically written as either Stratum 3, or Stratum 4, not 3–4. However, the Stratum in the PacketStar line qualifies for both Stratum 3 and Stratum 4, so 3–4 is appropriate. structured A type of bandwidth that offers framing which indicates where a channel begins and ends, while an unstructured bandwidth has no framing. While unstructured bandwidth can only be unchannelized (because it does not have framing), structured bandwidth can either be channelized or unchannelized. structured circuit emulation service See channelized circuit emulation service. subchannel connection The associations between IP network interfaces and their traffic-bearing connections. subnet A portion of a network, possibly a physically independent network, which shares a network address with other portions of the network and is distinguished by a subnet number. A subnet is to a network what a network is to the Internet. subnet mask A bit pattern that lets a network administrator define a “subnet” by using the host-machine portion of the IP address. A subnet mask has binary ones in positions which correspond to the network and subnet parts of the address, and zeros in the remaining, host-address positions. During IP address resolution, zero fields in the mask hide corresponding host-address field in the address, causing the router to ignore them. The router resolves only the networking part of the address, leaving the host part for the local subnet to resolve. This increases speed and makes multicasting more efficient. Subnet mass are usually written in the decimal notation used for IP address, 255 represents a binary one and 0 represents a zero. subtree Any node within a tree, along with any selection of connected, descendant nodes. superframe See SF. sustained cell rate See SCR. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-51 Glossary SVC Switched Virtual Circuit. A network connection that is created only as needed, and lasts only the duration of the message transfer. Used extensively in X.25 and frame relay networks, SVCs are far more complex than permanent virtual circuits, as they automatically consider the level of network congestion, including at both end points, and dynamically balance the network, by transmitting on a route specifically designed for the least possible delay in transmitting data. SVCC Switched Virtual Channel Connection, a switched connection is one that is established and taken down dynamically through control signaling. A virtual channel connection is an ATM connection where switching is performed on the VPI/VCI fields of each cell. switch A computer that maintains circuits by matching an input port to an output port for each connection. The switch contains switching tables to track this information. switched multimegabit data service See SMDS. switched virtual channel connection See SVCC. switched virtual circuit See SVC. symmetric operation A connection with the same bandwidth in both directions. synchronization The timing of separate elements or events to occur simultaneously. Hardware and software must be synchronized so file transfers can occur. synchronized dynamic random access memory See SDRAM. synchronous digital hierarchy See SDH. synchronous optical network See SONET. systems network architecture See SNA. T T1 A digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mbit/s, used in North America. Typically channelized into 24 DS0s, each link is capable of carrying a single voice conversation or data stream. T1 links use two pairs of twisted pair wires. T3 A digital transmission link with a capacity of 45 Mbps, or 28 T1 lines. tails An echo cancellation term. The tail, measured in milliseconds, is the amount of your conversation which returns to you in echo, as measured in milliseconds. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A networking protocol allowing communication over interconnected networks between computers with diverse hardware architectures and various operating systems. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-52 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary TDM time-division multiplex. A method of transmitting a number of separate voice, data, and/or video signals simultaneously over one communications medium by interleaving a piece of each signal, one after another. TDMA time-division multiplex access. One of several technologies used to separate multiple conversation transmissions over a finite allocation of bandwidth. TDMA allocates a set amount of frequency bandwidth and a specific timeslot to each user. Cellular telephones send bursts of information during those timeslots. The receiving equipment then reassembles the packets of information into the original voice components. This allows multiple simultaneous conversations over the same equipment. telco The local telephone company. (The industry derives the word “telco” from the word “telecommunications.”) telco frame, telco rack A metal framework on which equipment is mounted. Telcordia Technologies See Bellcore. telecommunications management network See TMN. telnet Terminal/remote host protocol developed for ARPAnet to allow a computer user to log onto a computer in a remote location and communicate between the two. Mostly superseded by GUI browsers such as Netscape and Internet Explorer. terminating node The last point of connection from a network. throughput The measure of the rate at which data flows through a device. Time-division multiplex See TDM. time-division multiplex access See TDMA. timeslot management channel See TMC. TMC Timeslot Management Channel. A dedicated channel for sending control messages to set up and tear down calls in a T1 frame. In a GR-303 interface group, the primary TMC is usually in channel 24 of the first DS1, while the redundant TMC if used, is in a different DS1. TMN Telecommunications Management Network. A framework for describing and managing network resources. TMN specifies a set of standard functions with standard interfaces, and makes use of a management network which is separate and distinct from the information transmission network. toll quality A description of the standard, TDM, 56kbps telephone quality usually available in the U.S. A MOS (Mean Opinion Score) test is conducted by asking people their opinion on the quality of voice calls on specific equipment. The standard, highquality TDM voice equates to 4.0 on the grading scale. Lucent achieves a MOS score of 3.9 with our 8:1 compression. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-53 Glossary toll routing The intra-switching of long distance telephone calls. tone detection A signal provided by a network or modem. When a CO detects this signal, it is sent through the network to an active call center. topology The configuration of a communication network. The physical topology is the way the network looks. LAN physical topologies includes the bus, ring and star. WAN physical topology may be meshed, with each network node directly connected to every other network node, or partially meshed. Logical topology describes the way the network works. ToS Type of Service. A feature that enables an Internet device to select the Quality of Service (QoS) for an application. The ToS is specified by precedence, delay, throughput, reliability, and cost. You can configure a Multiservice Media Gateway chassis to set priority bits and TOS classes of service on behalf of customer applications. The Multiservice Media Gateway chassis does not implement priority queuing, but it does set information that can be used by upstream routers to prioritize and select links for particular data streams. ToS mask A field made up of letters of numbers and wildcard characters, that is used to filter data based on a subscriber’s type of service. ToS Value An indicator that denotes a better quality of service on a user’s line. For example, voice data would be set with a ToS value for minimum delay. traffic descriptor Generic traffic parameters that capture the intrinsic traffic characteristics of a requested ATM connection. traffic management An ATM term for network actions taken to prevent system congestion of layer traffic traffic shaping A method for controlling the flow of data traffic. It is implemented on modules that are offered with traffic-shaping variations: the OC-3c Multimode, OC-3c Single-Mode, STM-1 Multimode, and STM-1 Single-Mode modules. Traffic shaping ensures that the variable bit-rate (VBR) traffic entering the PSAX system (via the OC-3c and STM-1 modules) complies with the parameters of the established service contracts. Transmission control protocol/Inter- See TCP/IP. net protocol trap A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) mechanism for transferring data in an unsolicited manner to the network management system. Traps indicate when a significant event, such as a threshold, has been reached. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-54 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary tree A data structure containing zero or more nodes that are linked together in a hierarchical fashion. If there are any nodes, one node is the root; each node except the root is the child or one and only one other node; and each node has zero or more nodes as children. tree structure Any structure that has the essential organizational properties of a tree. See tree. trunk alarming A type of fault detection on ATM trunks. Trunk alarms fall into two categories. Logical trunk alarms provide statistical alarming on dropped cells and are separately maintained for the virtual trunks on the same port. Physical alarm trunks are used when a virtual trunk also has trunk port alarms that are shared with all other virtual trunks on the port. These alarms are cleared and set together for all the virtual trunks sharing the same port. trunk group A collection of trunks that all terminate at the same public switch, PBX, or server. trunk line 1. A direct line between two telephone switchboards. 2. The main line of a communications system. trunking The establishment of a communications line between two switching systems. Type 102, 105, 108 milliwatt termination tests For the 102, 105 108 milliwatt termination tests, calls are defined for a responder, a director, and a remote office test line (ROTL). The PSAX behaves as the ROTL, as it makes more logical sense for the 5E or PBX to be the responder (initiator of the test). The initiator of the tests sends an inband MF tone to stimulate the PSAX to generate the tone. Type of Service See ToS. U UBR undefined (or unspecified) bit rate. An ATM service class that handles bursty LAN traffic and data that is tolerant of delays and cell loss. UBR is a best-effort service that does not specify bit-rate or traffic values, and offers no QoS guarantees. undefined (or unspecified) bit rate See UBR. UNI User Network Interface. The physical, electrical, and functional demarcation between the user and the network service provider. A UNI sets the specifications for procedures and protocols between the user's equipment and an ATM or frame relay network. unidirectional The transmission of information in one direction only. universal time coordinate See UTC. unshielded twisted pair See UTP. unspecified bit rate See UBR. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-55 Glossary UPC usage parameter control. Network actions used to monitor and control traffic at the end system. UPS detects negotiated parameters violations, and it can take appropriate action to protect against malicious or unintentional misbehavior. Its actions include cell tagging and cell discarding. uplink The connectivity between an ATM border node and an upnode. upnode In ATM, the border node's outside neighbor in the common peer group. The upnode must be a neighboring peer of one of the border node's ancestors. usage parameter control See UPC. user network interface See UNI. user-to-network (UNI) Implementa- See FRF.1 tion Agreement UTC Universal Time Coordinate. The new term for Greenwich Mean Time. See GMT. UTP unshielded twisted pair. A pair of wires that is twisted so as to minimize the crosstalk with other pairs of wires in the same cable (which are twisted at a slightly different rate) but not shielded. V V ac volt, alternating current V dc volt, direct current V.35 A standard module used for communication between a network access device and a packet network. It provides clocking 19.2 Kbps to 4.0966 Mbps. validation The checking of data for correctness or for compliance with applicable standards, rules, and conventions. variable bit rate See VBR. variable bit rate - real time See VBR-RT variable bit rate- non-real time See VBR-NRT. VBR variable bit rate. A voice service over an ATM switch which provides only as much bandwidth as voice conversations need at any moment (making bandwidth “elastic”). The remaining bandwidth is dynamically allocated to other services. VBR be divided into VBRnrt (variable bit rate, nonreal time) and VBRrt (variable bit rate, real time). See also VBRNRT, and VBR-RT. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-56 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary VBR-NRT variable bit rate-non-real time. A voice service that operates on both a connection and connectionless basis and allows delay variance between the delivery of cell. VBR-NRT is used for data applications that have potentially bursty traffic characteristics, including LAN interconnect, CAD/CAM, and multimedia. This class can be used to support SMDS (switched multimegabit data service). VBR-RT variable bit rate - real time. A voice service that operates on a connection basis and offers very low delay variance but requires access to a variable amount of network bandwidth. It is used for such applications as packet video and voice. VC virtual channel. A logical circuit set up to ensure reliable communication between two network devices. virtual circuit. The pre-arranged route through the ATM network that all cells in an ATM transmission follow. VCC virtual channel connection,. An ATM term describing unidirectional virtual channel links that extends beyond where the ATM service users access the ATM layer. The VCC end is where the cell load is passed to, or received from, the users of the ATM layer. VCI virtual channel identifier. An ATM term for the 16-bit field in the ATM cell header that indicates which virtual channel the ATM should use in routing the stream of cells. verification The act of determining whether an operation has been accomplished correctly. VI Virtual Interface. Connections made to a module’s physical ports that allow virtual channels (VCs) to be assigned to virtual trunks, each with its own priority queue. By using VIs instead of physical connections, it is possible to achieve advanced bandwidth management capability that allows for fully flexible service provisioning. Working in conjunction with AQueMan software and Usage Parameter Control (UPC), VIs give service providers a way to maximize revenue by oversubscribing their bandwidth without violating their QoS agreements. virtual access line A communications link that appears to the end user to be dedicated point-to-point circuit. For IMA, the virtual access line would be the link between IMA groups. virtual channel See VC. virtual channel indentifier See VCI. virtual circuit See VC. virtual circuit connection See VCC. virtual interface See VI. virtual network navigator See VNN. virtual path See VP. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-57 Glossary virtual path identifier See VPI. virtual private network See VPN. virtual router A virtual router is a grouping of IP interfaces. Each virtual router with IP interfaces has its own associated IP routing table, IP ARP table, IP route cache, and IP address pools, and maintains it’s own routing and packet statistics. VNN Virtual Network NavigatorTM. Lucent’s, open shortest path first network routing technology embedded as firmware in switches such as the Lucent GX 550TM. multiservice WAN switch. VNN builds seamless networks where data and OAM functions flow seamlessly across service and technology (ATM, frame relay and IP) boundaries to build end-to-end multiservice networks. voice compression The process of reducing a voice signal to use less bandwidth during transmission to obtain a channel of 32 Kbps or fewer, currently to under 10 Kbps. voice traffic over ATM See VoTA. VP virtual path. A group of VCs carried between two points that provide a way to bundle traffic headed in the same direction. VPC virtual path connections. Unidirectional virtual path links between virtual path terminators. VPI Virtual Path Identifier. An ATM term for the 8-bit field in the ATM cell header that indicates which virtual path the ATM should use in routing the cell. VPN Virtual Private Network, a restricted network that uses public wires to connect nodes. A VPN provides a way to encapsulate, or "tunnel," private data cheaply, reliably, and securely through a public network, usually the Internet. VToA voice traffic over ATM. A single integrated infrastructure, that is able to manage and deliver all subscriber signals (audio, data, voice, and video) and switched and dedicated services reliably and efficiently. W WAN Wide Area Network. A computer and voice network geographically larger than a metropolitan area network (MAN). Telephone companies treat WANs different from MANs because of speed of light-timing considerations, and because regional Bell operating companies are prohibited from carrying traffic across Local Access Transport Areas (LATAS). wide area network See WAN. wideband Originally, any line allowing more than voice transmission. It has come to be interpreted as any facility allowing more than narrowband transmission (T1 at 1.544 megabits per second). workstation A powerful, stand-alone computer. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-58 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary X xDSL A generic term standing for a variety of digital subscriber line services (the lowercase x standing for generic): ADSL, HDSL, IDSL, SDSL, and VDSL. This family of services provides extremely high bandwidth over the telephone company unshielded twisted-pair lines. Telephone companies are offering these services to compete with the cable TV industry’s high speed access via modem as a way to provide high speed Internet services to consumers. Z ZBTSI Zero Byte Timeslot Interchange. A technique used with the T carrier extended superframe (ESF) in which an area in the ESF frame carries information about the location of all-zero bytes (eight consecutive “0”s) within the data stream. ZCS zero code suppression. This type of line coding substitutes a 1 for the second least-significant bit of every all-zero byte in AMI-encoded data. ZCS encoding has no effect on voice communications, but corrupts digital data. Zero Bit Timeslot Interchange See ZBTSI. zero code suppression See ZCS. PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Glossary-59 Glossary PacketStar® 2-Port E3 ATM Module User Guide, Issue 1 Glossary-60 Release 7.0 255-700-171 Part Number: 514M0A7001D1 Copyright © 2001 Lucent Technologies All rights reserved. ">
/
Скачать
Просто дружеское напоминание. Вы можете просмотреть документ прямо здесь. Но самое главное, наш ИИ уже прочитал его. Он может объяснить сложные вещи простыми словами, ответить на ваши вопросы на любом языке и помочь вам быстро перемещаться даже по самым длинным или сложным документам.
Общедоступная ссылка обновлена
Общедоступная ссылка на ваш чат была обновлена. Вы можете просматривать и управлять своими ссылками на чат после регистрации здесь.
Общедоступная ссылка на документ
Реклама